Korg Pa50 Users Manual Pa50SD 1.0 User’s (E1)

PA50 to the manual 07b94da4-dac9-4568-901e-ffe6017ba07d

2015-02-03

: Korg Korg-Pa50-Users-Manual-468805 korg-pa50-users-manual-468805 korg pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 248 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

The BALANCE slider
- Notice regarding disposal (EU only)
  - Instructions pertaining to a risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons
Important safety instructions
KEEP these instructions CLEAN ONLY WITH A DRY CLOTH
Introduction
Basic Guide
Reference Guide
Appendix

USER'S

MANUAL

ENGLISH

Ver. 1.0

Instructions pertaining to a risk of ﬁre, electric shock, or injury to persons

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING — When using electrical products, basic pre-

cautions should be followed, including the following:

Location. Using the unit in the following locations can

result in a malfunction.

• In direct sunlight

• Locations of extreme temperature or humidity

• Excessively dusty or dirty locations

• Locations of excessive vibration

Power supply. Please connect the designated AC adapter

to an AC outlet of the correct voltage. Do not connect it to

an AC outlet of voltage other than that for which your unit

is intended.

Interference with other electrical devices. This prod-

uct contains a microcomputer. Radios and televisions

placed nearby may experience reception interference.

Operate this unit at a suitable distance from radios and

televisions.

Handling. To avoid breakage, do not apply excessive force

to the switches or controls.

Care. If the exterior becomes dirty, wipe it with a clean,

dry cloth. Do not use liquid cleaners such as benzene or

thinner, or cleaning compounds or ﬂammable polishes.

Keep this manual. After reading this manual, please

keep it for later reference.

Keeping foreign matter out of your equipment.

• Never set any container with liquid in it near this

equipment. if liquid gets into the equipment, it could

cause a breakdown, ﬁre, or electrical shock.

• Be careful not to let metal objects get into the equip-

ment. If something does slip into the equipment,

unplug the AC adapter from the wall outlet. Then

contact your nearest Korg dealer or the store where

the equipment was purchased.

KEEP THESE INSTRUCTIONS

CLEAN ONLY WITH A DRY CLOTH

THE FCC REGULATION WARNING (FOR THE

U.S.A. AND CANADA ONLY)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-

ates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,

if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation. If

this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit

different from that to which the receiver is con-

nected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV tech-

nician for help.

Unauthorized changes or modiﬁcation to this system

can void theuser's authority to operate this equipment.

DATA HANDLING

Data in memory may sometimes be lost due to incorrect user

action. Be sure to save important data to card. KORG will not

be responsible for damages caused by data loss.

LCD DISPLAY

Some pages of the manuals show LCD screens along with

an explanation of functions and operations. All sound

names, parameter names, and values are merely examples

and may not always match the actual display you are

working on.

TRADEMARKS

Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer,

Inc. MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation. All trademarks or registered

trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

DISCLAIMER

The information contained in this manual have been care-

fully revised and checked through. Due to our constant

efforts to improve our products, the speciﬁcations might

differ to those in the manual. KORG is not responsible for

any eventual differences found between the speciﬁcations

and the contents of the instruction manual - the speciﬁca-

tions being subject to change without prior notice.

LIABILITY

KORG products are manufactured under strict speciﬁca-

tions and voltages required by each country. These prod-

ucts are warranted by the KORG distributor only in each

country. Any KORG product not sold with a warranty

card or carrying a serial number disqualiﬁes the product

sold from the manufacturer's/distributor's warranty and

liability. This requirement is for your own protection and

safety.

SERVICE AND USER’S ASSISTANCE

For service, please contact your nearest Authorized KORG

Service Center. For more information on KORG products,

and to ﬁnd software and accessories for your keyboard,

please contact your local Authorized KORG distributor.

PA50SD ON THE WEB

For up-to-date information, please, point your web

browser to http://www.korgpa.com.

NOTICE REGARDING DISPOSAL (EU ONLY)

When this “crossed-out wheeled bin” symbol is displayed on the product, owner’s manual, battery, or battery package, it signiﬁes

that when you wish to dispose of this product, manual, package or battery you must do so in an approved manner. Do not dis-

card this product, manual, package or battery along with ordinary household waste. Disposing in the correct manner will pre-

vent harm to human health and potential damage to the environment. Since the correct method of disposal will depend on the

applicable laws and regulations in your locality, please contact your local administrative body for details. If the battery contains

heavy metals in excess of the regulated amount, a chemical symbol is displayed below the “crossed-out wheeled bin” symbol on

the battery or battery package.

THE BALANCE SLIDER

When turning the instrument on, please be assured the BALANCE slider is set to

the center. This sets both Sequencer 1 (SEQ1) and Sequencer 2 (SEQ2) to their

maximum level. This will avoid you start a Song without hearing anything.

HOW TO…

Keyboard

…select a Sound Program 26

…select a Performance 25

…play a Sound Program across the

whole keyboard, as with a piano 24

…split the keyboard in two 24

…add sounds to the right hand 24

…mute/unmute sounds 24

Style Play mode

…select a Style 26

…start/stop the Style 29

…select a Fill or a Break 29

…select a Style Variation 30

…see the Style tracks 41

…create a new Style 52

Song Play mode

…play a Song (Standard MIDI File) 27

…see the Lyrics 74

…see the Song tracks 73

…start both Sequencers at the same time 18, 79

Backing Sequence mode

…record a new Backing Sequence (Song) 82

Song mode

…record a new Song 91

…edit a Standard MIDI File 88

In general

…turn the speakers off 125

…change the Damper polarity 126

…select the Arabic Scale 34

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction

Welcome! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Live Performing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Useful links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Making a backup copy of system files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Loading the operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Reloading the Factory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Connecting the AC power adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Turning the instrument on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Controlling the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

The BALANCE slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Audio Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Audio Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

MIDI connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Damper Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

The music stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Display and User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Display controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Interface structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Message windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Symbols and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Grayed-out non-available parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Basic Guide

Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Playing on the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Selecting, muting/unmuting and soloing a track . . . . . . . . 24

Selecting a Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Selecting a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Selecting a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Selecting a Single Touch Setting (STS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Changing all keyboard tracks at once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Playing a Song from a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Shortcut to see the original bank for a Style,

Performance or Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

1 - Playing in realtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

2 - Playing a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3 - Playing a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

4 - Recording a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

5 - Editing a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

6 - The Arabic Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Midifiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

The General MIDI standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

The Global channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

The Control channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

MIDI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Connecting Pa50SD to a Master keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Connecting the Pa50SD to a MIDI accordion . . . . . . . . . . .37

Connecting the Pa50SD to an external sequencer . . . . . . . .37

Playing another instrument with the Pa50SD . . . . . . . . . . .38

Reference Guide

Style Play operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

What’s a Style? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Styles and Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Changing and resetting the Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

The DIRECT SD bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Style tracks page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

How to select Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

The Write window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Page 1 - Mixer: Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Page 2 - Mixer: Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Page 3 - Mixer: FX Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Page 4 - Tuning: Detune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Page 5 - Tuning: Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Page 6 - Tuning: PitchBend Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Page 7 - FX: A/B Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Page 8 - FX: C/D Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Page 9 - FX: A editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Page 10 - FX: B editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Page 11 - FX: C editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Page 12 - FX: D editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Page 13 - Track: Easy edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Page 14 - Track: Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Page 15 - Track: Internal/External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Page 16 - R.T. controls: Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Page 17 - R.T. controls: Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Page 18 - R.T. controls: Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Page 19 - R.T. controls: Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Page 20 - Style controls: Drum/Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Page 21 - Style controls: Wrap Around / Keyboard

Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Page 22 - Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Page 23 - Preferences: Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Page 24 - Preferences: controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Style Record mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

The Style’s structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Style Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Entering the Record mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Listening to the Style while in Record/Edit mode . . . . . . . .53

Exit and Save/Abort Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

The Write window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

List of recorded events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Fast Delete using the control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Style Tracks page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Step Record page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Style Record procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Page 1 - Edit: Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Page 2 - Edit: Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Page 3 - Edit: Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Page 4 - Event Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Page 5 - Event Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Event Edit procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Page 6 - Edit: Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Page 7 - Edit: Delete All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Page 8 - Edit: Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Page 9 - Style Element Controls: Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Page 10 - Style Element Controls: Expression . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Page 11 - Style Element Controls: Keyboard Range . . . . . . 68

Page 12 - Style Element Controls: Chord Variation

Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Page 13 - Style Controls: Mode/Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Song Play operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format . . . . . . . . . . 70

Transport controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

MIDI Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Switching between sequencers during editing . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Selecting a Song composing its progressive number . . . . . 70

Realtime and sequencer tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Master Volume, Sequencer Volume, BALANCE . . . . . . . . 71

Effects in Song Play mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Groove Quantize window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

The Write window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Tracks 1-8 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Tracks 9-16 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Song Select page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

The Lyrics page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Playing a Jukebox file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Page 1 - Mixer: Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Page 2 - Mixer: Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Page 3 - Mixer: FX send A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Page 3 - Mixer: FX send C/D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Page 4 - FX: A/B Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Page 4 - FX: C/D Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Page 5 - FX: A editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Page 6 - FX: B editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Page 5 - FX: C editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Page 6 - FX: D editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Page 7 - Track: Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Page 8 - Track: Internal/External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Page 9 - Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Page 10 - Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Saving a list of Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Backing Sequence operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Transport controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

The Backing Sequence, Song and Song Play modes . . . . . . 82

How to playback a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Realtime Recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Chord/Acc Step recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Main Page (Backing Sequence Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Load Song page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Save Song page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Realtime Recording page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Chord/Acc Step Recording page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

How to delete a whole Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Song operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Transport controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Master Volume and Sequencer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format . . . . . . . . . .88

Fast track deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

How to delete a whole Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Tracks 1-8 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Tracks 9-16 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Song Select page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Save Song page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Realtime Record procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Step Record procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Song Record page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Step Record page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Page 1 - Mixer: Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Page 2 - Mixer: Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Page 3 - Mixer: FX Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Page 4 - Mixer: FX Send A/B (or C/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Page 5 - Tuning: Detune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Page 6 - Tuning: Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Page 7 - Tuning: PitchBend/Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Page 8 - FX: A/B Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Page 9 - FX: C/D Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Page 10 - FX: A editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Page 11 - FX: B editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Page 12 - FX: C editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Page 13 - FX: D editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Page 14 - Track: Easy edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Page 15 - Track: Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Page 16 - Track: Internal/External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Page 17 - Edit: Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Page 18 - Edit: Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Page 19 - Edit: Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Page 20 - Edit: Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Page 21 - Edit: Cut Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Page 22 - Edit: Insert Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Page 23 - Edit: Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Page 24 - Event Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Page 25 - Event Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Event Edit procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Program operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Sound Programs and Drum Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

The Compare function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

How to select oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Erase Program/Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

The ‘Write’ window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Page 1 - Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Page 2 - Sample (Sound Programs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

Page 2 - DK Samples (Drum Programs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Page 3 - Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Page 4 - Pitch LFO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Page 5 - Pitch LFO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Page 6 - Pitch EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Page 7 - Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Page 8 - Filter Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Page 9 - Filter LFO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Page 10 - Filter LFO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Page 11 - Filter EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Page 12 - Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Page 13 - Amp Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Page 14 - Amp LFO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Page 15 - Amp LFO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Page 16 - Amp EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Page 17 - LFO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Page 18 - LFO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Page 19 - Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Page 20 - FX1 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Page 21 - FX2 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Global edit environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

The Write window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Page 1 - General controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Page 2 - Master Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Page 3 - Assignable Pedal/Footswitch, Assignable

Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Page 4 - MIDI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Page 5 - MIDI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Page 6 - MIDI IN Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Page 7 - MIDI IN Controls (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Page 8 - MIDI IN Controls (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Page 9 - MIDI IN Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Page 10 - MIDI OUT Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Page 11 - MIDI OUT Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Card Edit environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

The WRITE/CARD IN USE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Supported cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Loading data created with the Pa80/Pa60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Card structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

File types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

File and folder size display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Navigation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Page 1 - Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Page 2 - Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Page 3 - Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Page 4 - Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Page 5 - Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Page 6 - New Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Page 7 - Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Page 8 - Utilities 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Page 9 - Utilities 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Appendix

Factory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Style Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Single Touch Settings (STS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Programs (bank order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Programs (Program Change order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Drum Kit instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

MIDI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Dynamic Modulation sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Filter/Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Pitch/Phase Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Mod./P.Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

ER/Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

Reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Mono – Mono Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

Assignable parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

List of functions assignable to the Footswitch . . . . . . . . . .225

List of functions assignable to the Pedal or Assignable

Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

List of sounds assignable to the Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

List of functions assignable to the Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

MIDI Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Recognized chords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Error messages & Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Alphabetical Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

INTRODUCTION

8Welcome!

Live Performing

1. WELCOME!

Welcome to the world of KORG Pa50SD Professional

Arranger! Pa50SD is one of the most powerful arranger avail-

able today, both for professional and home entertainment

use.

Here are some of the features of your new instrument:

• Powerful HI (Hyper Integrated) KORG sound genera-

tion system, as seen in our best professional synthesiz-

ers.

• OPOS (Objective Portable Operating System) multi-

tasking operating system, to let you load data while

playing your instrument.

• Operating System updates, to load new features from

card. Don’t let your instrument get old!

• Solid State Disk (SSD), for any system update–a smart

way to replace the usual ROM memory.

• SD card drive, capable of reading and writing on SD and

MMC memory types.

• Direct Style access from SD card.

• General MIDI Level 2 Sounds-compatible.

• More than 660 Sound Programs.

• 4 multieffect processor, each with 89 effect types.

• 160 Performances and 1,216 Single Touch Settings

(STS), for fast setting of keyboard sounds and effects.

• 304 Styles.

• XDS Double Sequencer with Crossfader.

• Style Record and Edit

• Full-featured sequencer (Song Record and Edit)

• Integrated speakers, for the most true sound reproduc-

tion.

• Wide Custom Display.

LIVE PERFORMING

Pa50SD has been carefully designed to be used live. The “real-

time” word has its full meaning in this instrument. Perfor-

mances allow the instant selection of all the tracks on the

keyboard and a suitable Style; STSs allow an instant selection

of the keyboard tracks; and Styles are the realtime backing

companions for your realtime playing.

USEFUL LINKS

Your preferred KORG dealer not only carries this keyboard,

but also a whole bunch of hardware and software accessories.

You should ask him for more Programs, Styles, and other

useful music materials.

Each KORG distributor can supply you with useful informa-

tion. Just give him a call for additional services. In the

English-speaking world, here are the relevant addresses:

USA KORG USA, 316 South Service Road, Melville,

New York, 11747, USA

Tel:1-516-333-9100, Fax:1-516-333-9108

Canada Jam Industries, 620 McCaffrey, St-Laurent,

QC, Canada, H4T 1N1

Tel. (514) 738-3000, Fax (514) 737-5069

UK KORG UK Ltd, 9 Newmarket Court, Kingston,

Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire, MK10, 0AU

Telephone: 01908 857100

UK Technical Support Tel: 01908 857122, Fax:

01908 857199

E-mail: info@korg.co.uk

Many KORG distributors also have their own web page on

the internet, where you can ﬁnd infos and software. Useful

web pages in English are the following:

www.korg.com

www.korg.co.uk

www.korgcanada.com

A place to ﬁnd operating system updates and various system

ﬁles (for example, a full backup of the factory data) is at the

following link:

www.korgpa.com

Other useful information can be found worldwide by access-

ing to other KORG web sites, like the following:

www.korg.co.jp

www.laboitenoiredumusicien.com

www.korg.de

www.ekomusicgroup.com

www.korg.es

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual is divided in three sections:

•A Basic Guide, containing an overview of the instru-

ment, as well as a series of practical guides (named

“Tutorials”).

•A Reference Guide, with each page and parameter

described in detail.

•An Appendix, with a list of data and useful information

for the advanced user.

Within the manual, you will ﬁnd the following abbreviations:

The parameter can be saved onto a Perfor-

mance by pressing the WRITE button.

The parameter can be saved onto the current

Style Performance by pressing the WRITE but-

ton.

The parameter can be saved onto a Single

Touch Setting by pressing the WRITE button.

The parameter can be saved onto the Global,

by going to the Global environment (see “Glo-

bal edit environment” on page 125) and press-

ing the WRITE button.

MAKING A BACKUP COPY OF SYSTEM FILES

Before starting playing with your new Pa50SD, we suggest

you make a back-up copy of all system data, including Pro-

grams, Performances and Styles, in case the internal data is

changed.

To backup the Operating System, please see “Save OS” on

page 140.

To backup the Factory Data (Styles, Programs…), see

“Backup Data” on page 141.

Welcome!

Loading the operating system

LOADING THE OPERATING SYSTEM

Your Pa50SD can be constantly updated as new versions of

the operating system are released by KORG. You can down-

load the operating system from www.korgpa.com. Please,

read the Readme ﬁle included with the operating system

itself.

You can see which version of the operating systems is

installed in your Pa50SD by keeping the SHIFT button

pressed, and pressing the ENTER and EXIT buttons together.

The operating system version number will appear in the dis-

play. Press EXIT to close the message window.

To load a new system, follow these instructions:

1. Copy the three operating system’s ﬁles in the root of an

SD card. These are the needed ﬁles:

• BPa50SD.Sys

• NBPa50SD.Sys

• OsPa50SD.lzx

2. Turn the instrument off, and insert the card containing

the operating system into the card drive.

3. Turn the instrument on. A message appears in the dis-

play, asking if you want to load the operating system.

4. Press ENTER to load, or EXIT to cancel the loading pro-

cedure. If you press ENTER, wait until the loading is ﬁn-

ished.

When the operating system is ﬁnished loading, a mes-

sage appears, asking you to remove the card and press

any button.

Hint: When done, delete the operating system ﬁles, to

avoid Pa50SD starts the upgrade procedure each time it is

turned on with the same card in the drive.

5. Remove the card, and press any button.

RELOADING THE FACTORY DATA

Should the internal memory content get damaged, you can

reload the original Factory Data from the backup card. See

“Restore Data” on page 141.

10 Start up

Connecting the AC power adapter

2. START UP

CONNECTING THE AC POWER ADAPTER

Connect the supplied AC

power adapter to the dedi-

cated socket on the rear of the

instrument. Then, plug it into

a wall socket.

Warning: Use only the sup-

plied adapter, or an adapter

suggested by Korg. Other

adapters may look similar,

but they may damage your

instrument!

TURNING THE INSTRUMENT ON AND OFF

• Press the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the

instrument on. The display will light up, showing a wel-

come message.

• Press again the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn

the instrument off.

Warning: When turning the instrument off, all data con-

tained in RAM (a volatile memory, used for Song editing)

will be lost. On the contrary, data contained in the SSD

disk (a non-volatile memory, used for Factory and User

data) will be preserved (see “Memory Mode” on page 51).

CONTROLLING THE VOLUME

• Use the MASTER VOL-

UME slider to control the

overall volume of the

instrument. This slider

controls the volume of the

sound going to the internal

speakers, the L/MONO &

RIGHT OUTPUTS, and

the HEADPHONES con-

nector.

Note: Start at a moderate level, then raise the MASTER

VOLUME up. Don’t keep the volume at an uncomfortable

level for too long.

• Use the ACC/SEQ VOLUME slider to control the Style

tracks (drums, percussion, bass…) volume. This slider

also controls both Sequencers tracks, excluding the

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks.

• By default, you can use the ASSIGN.SLIDER to control

the keyboard tracks volume. This slider is user-assign-

able, but is set to the Keyboard Expression parameter by

default.

THE BALANCE SLIDER

The BALANCE slider sets the relative volume of the two

onboard sequencers (Sequencer1 and Sequencer 2).

• Move it fully left to set Sequencer 1 to the maximum

level and Sequencer 2 to zero.

• Move it fully right to set Sequencer 1 to zero and

Sequencer 2 to the maximum level.

• Move it to the center to set both Sequencer at the same

level.

Note: When turning the instrument on, move this slider to the

center, to avoid starting a Song at the minimum level.

HEADPHONES

Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES output, on the

rear of the insturment. You can use headphones with an

impedance of 16-200Ω (50Ω suggested). Use a headphone

distributor to connect more than one pair of headphones.

AUDIO OUTPUTS

You can send the sound to an external ampliﬁcation system,

instead of the internal speakers. This is useful when record-

ing, or when playing live.

Stereo. Connect two mono cables to the L/MONO &

RIGHT OUTPUTS. Connect the other end of the cables to a

stereo channel of your mixer, two mono channels, two pow-

ered monitors, or the TAPE/AUX input of your audio system.

Don’t use the PHONO inputs of your audio system!

Mono. Connect a mono cable to the L/MONO OUTPUT.

Connect the other end of the cable to a mono channel of your

mixer, a powered monitor, or a channel of your TAPE/AUX

input of a hi-ﬁ system (you will hear that channel only, unless

you can set the ampliﬁer to Mono mode).

AUDIO INPUTS

Connect any other electronic musical instrument, a mixer’s

output (non-powered), or a CD/tape player, to the INPUTS

on the back of the instrument. These inputs expect a line-

level signal. To connect a microphone, you need a dedicated

microphone preampliﬁer or a mixer.

Use the connected device’s volume control to adjust the input

level. Be careful not to make it distort (or “clip”). Here is how

to set the volume of the connected device:

• if the sound heard on Pa50SD’s outputs is too low, you

should increase the output level of the connected device.

• if it sounds ﬁne, it’s ok.

• if it distorts, you should lower the level a little, until the

sounds is ﬁne again.

MIDI CONNECTIONS

You can play the internal sounds of your Pa50SD with an

external controller, i.e. a master keyboard, a MIDI guitar, a

wind controller, a MIDI accordion, or a digital piano.

1. Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of

your controller to the MIDI IN connector on the

Pa50SD.

2. Select a transmission MIDI channel on your controller.

Some controllers, like the MIDI accordions, usually

Start up

Damper Pedal

transmit on more than one channel (see more informa-

tion in the MIDI chapter).

3. On the Pa50SD, select the MIDI Setup that best ﬁt your

controllers type (see “Page 4 - MIDI Setup” on

page 126).

DAMPER PEDAL

Connect a Damper (Sustain) pedal to the DAMPER connec-

tor on the back panel. Use a KORG PS1, PS2 or DS1H foot-

switch pedal, or a compatible one. To switch the Damper

polarity, see “Damper Pol. (Damper Polarity)” on page 126

DEMO

Listen to the built-in Demo Songs to appreciate the power of

the Pa50SD. There are 16 Demo Songs to choose from.

1. Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons

together. Their LEDs start blinking.

At this point, if you don’t press any other button, all the

Demo Songs will be played back.

2. Choose a page using the PAGE buttons. There are two

different pages in the Demo mode.

3. Select a Demo Song by pressing the corresponding

VOLUME/VALUE button around the display. The

Demo will automatically start.

4. Stop the Demo by pressing START/STOP.

5. Exit the Demo mode by pressing one of the MODE but-

tons.

THE MUSIC STAND

A music stand comes standard with your Pa50SD. Fit it into

the two dedicated holes in the back panel.

12 Front panel

3. FRONT PANEL

123 4 56

7890ABC

EF GHIJ

K LMNO d e f

[

`a b

Front panel

1MASTER VOLUME

This slider controls the overall volume of the instrument,

both of the internal speakers, the L/MONO and RIGHT out-

puts, and the HEADPHONES output.

Warning: At the maximum level, with rich-sounding Songs,

Styles or Programs, the internal speakers could distort during

signal peaks. Should this happen, lower the Master Volume a

little.

2ACC/SEQ VOLUME

This slider controls the accompaniment tracks volume (Style

Play mode) or the Song tracks volume, excluding the Real-

time tracks (Song and Song Play modes). This is a relative

control, whose effective maximum value is determined by the

MASTER VOLUME slider position.

3ASSIGN.SLIDER

This is a freely programmable slider (see “Sld (Slider)” on

page 126). By default, it acts as the Keyboard Expression con-

trol, to let you balance the relative volume of the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks.

4MODE section

Each of these buttons recalls one of the operating modes of

the instrument. Each mode excludes the others.

STYLE PLAY

Style Play mode, where you can play Styles

(automatic accompaniments) and/or play up

to four Realtime tracks on the keyboard.

In the main page, Realtime (Keyboard) tracks

are shown on the right half of the display. You

can reach the main page by pressing EXIT

from any of the Style Play edit pages. If you are

in a different operating mode, press STYLE

PLAY to recall the Style Play mode. If the

TRACK SELECT LED is on, press TRACK

SELECT to turn it off and see the Realtime

tracks.

This operating mode is automatically selected

when turning the instrument on.

SONG PLAY

Song Play mode, where you can playback 16-

track Songs in Standard Midi File (SMF) for-

mat directly from card. You can play “.MID”

and “.KAR” ﬁles directly from the card. Since

the Pa50SD is equipped with two sequencers,

you can even play two Songs at the same time,

and mix them with the BALANCE slider.

In addition to the Song tracks, you can play

one to four Realtime (Keyboard) tracks, along

with the Song(s). In the main page, Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks are shown on the right half

of the display. You can reach the main page by

pressing EXIT from any of the Song Play edit

pages. If you are in a different operating mode,

press SONG PLAY to recall the Song Play

mode. If the TRACK SELECT LED is on or

ﬂashing, press TRK SELECT one or two times

to turn it off and see the Realtime tracks.

B.SEQ Backing Sequence mode, where you can record

a new Song based on the Realtime and Style

tracks, and save it as a new Standard MIDI File.

SONG Song mode, where you can play, record, or edit

a Song.

PROGRAM Program mode, to play single Sound Programs

on the keyboard, or edit them.

DEMO Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY but-

tons together to select the Demo mode. This

mode lets you listen to some Demo Songs, to

let you hear the sonic power of the Pa50SD.

5GLOBAL

This button recalls the Global edit environment, where you

can execute various global settings. This edit environment

overlaps any operating mode, that still remains active in the

background. Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operat-

ing mode.

6SD CARD

This button recalls the Card edit environment, where you can

execute various operations on ﬁles and cards (Load, Save,

Format, etc…). This edit environment overlaps any operat-

ing mode, that still remains active in the background. Press

EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode.

7MEMORY (TIE)

This button turns the Lower and Chord Memory functions

on or off. Go to the “Page 24 - Preferences: controls” edit

page (Style Play mode, see page 50) to decide if this button

should be a Chord Memory only, or a Lower/Chord Memory

button. When it works as a Lower/Chord Memory:

ON The sound on the left of the split point, and the

chord for the automatic accompaniment, are

kept in memory even when you raise your

hand from the keyboard.

OFF The sound and chords are released as soon as

you raise your hand from the keyboard.

This button doubles as a TIE function for the Song mode

(see chapter 13).

8BASS INVERSION (REST)

This button turns the Bass Inversion function on or off.

ON The lowest note of a chord played in inverted

form will always be detected as the root note of

the chord. Thus, you can specify to the

arranger composite chords such as Am7/G or

“F/C”.

OFF The lowest note is scanned together with the

other chord notes, and is not always consid-

ered as the root note.

This button doubles as a REST function for the Song mode

(see chapter 13).

9MANUAL BASS

This button turns the Manual Bass function on or off.

Note: When you press the MANUAL BASS button, the Bass

track volume is automatically set to the maximum value. The

volume is automatically set back to the original value when the

MANUAL BASS button is deactivated.

14 Front panel

ON The automatic accompaniment stops playing

(apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks),

and you can manually play the Bass track on

the Lower part of the keyboard. You can start

the automatic accompaniment again by press-

ing one of the CHORD SCANNING buttons.

OFF The bass track is automatically played by the

Style.

0SPLIT POINT (<)

Keep this button pressed to open the Split Point window.

While this window is open, you can set the split point, simply

by playing the split point note on the keyboard. Then, release

the SPLIT POINT button.

To memorize the selected split point note, press the GLOBAL

button, then press WRITE to save the Global in memory (see

“The Write window” on page 125).

This button doubles as a PREVIOUS EVENT function for

the Backing Sequence and Song modes (see chapters 12 and

13).

AG.QUANTIZE (>)

Press this button to open the Groove Quantize window,

where you can select a realtime groove quantization to be

applied to the Song (only Sequencer 1). See “Groove Quan-

tize window” on page 71.

This button doubles as a NEXT EVENT function for the

Backing Sequence and Song modes (see chapters 12 and 13).

BTEMPO (= LOCK)

This button turns the Tempo Lock function on or off.

ON When you select a different Style or Perfor-

mance, the tempo doesn’t change. You can still

change it using the DIAL or the TEMPO but-

tons.

OFF When you select a different Style or Perfor-

mance, the memorized tempo value is auto-

matically selected.

CSINGLE TOUCH

This button turns the Single Touch function on or off.

ON When a different Style (or the same again) is

selected, a Single Touch Setting (STS1) is auto-

matically selected, meaning that the Realtime

tracks and effects will change, together with

the Style tracks and effects.

OFF When you select a different Style (or the same

again), the Style tracks and effects are changed,

while the Realtime tracks are not changed.

DSTYLE section (NUMERIC KEYPAD)

Use these buttons to open the Style Select window and select

a Style. See “Selecting a Style” on page 26.

The leftmost button lets you select the upper or lower row of

Style banks. Press it repeatedly to select one of the rows.

(After both LEDs have turned on, press the button again to

turn them off).

UPPER LED ON

Upper-row Styles selected.

LOWER LED ON

Lower-row Styles selected.

A word about Style banks and names. Styles from “8/16

BEAT” to “WORLD 3”, and from “LATIN1” to “TRADI-

TIONAL” are standard Styles, the user can’t normally over-

write with a Load operation (unless you remove the

protection; see “Factory Style Protect” on page 141).

“DIRECT SD” Styles are Styles directly accessed from card

(no need to load from card). See “The DIRECT SD bank” on

page 40.

Styles from “USER1” to “USER3” are location where you can

load new Styles from card.

Each button (Style bank) contains 2 pages, each with up to 8

Styles. Browse through the Styles using the PAGE buttons.

Shortcut to see the original bank for a Style. You can see the

original bank where a Style is contained. Just keep the SHIFT

button pressed, and press the lefmost button of the STYLE

section. A message window will appear, showing the name of

the original bank. Release the SHIFT button to exit the win-

dow.

Shortcut to see all pages of the selected bank. To cycle all

pages for a selected bank, repeatedly press the bank’s button.

These buttons double as a numeric keypad on certain

pages (see “Selecting a Song composing its progressive num-

ber” on page 70).

EFADE IN/OUT

When the Style is in stop, press this button to start it with a

volume fade-in (the volume goes from zero to the maxi-

mum).

When the Style is in play, press this button to stop it with a

volume fade-out (the volume gradually decreases).

You don’t need to press START/STOP to start or stop the

Style.

FVARIATION 1-4 (NOTE LENGTH) buttons

Each of these buttons select one of the four variations of the

current Style. Each variation can vary in patterns and sounds.

These buttons double as a NOTE LENGTH function for the

Song mode (see chapter 13).

GFILL 1-2 (NOTE LENGTH) buttons

These two buttons trigger a ﬁll-in. Press them twice (LED

blinking) to let them play in loop, and select any other Style

element (Fill, Intro, Variation…) to exit the loop.

They also double as a NOTE LENGTH function for the

Song mode (see chapter 13).

HCOUNT IN / BREAK

While the Style is not running, press this button, then press

START/STOP. This combination triggers a one-bar initial

count, then the Style starts playing.

While the Style is already in play, this button triggers a break

(an empty measure beginning with a kick + crash shot). Press

it twice to let it play in loop, and select any other Style ele-

ment (Fill, Intro, Variation…) to exit the loop.

IENDING 1-2 (DOT, TRIPLET) buttons

While the Style is running, these two buttons trigger an End-

ing, and stop the Style. Press one of them, and the Style will

stop running with an Ending. If pressed while the Style is

stopped, they act as an additional couple of Intros.

Front panel

Press them twice (LED blinking) to let them play in loop, and

select any other Style element (Fill, Intro, Variation…) to exit

the loop.

ENDING1 also doubles as a DOT function, and ENDING2

doubles as a TRIPLET function, to be used in Song mode

(see chapter 13).

Note: Ending 1 plays a short sequence with different chords,

while Ending 2 plays on the last recognized chord.

JINTRO 1-2 buttons

These two buttons set the arranger in Intro mode. After

pressing one of these buttons, start the Style, and it will begin

with the selected intro. The INTRO LED automatically goes

off at the end of the intro.

Press them twice (LED blinking) to let them play in loop, and

select any other Style element (Fill, Intro, Variation…) to exit

the loop.

Note: Intro 1 plays a short sequence with different chords, while

Intro 2 plays on the last recognized chord.

KSTART/STOP

Starts or stops the Style running.

You can reset all ‘frozen’ notes and controllers on the

Pa50SD and any instrument connected to its MIDI OUT, by

using the “Panic” key combination. Just press SHIFT +

START/STOP to stop all notes and reset all controllers.

LSYNCHRO START / STOP (DELETE)

This button turns the Synchro Start and Synchro Stop func-

tions on or off. Press it repeatedly to turn the functions on or

off. The LEDs cycle in this order: START ➛ START+STOP ➛

OFF.

START LED ON

When this LED is lit, just play a chord in the

chord recognition area (usually under the split

point, see “CHORD SCANNING section” on

page 17) to automatically start the Style run-

ning. If you like, you can turn one of the

INTROs on before starting the Style.

START+STOP LEDs ON

When both LEDs are lit, raising your hand

from the keyboard momentarily stops the Style

running. If you play a chord again, the Style

starts again.

OFF All Synchro functions are turned off.

This button doubles as a DELETE function for the Backing

Sequence and Song modes (see chapters 12 and 13).

It is also used to delete the selected character, during text

editing.

MTAP TEMPO/RESET (INSERT)

This is a double-function button, acting in a different way

depending on the Style status (stop/play).

Tap Tempo: When the Style is not playing, you can “beat” the

tempo on this button. At the end, the accompaniment starts

playing, using the “tapped in” tempo.

Reset: When you press this button while the Style is in play,

the Style pattern goes back to the previous strong beat.

This button doubles as a INSERT function for the Backing

Sequence and Song modes (see chapters 12 and 13).

It is also used to insert a character at the cursor position, dur-

ing text editing.

NWRITE/CARD IN USE

In Style Play mode, this button opens the Write window, that

lets you save all the tracks onto a Performance, the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks in a Single Touch Setting (STS), or the

accompaniment tracks onto a Style Performance. (See “The

Write window” on page 42).

In the Global edit environment, press it to save Global

parameters in memory. (See “The Write window” on

page 125).

This button’s LED works as a CARD IN USE indicator, and

turns on when the card drive is in use.

OENSEMBLE

This button turns the Ensemble function on or off. When on,

the right-hand melody is harmonized with the left-hand

chords.

Note: The Ensemble function works only when the keyboard is

in SPLIT mode, and the LOWER Chord Scanning mode

selected.

PRECORD

This button sets the instrument in Record mode (depending

on the current operating mode).

QMENU

This button opens the Menu page for the current operating

mode or edit environment. After opening a menu, you can

jump to one of the edit pages by pressing the corresponding

VOLUME/VALUE buttons; or browse them using the PAGE

buttons. Otherwise, go back to the main page of the current

operating mode, or close the edit environment, by pressing

the EXIT button.

See the relevant chapter devoted to each operating mode or

edit environment, to see their “maps” in detail.

RPAGE -/+

After pressing MENU to open a menu, use these buttons to

browse the edit pages of an operating mode or editing envi-

ronment. Press EXIT to go back from an edit page to the

main page of the current operating mode, or to close the Glo-

bal or Card Edit environment.

In addition, you can use these buttons to select a different

page in a Style Select or Program Select window.

16 Front panel

SVOLUME/VALUE (MUTE) A-H buttons

Within this user’s manual, each button pair is marked with

an alphabetic letter (A-H). See “Display and User Interface”

on page 19 for more details.

A corresponding track name is printed over each button pair.

These names show the corresponding track the button pair

affects in the main page of the Style Play mode.

• The left half is for the main page, where you can see the

Realtime tracks, and the Style tracks grouped together:

• The right half is for the Style tracks page, where you can

see each of the accompaniment tracks:

See “Symbols and Icons” on page 21.

Use these buttons to execute various operations on the com-

mands and functions appearing in the display.

SELECTING

Use each button pair to select the correspond-

ing item in the display (i.e. a track, a parameter

or a command). Use either the left or right

button in a pair.

VOLUME While you are in the main pages of any operat-

ing mode, select a track and use these buttons

to change the track’s volume. Use the left but-

ton to decrease it, or the right button to

increase it.

MUTE Press both buttons in a pair to mute the corre-

sponding track. Press both buttons again to

unmute the track.

SOLO While in the Style Play, Song Play and

Song modes, you can solo one of the tracks.

Just keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press

both VOLUME/VALUE buttons corresponding

to the track you wish to solo.

To exit the solo mode, keep the SHIFT button

pressed again, and press both VOLUME/

VALUE buttons corresponding to the soloed

track.

VALUE Use each button pair to change the corre-

sponding parameter’s value. The left button

decreases the value, the right button increases

it.

TTRACK SELECT

Depending on the operating mode, this button switches

between the various tracks view.

STYLE PLAY MODE

Switches between the Realtime tracks and the

Style tracks.

SONG PLAY MODE

Switches between the main page (showing the

Realtime/Keyboard tracks), Song tracks 1-8,

and Song tracks 9-16.

SONG MODE

Switches between the main page, Song tracks

1-8 and Song tracks 9-16.

The TRACK SELECT LED shows the current page view:

Off Main page (Realtime tracks, or Song controls)

On 2nd page (Style tracks, or Song tracks 1-8)

Flashing 3rd page (Song tracks 9-16)

USINGLE TOUCH SETTING (F1-F4 FUNCTION KEYS)

buttons

While in the main page of the Style Play or Backing Sequence

mode, these buttons select a Single Touch Setting each. Each

of the Styles includes a maximum of four Single Touch Set-

tings (STS), to automatically conﬁgure the Realtime tracks

and effects at the touch of a ﬁnger. When the SINGLE

TOUCH LED is lit, an STS is automatically selected when

selecting a Style.

In Edit mode, these buttons double as function keys, to

select the corresponding items in the display.

VSHIFT

With this button held down, pressing certain other buttons

accesses to a second function.

WTEMPO/VALUE section

The DIAL and the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons can be used

to control the Tempo, assign a different value to the selected

parameter in the display or scroll a list of ﬁles in the Song

Select and Card pages. The VALUE LED shows the status of

this section.

DIAL Turn the dial clockwise to increase the value or

tempo. Turn it counter-clockwise to decrease

the value or tempo.

When used while pressing the SHIFT

button, this control always acts as a Tempo

control.

Drum/Perc Piano01

Bass01 Guitar01

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

VoxPad1

BossaNova |STS1

Front panel

DOWN/- and UP/+

DOWN/- decreases the value or tempo; UP/+

increases the value or tempo.

Keep the SHIFT button pressed down,

and press either the DOWN/- or

UP/+ button to reset the Tempo to the value

memorized onto the selected Style.

XVALUE LED

This LED shows the status of the DIAL and DOWN/- and

UP/+ buttons.

ON The DIAL and DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons act

as Value controls, to change the value of the

selected parameter in the display.

OFF The DIAL and DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons

control the Tempo.

YEXIT/NO

Use this button to perform various actions, leaving from the

current status:

• exit a dialog box

• answer “No” to any question that appears in the display

• exit the Menu window

• go back to the main page of the current operating mode

• exit the Global or Card Edit environment, and go back

to the main page of the current operating mode

• exit from a Style, Performance or Program Select win-

dow

ZENTER/YES

Use this button to perform various actions, agreeing the cur-

rent selected status:

• answer “Yes” to any question that appears in the display

• conﬁrm a command

[DISPLAY HOLD

This button turns the Display Hold function on or off.

ON When you open a temporary windows (like the

Program Select window), it remains in the dis-

play until you press EXIT/NO or an operating

mode button.

OFF Any temporary window closes after a certain

time, or after selecting an item in the window.

\CHORD SCANNING section

In Style Play and Backing Sequence mode, use these buttons

to deﬁne the way chords are recognized by the arranger.

LOWER Chords are detected below the split point. The

number of notes you should play to form a

chord is deﬁned by the Chord Scanning Mode

parameter (see “Chord Recognition Mode” on

page 50).

UPPER Chords are detected above the split point. You

must always play three or more notes to let the

arranger recognize a chord.

FULL (both LEDs on)

Chords are detected on the full keyboard

range. You must always play three or more

notes to let the arranger recognize a chord.

OFF No chords detected. After pressing START/

STOP, only the Drum and Percussion accom-

paniment tracks can play.

]KEYBOARD MODE section

These buttons deﬁne how the four Keyboard (or Realtime)

tracks are positioned on the keyboard.

SPLIT The Lower track plays below the split point,

while the Upper 1, Upper 2 and Upper 3 tracks

play above it. By default, selecting this key-

board mode automatically selects the Lower

chord scanning mode (see “Chord Recognition

Mode” on page 50).

FULL UPPER

The Upper 1, Upper 2 and/or Upper 3 tracks

play on the whole keyboard range. The Lower

track does not play. By default, selecting this

keyboard mode automatically selects the Full

chord scanning mode (see “Chord Recognition

Mode” on page 50).

`STYLE CHANGE

This button turns the Style Change function on or off.

ON When you select a Performance, the Style

could change, according to which Style num-

ber is memorized onto the Performance.

OFF When you select a Performance, the Style and

Style track settings remain unchanged. Only

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks settings are

changed.

aPERFORM.

Press this button to use the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE

section to select a Performance.

bPROGRAM

Press this button to use the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE

section to select a Program, and assign it to the selected track.

cPROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section

Use these buttons to open the Program Select or Performance

Select window, and select a Program or a Performance. See

“Selecting a Program” on page 26, or “Selecting a Perfor-

mance” on page 25. For a list of available Programs, see “Pro-

grams (Program Change order)” on page 154.

The leftmost button selects the upper or lower row of Pro-

gram or Performance banks. Press it repeatedly to select one

of the rows. (After both LEDs have consecutively turned on,

press the button again to turn them off).

UPPER LED ON

Upper row of Programs or Performances

selected.

LOWER LED ON

Lower row of Programs or Performances

selected.

On the front panel, Program banks are identiﬁed by the

instrument names, while Performance banks are identiﬁed

by numbers (1-10; 0=bank 10).

A note about Program banks and names. Programs from

“PIANO” to “SFX” are standard Programs, the user can’t

directly modify.

18 Front panel

Programs “USER1” and “USER2” are locations where you

can load new Programs from card.

“USER DK” is where you can load new drum kits.

Each Program bank contains various pages, each with up to 8

Programs. You can browse them using the PAGE buttons.

Shortcut to see the original bank for a Performance or Pro-

gram. You can see the original bank where a Performance or

Program is contained. Just keep the SHIFT button pressed,

and press the lefmost button of the PROGRAM/PERFOR-

MANCE section. A message window will appear, showing the

name of the original bank. Release the SHIFT button to exit

the window.

Shortcut to see all pages of the selected bank. To cycle all

pages for a selected bank, repeatedly press the bank’s button.

dPADS (1-4, STOP)

These programmable pads can be used to trigger a sound

effect. Use the STOP button to stop a cyclic sound. (See “List

of sounds assignable to the Pads” on page 226).

Each Pad corresponds to a dedicated Pad track.

eTRANSPOSE

These buttons transpose the whole instrument in semitone

steps (Master Transpose). The transposition value is shown

(as a note name) on the top right of the display.

Press both buttons together, to reset the Master Transpose to

zero.

Note: The Master Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum

mode (and, even if set in a different status, on the Drum and

Percussion tracks). See “Page 14 - Track: Mode” on page 46, and

“Page 7 - Track: Mode” on page 78.

Lowers the Master Transpose a semitone.

Raises the Master Transpose a semitone.

fOCTAVE

These buttons transpose the selected track in steps of a whole

octave (12 semitones; max ±2 octaves). The transposition

value is shown (in octaves) on the top right area of the dis-

play.

Press both buttons together, to reset the Octave Transpose to

zero.

Note: The Octave Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum

mode (and, even if set in a different status, on the Drum and

Percussion tracks).

–Lowers the selected track an octave.

+Raises the selected track an octave.

gBALANCE slider

In Song Play mode, this slider balances the volume of the two

on-board sequencers. When fully on the left, only the

Sequencer 1 can be heard. When fully on the right, only the

Sequencer 2 can be heard. When in the middle, both

sequencers play at full volume.

hSEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS - SEQ1 and

SEQ2

The instrument is equipped with two sequencers (Sequencer

1 and Sequencer 2), each with its own set of transport con-

trols.

<< and >> Rewind and Fast Forward commands. If you

use them while the Song is in play, they make it

scroll back or forward.

When pressed once, these buttons move the

Song to the previous or following measure.

When kept pressed, they make the Song scroll-

ing continuously, until you release them.

In Jukebox mode (Sequencer 1), keep

the SHIFT button pressed, and press these but-

tons to scroll to the previous or next Song in

the Jukebox list (see “Page 9 - Jukebox” on

page 79).

PAUSE Pauses the Song at the current position. Press

PAUSE or PLAY/STOP to start the Song play-

ing again.

PLAY/STOP Starts or stops the current Song. When you

stop the Song, the Song Position goes back to

measure 1.

In Song Play mode, pressed while

keeping SHIFT pressed, starts both sequencers

at the same time.

Display and User Interface

Display controls

4. DISPLAY AND USER INTERFACE

The display shows the current status of the Pa50SD and its

performance and editing parameters. You can select each

parameter by using the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons on

the side of the display, or each page command appearing

along the last line using the F1-F4 buttons. You can vary

many of the parameter’s values by pressing the left (-) or

right (+) button of any VOLUME/VALUE pair.

DISPLAY CONTROLS

VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons and display parame-

ters. These buttons are used to select the corresponding

parameter or command in the display, to change the parame-

ter’s value, or to change the volume of the corresponding

track.

While you are in the main page, these buttons can select a

track, change the track’s volume, or mute/unmute a track.

See “VOLUME/VALUE (MUTE) A-H buttons” on page 16

for more information.

F1-F4 buttons. When in an Edit page, these buttons may be

used when there are four parameters in a row, as in the fol-

lowing example:

First, select the line using a VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) button.

Then, select a column using the F1-F4 function key.

In the Card Edit environment, the F1-F4 buttons can be used

also to select one of the page commands appearing in the last

line of the display.

See “SINGLE TOUCH SETTING (F1-F4 FUNCTION KEYS)

buttons” on page 16 for more information.

PAGE. The PAGE buttons select the previous or following

edit page. When selecting a Style or a Program, they select a

different page of Styles or Programs. See “PAGE -/+” on

page 15 for more information.

MENU. The MENU button opens the current operating

mode or edit environment’s Menu. When in a Menu, you can

use the VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select an edit section to

jump to.

TRACK SELECT. Each of the operating modes have a differ-

ent number of tracks:

Style Play 4 Realtime tracks, 8 Style tracks, 4 Pads.

Song Play 4 Realtime tracks, 2 x 16 Song Tracks, 4 Pads.

Drum/Perc Piano01

Bass01 Guitar01

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

VoxPad1

BossaNova |STS1

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks

Style (accompaniment/backing) tracks

Status icons area

- - - - - - C:100 D:050

A:127 B:020 C:100 D:050

- - - - - - C:100 D:050

C:100 D:050

Mixer:FX Send

NEWNAME.SET |

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

20 Display and User Interface

Interface structure

Backing Sequence

4 Realtime tracks, 8 Style tracks, 4 Pads.

Song 16 Song tracks.

You can only see up to 8 tracks in the display. So, use the

TRACK SELECT button to switch to the other (hidden)

tracks. For example, when in Style Play, you can use this but-

ton to switch from the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks.

INTERFACE STRUCTURE

Thanks to its multitasking operating system, the Pa50SD user

interface is structured in “overlapping”, active layers. From

the lower level:

• operating modes (Style Play, Backing Sequence, Song

Play, Song, Program)

• edit environments (Global, Card)

• selecting windows (Style Select, Song Select, Program

Select, Performance Select).

When opening an edit environment or a selecting page, the

current operating mode is still working in the background.

Operating modes. (See diagram at the bottom of this

page). At the lowest level, an operating mode is always active.

The current operating mode is indicated by the lit LED on

the STYLE PLAY, B.SEQ, SONG PLAY, SONG or PROGRAM

button in the MODE section. The relevant icon lights up in

the display.

An operating mode is divided into a main page (the page

where you usually play a Style, a Song or a Program), a menu,

and a series of edit pages.

Press MENU to access the Menu. Use the MENU and PAGE

buttons to browse across the various edit pages. Press EXIT to

go back to the main page.

Operating modes

Main page Menu Edit pages

Drum/Perc Piano01

Bass01 Guitar01

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

VoxPad1

BossaNova |STS1

Mixer RT Ctrls

Tuning Sty Ctrls

Effects Input/Pad

Track Edit Preferences

Style Play Menu

|||||| 127 ||||| 090

||||| 100 ||| | 092

|||||| 127 || || 086

|||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

Display and User Interface

Message windows

Edit environment. (See diagram at the bottom of this

page). When you press GLOBAL or SD CARD, an edit envi-

ronment overlaps the current operating mode. Press EXIT to

go back to the current operating mode.

An edit environment is made up of a menu and a series of

edit pages. Use the MENU and PAGE buttons to browse

across the various edit pages.

Selecting windows. When you press one of the STYLE or

PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE buttons, you open a selecting

window. This window closes after selecting one of the items

in it, or after pressing EXIT.

If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is light up, the window doesn’t

close after selecting an item. Press EXIT to close the window,

and go back to the underlying page.

MESSAGE WINDOWS

Sometimes, a message appears in the display, warning about

an error or a wrong operation:

Press ENTER or EXIT to exit one of these windows.

Other messages ask for an answer, as in the “Are you sure”

window below:

Press ENTER/YES for Yes, or EXIT/NO for No.

SYMBOLS AND ICONS

Many icons and symbols, on the custom display, show the

status of a parameter or the display content.

Realtime/Keyboard track (Upper 1-3, Lower).

Drum track (Style track view).

Percussion track (Style track view).

Grouped Drum and Percussion tracks.

Bass track (Style track view).

Grouped accompaniment tracks. This symbol

indicates the ﬁve grouped accompaniment

tracks (Acc1-5).

Accompaniment tracks (Style track view).

Sequencer tracks.

Selected track or parameter. When this symbol

appears, you can execute any available opera-

tion on the selected item.

(no icon) The track is in mute, and can’t play on the key-

board.

GRAYED-OUT NON-AVAILABLE PARAMETERS

Currently non-available parameters are now shown in “gray”

in the display, i.e. with a “ghost” texture. Here is an example

of a grayed-out parameter, compared to a normal parameter:

Edit environment

Menu Edit pages

Load Format

Save New Dir

Copy Rename

Erase Utilities

Card Menu

NEWNAME.SET |

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

Not a Standard

MIDI File

Text in solid black

Text in gray

22 Rear panel

5. REAR PANEL

1AC POWER ADAPTER CONNECTOR

Plug the supplied power adapter into this connector.

2POWER switch

Use this switch to turn the instrument on or off.

3MIDI INTERFACE

The MIDI interface allows your Pa50SD to be connected to

an external controller (master keyboard, MIDI guitar, wind

controller, MIDI accordion…), to an expander, or to a com-

puter running a sequencer or an editor. For more informa-

tion on how to use the MIDI interface, see the MIDI chapter.

IN This connector receives MIDI data from a

computer or a controller. Connect it to an

external controller’s or computer’s MIDI OUT.

OUT This connector sends MIDI data generated by

Pa50SD’s keyboard, controllers, and/or the

internal sequencer. Connect it to an expander’s

or computer’s MIDI IN.

THRU This connector sends an exact copy of the data

received on the IN connector. Use it to cascade

the Pa50SD with other MIDI instruments.

4ASSIGNABLE PEDAL/FOOTSWITCH

Use this to connect a continuous or footswitch pedal, like the

KORG EXP2 or XVP10. To program it, see “P/S (Pedal/

Switch)” on page 126.

5DAMPER

Use this to connect a Damper pedal, like the KORG PS1, PS

or DS1H. To change its polarity, see “Damper Pol. (Damper

Polarity)” on page 126.

6OUTPUTS

Use these unbalanced connectors to send the audio signal

(sound) to a mixer, a PA system, a set of powered monitors,

or your hi-ﬁ system. Set the output level with the MASTER

VOLUME slider.

7INPUT 1 and 2

Use these unbalanced connectors to input another keyboard/

synthesizer, a (non-powered) mixer’s output, or a CD/tape

player (line impedance). The signal is automatically routed to

the speakers, the Audio Outputs and the Phones.

8PHONES

Use this connector to connect a pair of headphones. You can

use headphones with an impedance of 16-200Ω (50Ω sug-

gested). Use a headphone distributor to connect more than

one pair of headphones.

345678

BASIC GUIDE

24 Basic operations

Playing on the keyboard

6. BASIC OPERATIONS

PLAYING ON THE KEYBOARD

Just play on the keyboard. You will hear the Realtime tracks

playing. There are four Realtime tracks: Upper 1-3 and

Lower. They may play all at the same time, or just one or a

few of them, depending on their Mute status. If you cannot

hear a track, check the mute status of that part.

Tracks can be set in different ways: use the KEYBOARD

MODE section to select the way they are conﬁgured on the

keyboard.

• Press FULL UPPER to play the Upper 1-3 tracks on the

full range of the keyboard, just as you would on a piano.

• Press SPLIT to let the Upper 1-3 tracks play on the right

of the Split Point, and the Lower track on the left.

• Keep the SPLIT POINT button pressed, and play a note

to change the point where the keyboard is divided in an

Upper and a Lower part.

To memorize the selected split point note, press the GLOBAL

button, then press WRITE to save the Global in memory (see

“The Write window” on page 125).

SELECTING, MUTING/UNMUTING AND

SOLOING A TRACK

Selecting. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons to

select a track.

The selected track is shown with a solid square surrounding

its status icons.

If you can’t see the track you are looking for, use the TRACK

SELECT button to scroll up or down the tracks, and ﬁnd the

hidden ones.

Mute/unmute. Press both VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) but-

tons to mute or unmute a track. For example, if you are in the

main page that appears after turning the instrument on, and

you want to mute the Upper 1 track, press the E (UPPER1/

ACC2) buttons together.

The mute/play status is shown by the relevant icon in the dis-

play:

Play status; the track plays on the keyboard.

(no icon) Mute status; the track doesn’t play on the key-

board.

Solo. While in the Style Play, Song Play and Song modes,

you can solo one of the tracks. Just keep the SHIFT button

pressed, and press both VOLUME/VALUE buttons corre-

sponding to the track you wish to solo.

To exit the solo mode, keep the SHIFT button pressed again,

and press both VOLUME/VALUE buttons corresponding to

the soloed track.

Upper 1

Upper 2

Upper 3

Split Point

Lower

Upper 1

Upper 2

Upper 3

Lower Upper

Drum/Perc Piano01

Bass01 Guitar01

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

VoxPad1

BossaNova |STS1

Selected track

Basic operations

Selecting a Performance

SELECTING A PERFORMANCE

A Performance is a set of Programs and settings for the Key-

board and Style tracks, that makes selecting complex combi-

nations live fast and easy. When the STYLE CHANGE LED is

on, a Performance can also select a different Style.

It is always advisable to use Performances, rather than single

Programs, when playing even a solo sound, since a Perfor-

mance lets you select the right effects, transposition, plus

many other parameters, together with the Programs.

Other “performance” parameters are saved in the Global.

1. Press the PERFORM button. This changes the PRO-

GRAM/PERFORMANCE section into a Performance

selector.

2. Use the leftmost button of the PROGRAM/PERFOR-

MANCE section to select the ﬁrst row of ten banks (1-

10, upper LED turned on), or the second row of ten

banks (11-20, lower LED turned on).

3. Press one of the 1-0 buttons to select the PROGRAM/

PERFORMANCE bank containing the Performance you

are looking for.

The Performance Select window appears. There are 8

Performances for each bank.

4. Select a Performance using the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H)

buttons.

5. If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is on, press EXIT to exit this

window.

The STYLE CHANGE button

When you select a Performance, the Style may or may not

change, depending on the status of the STYLE CHANGE

button. (When you save a Performance, the current Style

number is always memorized).

• If the STYLE CHANGE LED is on, the Style memorized

in the Performance will be selected.

• If the STYLE CHANGE LED is off, the Style doesn’t

change.

Data type Parameters

Realtime

Tracks

Upper 1, Upper 2,

Upper 3, Lower

Master Transpose, Pro-

gram, Volume, Pan,

Octave, Scale, Detune,

Pitch Bend, Poly/Mono/

Drum, Int/Ext, Damper,

Dynamic Range, Joystick

C&D Effect Send level,

Type, Parameters

Program parameters

Pads

Style

Tracks

Drum, Percussion,

Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3,

Acc4, Acc5,

Program, Volume, Pan,

Octave, Detune, Pitch

Bend, Poly/Mono/Drum,

Int/Ext, Wrap Around,

Keyboard Range

A&B Effect Send level,

Type, Parameters

Program parameters

Drum Mapping,

Kick&Snare Assignation

Global Chord Recognition Mode, Memory Mode, Velocity

Trigger, Lock

StereoGrand Blue

ClupPiano Legend

ForrestStr MrJazz

ResonPads OxydBrass

StereoGrand

Last selected Performance

26 Basic operations

Selecting a Program

SELECTING A PROGRAM

You can select a different Program (i.e., sound) to be played

by a track. Before selecting a Program, you must select the

track you want to assign the Program to.

Note: To assign different Programs to the Style tracks, press

TRACK SELECT to see the Style tracks. If you select a Program

while grouped tracks (Drum/Percussion or ACC) are selected,

the Program will be assigned to the last selected track.

Each Style Element (Variations, Fills…) can have different

Programs, so your selection might be automatically reset

when selecting a different Element. To avoid this reset, see

“Prog (Program)” on page 49.

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (E-H) buttons on the right

side of the display, to select the Realtime (Keyboard)

track you wish to assign a different Program to.

2. Press the PROGRAM button. This changes the PRO-

GRAM/PERFORMANCE section into a Program selec-

tor.

3. Use the leftmost PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE button

to select a row of Program banks (upper, lower).

4. Select the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE bank contain-

ing the Program you are looking for (Program banks are

identiﬁed by instrument names).

The Program Select window appears. See “Programs

(Program Change order)” on page 154 for a list of Fac-

tory Programs.

5. Browse all the Programs in the selected bank using the

PAGE buttons. There can be various pages for each

bank, containing up to 8 Programs each.

6. As you ﬁnd the Program you are looking for, select it

using the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons.

7. If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is on, press EXIT to exit this

window.

SELECTING A STYLE

A Style is a set of rhythm and accompaniment patterns. You

can select a Style from the internal memory, or from a card

(see “The DIRECT SD bank” on page 40).

1. Use the leftmost STYLE button to select a row of Style

banks (upper, lower).

2. Select the STYLE bank containing the Style you are

looking for.

The Style Select window appears.

3. There are 2 pages for each bank, each containing 8

Styles. Select a page using the PAGE buttons.

4. As you ﬁnd the Style you are looking for, select it using

the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons.

Note: The new Style will enter at the next strong beat.

5. If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is on, press EXIT to exit this

window.

The SINGLE TOUCH button

When you select a Style, the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks can

be changed or not.

• If the SINGLE TOUCH LED is on, the Single Touch Set-

ting (STS) #1 is automatically selected, and the Realtime

tracks are changed. Programs, and the Keyboard Mode,

may change.

• If the SINGLE TOUCH LED is off, Realtime tracks don’t

change.

Drum/Perc Piano01

Bass01 Guitar01

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

VoxPad1

BossaNova |STS1

Piano1 E.Piano2

Piano2 E.Piano3

Piano3 Harpsi

E.Piano1 Clavinet

Piano T:U1

Last selected Program Selected track

Mod.Swing1 Slow Blues

Mod.Swing2 Cay Blues

JazzWaltz1 St.LouisB

JazzWaltz2 Big Band1

Jazz Waltz 1

Basic operations

Selecting a Single Touch Setting (STS)

SELECTING A SINGLE TOUCH SETTING (STS)

A Single Touch Setting (STS) contains Realtime (Keyboard)

tracks’ settings. Four STS are included in each Style, and can

be recalled by pressing the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING (F1-

F4) buttons under the display.

Note: You can select a STS only when you are in the main page

of the Style Play or Backing Sequence operating mode.

CHANGING ALL KEYBOARD TRACKS AT ONCE

Select a Performance or a Single Touch Setting (F1-F4 but-

tons, when you are in the Style Play main page) to change

keyboard Programs and effects at the touch of a button.

PLAYING A SONG FROM A CARD

1. Insert the card containing the Song into the card drive.

2. Press the SONG PLAY button to access the Song Play

mode.

3. Press the A (S1:) VOLUME/VALUE button to open the

Song Select window.

Note: You can access the Song Select window also by press-

ing the PAGE+ button from the main page. You can exit

this window either by pressing EXIT or PAGE-.

4. Press the F1 button to select the SD card drive (SD). The

card content appears.

5. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls, or the VOLUME/

VALUE (E-H) buttons to scroll the list. The E-F buttons

are the Scroll Up ( ), while the G-H buttons are the

Scroll Down ( ).

Move the ﬁle you are looking for to the ﬁrst line of the

display.

6. If the ﬁle you are

looking for is in a

folder (a ﬁle whose

name begins with “ ”), move the folder to the ﬁrst

line in the display, then select the F3 (OPEN) command.

Select the F4 (CLOSE) command to close a folder and

go back to the upper level.

7. When the ﬁle you are looking for is in the ﬁrst line of the

display, press the F2 (SELECT) button.

8. When the Song appears in

the S1 line on the main page

of the Song Play mode, press

the left (SEQ 1) PLAY/STOP button to start the play-

back.

Note: If the BALANCE slider is all the way to the right,

Sequencer 1 is at the minimum volume and can’t be

heard.

9. If you wish to play a different Song on the Sequencer 2

at the same time, press the B (S2:) VOLUME/VALUE

button (press it twice if a Song is already selected for

Sequencer 2), and repeat the above procedure to select a

Song for Sequencer 2. Use the right (SEQ 2) PLAY/

STOP button to start/stop the second Song. Use the

BALANCE cursor to mix between Sequencer 1 and

Sequencer 2.

10. Stop the Song(s) using the PLAY/STOP button for the

corresponding Sequencer.

SHORTCUT TO SEE THE ORIGINAL BANK FOR A

STYLE, PERFORMANCE OR PROGRAM

You can see the original bank where your Style, Performance

or Program came from. Just keep the SHIFT button pressed,

and press the lefmost button of the STYLE or PROGRAM/

PERFORMANCE section. A message window will appear,

showing the name of the original bank.

Release the SHIFT button to exit the window.

S1: Piano01

S2: Guitar01

Lyrics StrngEns2

VoxPad1

No song

CLUB |

BALLADS

0001 MYSONG.MID |

SD SELECT OPEN CLOSE

Song Selection

Page commands

0001 MYSONG.MID

S1:MySong

28 Tutorial

1 - Playing in realtime

7. TUTORIAL

This chapter is fully devoted to step-by-step instructions, that

we hope may be useful to learn the basics—on-ﬁeld.

1 - PLAYING IN REALTIME

As soon as you turn your Pa50SD on, it is in Style Play mode,

and you can play it in realtime. Please follow me…

1Play on the keyboard.

When you turn the Pa50SD on, Performance 1-1 (“Ste-

reoGrand”) is automatically selected. This sets the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks for you. In this case (unless someone mod-

iﬁed this Performance earlier) you get the Upper 1 track play-

ing on the full keyboard range, with the Grand Piano

Program selected.

You may know there are four available Realtime tracks:

Upper 1-3 and Lower. Upper Realtime tracks may play on the

full range of the keyboard (the selected KEYBOARD MODE

shall be FULL UPPER). Otherwise, the Lower track plays on

the left of the Split Point, and the Upper tracks on the right

(KEYBOARD MODE shall be SPLIT).

If you are not satisﬁed with this setting at startup, just select

another Performance. Or change the track’s settings—as you

will see in this tutorial—and save them into Performance 1-1.

You’ll soon see how to do it.

2Select a different Performance.

Is the PERFORM. LED switched on?

If so, press one of the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE buttons,

and select a Performance with the VOLUME/VALUE buttons

(on the side of the display).

Go on trying with the different Performances. We provided

160 of them for you.

3Select Performance 1-1 (“Grand Piano”) again.

As above: press Performance bank 1, and use the A VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons to select Performance 1-1.

4Unmute the Upper 2 track.

Press both F VOLUME/VALUE buttons.

The Upper 2 track will be selected and

unmuted. The Play icon will appear, sur-

rounded by the “selected track” frame and accompanied by

the pointing arrow. You will hear the Dark Pad Program play

together with the Grand Piano.

5Press SPLIT on the KEYBOARD MODE section,

and play.

Now, the keyboard is split in two parts: the Lower part on the

left, and the Upper part on the right. The AnalogStr Program

is playing on the Lower part, while the Grand Piano and the

Dark Pad are playing on the Upper part.

6Set the split point.

Not happy with the current split point? Keep the SPLIT

POINT button held down, and play the new split point on

the keyboard. You can even save this setting in memory (see

“The Write window” on page 125).

7Mute/unmute various tracks.

Press both H VOLUME/VALUE buttons. You will mute the

Lower track.

Press them again to unmute the Lower track.

Try also with the Upper tracks, using the E, F and G VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons. You will notice the sound becomes

more or less fuller-sounding, depending on the number of

tracks muted or unmuted.

StereoGrand Blue

ClupPiano Legend

ForrestStr MrJazz

ResonPads OxydBrass

StereoGrand

Select a Performance with the VOLUME/VALUE buttons

Drum/Perc GrandPiano

Bass01 DarkPad

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

AnalogStr

SoftBeat |STS1

Press the F VOLUME/VALUE buttons

Drum/Perc GrandPiano

Bass01 DarkPad

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

AnalogStr

SoftBeat |STS1

Press the H VOLUME/VALUE buttons

Drum/Perc GrandPiano

Bass01 DarkPad

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

AnalogStr

SoftBeat |STS1

Press the E-G VOLUME/VALUE buttons

Tutorial

2 - Playing a Style

8Set the relative volume of the Realtime tracks.

Use each E-H VOLUME/VALUE button pair to set the vol-

ume of the Realtime tracks. Press one of the VOLUME/

VALUE button to select a track. Then press the right one to

increase the volume, the left one to lower it.

9Press FULL UPPER on the KEYBOARD MODE sec-

tion, and play.

Again, the Upper tracks can play across the full keyboard

range.

0Save your track conﬁguration in a Performance.

That’s all! When you ﬁnd the right sound, you can press the

WRITE button to save the track conﬁguration into a Perfor-

mance, a Single Touch Setting (STS), or a Style Performance.

The Performance is a handy idea for saving Realtime tracks.

See “The Write window” on page 42 for more information.

2 - PLAYING A STYLE

A Style will be your virtual band in your best solos. Select one

of the 304 Styles we ﬁtted in this machine…

1OK, select your favorite musical Style.

There are plenty of Styles to choose from. We will go with a

Jazz Style—the “Jazz Brush”. Let’s come on.

Select the second row of Styles. Press the leftmost STYLE but-

ton to switch the lower LED on.

Now, you are free to press button number 4, called “JAZZ 1”.

The Style Select window appears.

Press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select “Jazz

Brush”.

2Call an Intro.

You can engage an Intro, to be played before the Style. Press

INTRO1 or INTRO2. The former plays more freely, without

letting you decide of the chords. The latter lets you play a

chord progression during its playing.

3Start the Style!

Play a chord, and press the START/STOP button. Then begin

playing. Usually (when the SPLIT LED is on) chords are rec-

ognized under the split point, i.e. on the Lower part of the

keyboard. With the UPPER or FULL Chord Scanning mode,

you must play three or more notes to have a chord recog-

nized.

4Play your chords and your melody.

Go on playing. As you may notice, Pa50SD features a very

sophisticate chord recognition engine. Recognized chords are

shown in the display.

5Make a break—or should we say “a ﬁll”?

During your playing, you are free to call a one-bar break. Try

it:

PRESS BREAK

Do you see? Music stopped for one bar. Then, it is back again.

After a while, let’s go for something different…

PRESS FILL1 OR FILL2

No silence, this time. Pa50SD plays a complex passage to let

you take a breath. FILL1 is the simpler one, where the FILL2

is the more sophisticate. Usually, you will touch FILL1 when

playing with Variations 1 and 2 (the most easy), FILL2 when

in business with Variations 3 and 4 (more complex ones).

Press the left one to lower…

…and the right one to raise.

JazzBrush JazzWaltz1

Med.Swing JazzWaltz2

SlowSwing 5/4 Swing

SwingBallad Mood Swing

SoftBeat

30 Tutorial

3 - Playing a Song

6Select other Variations.

There are four VARIATION buttons. These are four different

versions of the same Style. Try them all!

You can go to a Variation after a Fill. Just press a FILL button,

then, immediately after, a VARIATION button.

7Stop it!

OK, you could say: “O, that’s easy, I know how to do it, I can

just press that big red START/STOP button again”.

Yes, you are perfectly right. But that’s only the easy way. Let

us suggest a different way:

PRESS ENDING1 OR ENDING2

An ending is instantaneously called, and will begin playing,

to led the Style to a colorful end. As usual, ENDING1 is pre-

programmed, while ENDING2 asks for your chord progres-

sion.

In Sync

A guy from the end of the classroom stands up asking:

“Huh, Sir, and what if I want to avoid all that START/STOP

thing? I mean, I prefer to have my hands free for music!”

Good point. The SYNCHRO button is there right for this.

1While the Style is stopped, press the SYN-

CHRO button.

The SYNCHRO-START LED begins ﬂashing on. The Syn-

chro Start function is enabled.

2Play a chord on the keyboard.

You must play a chord for the chord recognition engine. Usu-

ally, it will be on the left of the split point, but it depends on

the CHORD SCANNING section.

The Style starts.

3Stop the Style as you better prefer.

You know how to do, isn’t it?

Need more information?

Go to “Style Play operating mode” on page 40. The Reference

Guide includes all the information you need.

3 - PLAYING A SONG

Nothing easier than playing a Song on the Pa50SD. You don’t

have even to load it from a card.

1Move the BALANCE slider to the center.

This sets both onboard sequencers at the same level.

2Insert the card containing the Song into the

card drive.

Make sure your card is FAT formatted. This is the typical

Window format, and you can make a card of this type also on

the Mac, by selecting the “DOS” option when initializing a

card.

3Press the SONG PLAY button to access the Song

Play mode.

This is the display:

4Select a Song.

Another easy task. Press the A (S1:) VOLUME/VALUE button

to open the Song Select window.

Press the F1 button to select the card drive. The list of ﬁles in

the card appears. Songs are ﬁles with the “.MID” or “.KAR”

extension. Pa50SD ﬁlters all other ﬁle types out for you.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls, or the VOLUME/VALUE

(E-H) buttons to scroll the list. The E-F buttons are the Scroll

Up ( ), while the G-H buttons are the Scroll Down ( ).

Move the Song to play to the ﬁrst line of the display. Then

press the F2 (SELECT) button.

5Press PLAY/STOP (SEQ1).

The playback begins.

6If you like, select a Song for the Sequencer 2.

Press the B (S2:) VOLUME/VALUE button, and repeat the

above procedure to select the Song for Sequencer 2. Use the

right (SEQ 2) PLAY/STOP button to start/stop the second

Song. Use the BALANCE cursor to mix between Sequencer 1

and Sequencer 2.

7Take a pause.

Press PAUSE to stop the playback without going back to mea-

sure 1. The PAUSE LED begins ﬂashing.

Press PAUSE again to resume the playback.

S1: Piano01

S2: Guitar01

Lyrics StrngEns2

VoxPad1

No song

CLUB |

BALLADS

0001 MYSONG.MID |

SD SELECT OPEN CLOSE

Song Selection

Tutorial

4 - Recording a Song

8Stop it.

Sure, the Song automatically stops when reaching the end.

But you can stop it before the end, just by pressing PLAY/

STOP again.

4 - RECORDING A SONG

The Backing Sequence mode is a fast and effective way of

recording a new Song, making full use of the features of the

Style Play mode. So, arm your recorder, and play live with the

Styles—a song will be ready in seconds!

1First, enter Backing Sequence mode

Press B.SEQ to access the Backing Sequence mode. The Real-

time tracks, on the keyboard, will remain the same you

selected in the Style Play mode.

Don’t worry about this display: it’s something you don’t need

to learn at this point. You may ﬁnd more information on it,

going to the Reference Guide (see “Backing Sequence operat-

ing mode” on page 82).

Sufﬁce you to know this is the Backing Sequence Play page,

where you can load, play or save a Song.

2Now, press RECORD.

You are prompted to select either the Realtime recording

mode, or the Chord/Acc Step recording mode.

3Select the Realtime recording mode.

Simply press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons. The

Record page appears.

4If you think the selected Style is not what you

like for your backing tracks, select a different one.

Well, you should already know how to do it (see “Selecting a

Style” on page 26). But here is a fast reminder:

1. Select one of the Style rows in the STYLE section, using

the leftmost button.

2. Select one of the Style Banks, by pressing one of the but-

tons of the STYLE section.

3. Select one of the pages, using the PAGE buttons.

4. Select a Style, using the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) but-

tons.

As you may guess, the Style Bank and number appear after

the “Style” parameter in the display.

5And what about changing the Performance or

Single Touch Setting?

As above, you should know the story (see “Selecting a Perfor-

mance” on page 25, or “Selecting a Single Touch Setting

(STS)” on page 27). But, here is a short recap for the Perfor-

mances:

1. Press the PERFORM button to set the PROGRAM/PER-

FORMANCE section act as a Performance selector.

2. Select one of the Performance Banks, by pressing one of

the buttons of the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE sec-

tion.

3. Select a Performance, using the VOLUME/VALUE (A-

H) buttons.

…and for the Single Touch Settings (STS):

• Press one of the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons.

6Ok, now we can go.

As you see, both the RT track and the Ch/Acc track are in

RECord mode. This means you can start recording all you

play in a realtime performance with the Styles. So,

PRESS START/STOP

WAIT FOR THE PRECOUNT TO REACH BAR 1

AND BEGIN PLAYING!

7Play as if you were playing live.

You can do exactly what you do when playing with the Styles:

select a different Style, Performance, STS, different Variation,

a Fill, and Ending…

You can even start your recording with an Intro: just press

one of the INTRO buttons before pressing START/STOP to

start recording.

8Stop the Song.

To stop the Song, press either START/STOP or one of the

ENDING buttons. The Song will stop, but the Recording will

still be on. So, you can start with another Song to be recorded

in the same session (go back to step 6, if you like).

Otherwise, ﬁnish the Recording, going to the next step.

9Finish the recording.

All done, boys/girls? Yes? Fine! Then you may

PRESS PLAY/STOP (SEQ1)

and the Recording status will be gone. Both Backing

Sequence tracks (RT and Ch/Acc) will be set to the PLAY sta-

tus.

Load Song Metro:Off

Save Song Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

BS:New Song

Realtime Recording

Chord/Acc Step Mode

Record

Style:NewBossa 99%

Perf:01-01 Metro:On1

Resol:HI RT/Pad:REC

Sel.Tempo Ch/Acc:REC

Rec:NewSong

32 Tutorial

5 - Editing a Song

0Listen to the Song.

When back in the Backing Sequence Play page, press PLAY/

STOP (SEQ1) to listen to the new Song. How smart were

you?

If the Song is ﬁne, you can switch to the Song mode and do

some editing. Or you can save it (as seen below), and play it

in Song Play mode.

0And… if I want to delete and record again one

of the tracks, or the whole Song?

That’s easy!

1. Press RECORD again to enter Record mode.

2. Set the track to delete and record again to the REC sta-

tus.

3. Set the track you want to listen to during recording to

the PLAY status. If you don’t want to delete it, but you

don’t want to listen to it, set the track to the MUTE sta-

tus.

4. Start recording again. Anyway, if you are recording the

RT track, you can’t use the Style controls.

5. Press PLAY/STOP (SEQ1) to ﬁnish the Song and exit

Recording mode.

0Time to save your Song, isn’t it?

If you don’t save your Song, it is lost when you turn the

instrument off, or switch to the Song Play mode. So, save it to

a card. See “Save Song page” on page 84.

Need more information?

Go to “Backing Sequence operating mode” on page 82. The

Reference Guide includes all the information you need.

5 - EDITING A SONG

You can edit a Song, either a Standard MIDI File bought at

the shop, or one of your Songs made in Backing Sequence

mode.

What about changing those boring General MIDI sounds

with those gorgeous original KORG sounds? You can do it—

in Song mode.

1Press SONG to go to the Song mode.

This is the Song garage, where you may ﬁnd tools to reshape

your Song.

2Insert in the card drive the card containing the

midiﬁle you wish to edit.

Midiﬁles are ﬁles generated by a computer sequencer or a

musical instrument, usually after a conversion. For example,

if working with a computer, you should ﬁnd a command

whose name could sound a little like “Convert to .MID”. A

midiﬁle has a “.MID” or “.KAR” extension.

3Load the Song.

Press one of the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons (corresponding

to the Load Song command). As expected, the Load page will

appear.

If you replaced the card, press F1 (SD) to read the SD card

again.

Move the midiﬁle to load to the ﬁrst line of the display. Use

the DIAL or the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll the list; or

use the E-F (Scroll Up) or G-H (Scroll down) VOLUME/

VALUE buttons.

When the midiﬁle is on the ﬁrst line of the display, press F2

(Load) to load it. The “Are you sure?” message will appear.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm.

Note: When loading a Standard MIDI File, the ﬁrst MIDI

events are converted to the Song Performance events. You will

see them as the Programs, Volume, Pan, Effect settings assigned

to the tracks.

Style:NewBossa 99%

Perf:01-01 Metro:On1

Resol:HI RT/Pad:REC

Sel.Tempo Ch/Acc:REC

Rec:NewSong

Load Song Metro:Off

Save Song Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

New Song

BALLADS |

MYSONGS

MYSONG.MID |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Load Song

Tutorial

5 - Editing a Song

4Listen to the Song.

After loading you are back to the main page of the Song

mode.

Press PLAY/STOP (SEQ1) to listen to the Song. The LED on

the button turns on.

Does it sound good? If it is a General MIDI-compatible mid-

iﬁle, there is a good chance it does. But we can further

improve on it.

5Stop the Song.

This one is easy: press PLAY/STOP (SEQ1). The LED on the

PLAY/STOP button turns off.

Please, always remember: make any changes to the Song

when the sequencer is not playing. Otherwise, a Stop com-

mand will reset all your changes.

(Not funny, huh?)

6Select different Programs.

You can replace General MIDI Programs with KORG Pro-

grams. It will sound more rich, more lively.

1. Press TRACK SELECT to see tracks 1-8. The LED turns

on.

You are watching at tracks 1-8. You can switch to tracks

9-16 by pressing the TRACK SELECT button again.

If you press TRACK SELECT again, you are back to the

main page. Press TRACK SELECT AGAIN to go to

tracks 1-8…

2. Select the track you wish to assign a different Program

using the VOLUME/VALUE buttons. Press one of the

buttons corresponding to the track to select. For exam-

ple, one of the A buttons to select track 1:

3. Select a Program. You should know how to do. If not,

what about going back for a little to the “Basic opera-

tions” chapter, “Selecting a Program” section, page 26?

It will be of a great help in the future…

Which Programs to choose? With >660 Programs, you

will for sure ﬁnd your preferred sound. Just browse any

Program bank, and listen to them. Turn on the DIS-

PLAY HOLD LED, to stay in the Selecting Window until

you have found the right Program. (Then, press EXIT or

DISPLAY HOLD to exit the window.)

4. Execute as many changes as you like to the other tracks.

7Change the volume.

Yes, this is another obvious change. Press MENU to open the

edit menu.

Press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons, to select the

Mixer/Tuning item. Suddenly, a Volume edit page appears…

Select a track, and use the DIAL or the UP and DOWN but-

tons, or the VOLUME/VALUE buttons, to change the track’s

volume.

Modify all tracks you think need to be modiﬁed.

Load Song Metro:Off

Save Song Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

MySong

Piano1 Piano1

DkStrings Guitar01

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn VoxPad1

MySong

Strings1 VocaEns

DkStrings Bassi

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn Strings2

MySong

Piano1 Piano1

DkStrings Guitar01

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn VoxPad1

MySong

Mixer/Tun. Transp/Vel

Effects Del/Cut-Ins

Track Edit Copy

Quantize Event Edit

Song Edit MENU

|||| 090 |||| 090

|||| 090 |||| 092

|||| 090 |||| 086

|||| 090 ||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

34 Tutorial

6 - The Arabic Scale

8Save the Song.

Your changes will be lost when you load a new Song, switch

to the Song Play mode, or turn the instrument off. So, press

EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song mode.

Press one of the C VOLUME/VALUE buttons, to select the

Save Song command. Save your Song with a new name. How

to accomplish this simple operation is described in great

details on page 90 (“Save Song page”).

Note: When saving a Song the Song Performance events (initial

Program, Volume, Pan, Effect Send settings) are saved at the

beginning of the Standard MIDI File. Effect settings are saved as

Pa50SD SysEx events, ignored by other musical instruments.

Other editings

The Volume is not the only parameter you can edit. You can

edit a lot more things, like the Pan, the Effects, the Tuning…

you can even use up to 4 effects (A-D Internal FX Proces-

sors), but this will be useful only when reading the Song back

on the Pa50SD only, since other General MIDI-compliant

instruments use only 2 effects.

Need more information?

Go to “Song operating mode” on page 88. The Reference

Guide includes all the information you need.

6 - THE ARABIC SCALE

You can program an Arabic scale in real time, by assigning a

footswitch or a pad the “Quarter Tone” function.

Another way of changing the scale is assigning it to a Perfor-

mance or Single Touch Setting (STS), but this is the most

convenient way to change the pitch in real time.

1Program a footswitch to be the Quarter

tone switch.

Simply go to the Global environment, and reach “Page 3 -

Assignable Pedal/Footswitch, Assignable Slider”. There, you

will ﬁnd the “P/S (Pedal/Switch)” parameter, to which you

can assign the Quarter tone function.

Press WRITE to save the Global status in memory (see “The

Write window” on page 125).

2Lower some note pitches.

Keep the Quarter tone pedal pressed. The keyboard will not

play at this time. Press the notes you want to lower a quarter

of tone. Release the pedal.

3Play with your new scale.

The notes you pressed are now lowered of a quarter of tone.

4Reset the original scale.

Press the Quarter tone pedal again. All pitches will be reset,

and the scale selected by the Performance, STS or Style Per-

formance will be recalled.

Need more information?

As stated, you can assign an alternative scale to a Perfor-

mance or STS. Go to “Page 5 - Tuning: Scale” on page 44, and

give also a look to the “Scale Mode” parameter (see page 51).

Load Song Metro:Off

Save Song Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

MySong

MIDI

What is MIDI?

8. MIDI

WHAT IS MIDI?

Here is a brief overview of MIDI, as related to the Pa50SD. If

interested, you may ﬁnd more information on the general use

of MIDI in the various specialized magazines and books.

In general

MIDI stands for Musical Instruments Digital Interface. This

interface lets you connect two musical instruments, or a

computer and various musical instruments.

Physically, MIDI is composed of three different connectors.

The MIDI IN receives data from another device; the MIDI

OUT sends data to another device; the MIDI THRU sends to

another device exactly what was received on the MIDI IN

(this is useful to daisy-chain more instruments).

Channels and messages

Basically, a MIDI cable transmits 16 channels of data. Think

to each MIDI channel as a TV channel: the receiver must be

set on the same channel of the transmitter. The same happens

with MIDI messages: when you send a Note On message on

channel 1, it will be received on channel 1 only. This allows

for multitimbricity: you can have more than one sound play-

ing on the same MIDI instrument.

There are various messages, but here are the most commonly

used:

Note On – This message instructs an instrument to play a

note on a speciﬁc channel. Notes have both a name (C4

standing for the center C) and a number (60 being the equiv-

alent for C4). A Note Off message is often used to say the note

has been released. In some case, a Note On with value “0” is

used instead.

Together with the Note On message, a Velocity value is always

sent. This value tells the instrument how loud the note must

play.

Pitch Bend (PB) – You can generate this message acting on

the joystick (X movement). The pitch is translated up or

down.

Program Change (PC)– When you select a Program, a Pro-

gram Change message is generated on the channel. Use this

message, together with Control Change 00 and 32, to

remotely select Pa50SD data from a sequencer or a master

keyboard.

Control Change (CC) – This is a wide array of messages,

controlling most of the instrument parameters. Some exam-

ples:

• CC00, or Bank Select MSB, and CC32, or Bank Select

LSB. This message pair is used, together with the Pro-

gram Change message, to select a Program.

• CC01, or Modulation. This is the equivalent of pressing

up the joystick. A vibrato effect is usually triggered on.

• CC07, or Master Volume. Use this controller to set the

channel’s volume.

• CC10, or Pan. This one sets the channel’s position on

the stereo front.

• CC64, or Damper Pedal. Use this controller to simulate

the Damper pedal.

Tempo

Tempo is a global MIDI message, that is not tied to a particu-

lar channel. Each Song includes Tempo data.

Lyrics

Lyrics are non-standard MIDI events, made to display text

together with the music. Pa50SD can read many of the avail-

able Lyrics format on the market.

MIDIFILES

Midiﬁles, or Standard MIDI Files (SMF), are a practical way

of exchanging songs between different instruments and com-

puters. Pa50SD has the SMF format as its default song for-

mat, so reading a song from a computer, or saving a song that

a computer software can read, is not a problem at all.

Pa50SD sequencers are compatible with the SMF in format 0

(all data in one track; it is the most common format) and 1

(multitrack). It can read the SMF in Song Play mode and

modify/save them in Song mode. It can save a Song in SMF 0

format in the Backing Sequence or Song mode.

When in Song Play mode, the Pa50SD can also display SMF

lyrics in Solton, M-Live (Midisoft), Tune1000 and compati-

ble (Edirol, GMX, HitBit, XF) formats, and the chord abbre-

viations of SMF in Solton, M-live (Midisoft), GMX, and XF

format.

THE GENERAL MIDI STANDARD

Some years ago, the musical instruments world felt a need for

some further standardization. Then, the General MIDI Stan-

dard (GM) was born. This extension of the basic MIDI sets

new rules for compatibility between instruments:

• A minimum of 16 MIDI channels was required.

• A basic set of 128 Programs, correctly ordered, was

mandatory.

• The Drum Kit had a standard order.

• Channel 10 had to be devoted to the Drum Kit.

A most recent extension is the GM2, that further expands the

Programs database. The Pa50SD is soundwise-compatible

with the GM2 standard.

THE GLOBAL CHANNEL

Any channels with the Global option assigned (see “Page 6 -

MIDI IN Channels” on page 127) can simulate the Pa50SD

integrated keyboard. When the Pa50SD is connected to a

master keyboard, transmission should take place over the

Global channel of the Pa50SD.

The MIDI messages received over a Global channel and not

over a standard channel are affected by the buttons of the

KEYBOARD MODE section, as well from the split point.

Therefore, if the SPLIT button LED is lit up, the notes that

arrive to the Pa50SD over this channel will be divided by the

36 MIDI

The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels

split point into the Upper (above the split point) and Lower

(below the split point) parts.

The notes that arrive to a Global channel are used for the

chord recognition of the automatic accompaniment. If the

KEYBOARD MODE is SPLIT, only the notes below the split

point will be used. These notes will be combined with the

ones of the special Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels.

THE CHORD 1 AND CHORD 2 CHANNELS

You can set two special Chord channels (see page 128) to

send to the Pa50SD notes for the chord recognition. The

notes will be combined with the notes that go through the

channel set as Global (Global notes are recognized only

under the split point, if the SPLIT LED is lit up).

The Chord channels are not affected by the split point and

the KEYBOARD MODE section of the control panel. All the

notes – both above and below the split point – will be sent to

the chord recognition.

The buttons of the CHORD SCANNING section have a par-

ticular effect on the Chord channels:

• if you have selected LOWER, the chord recognition

mode will be set by the “Chord Recognition Mode”

parameter in the Style Play mode (see page 50);

• if you have selected UPPER or FULL, the chord recogni-

tion mode will always be Fingered 2 (you need to play at

least three notes in order for the chord to be detected).

These two channels are especially useful for accordion players

to assign a different Chord channel to the chords and the bass

played with the left hand. In this way, chords and bass will

participate to the creation of chords for the chord recogni-

tion of the automatic accompaniment.

THE CONTROL CHANNEL

You can set a MIDI IN channel as the Control channel (see

page 127), to select Styles and Performance from an external

device. See the Appendix for a list of messages corresponding

to Pa50SD internal data.

MIDI SETUP

You can play Pa50SD with an external controller, and use it

simply as a gorgeous sound generator. To help you conﬁgure

the MIDI channels, we have provided a set of MIDI Setups.

Go to Global mode to select the one that ﬁts your MIDI

needs. (See “Page 4 - MIDI Setup” on page 126 for more

information).

We recommend you to consider each MIDI Setup as a start-

ing point you can freely tweak. Once you have selected the

most appropriate MIDI Setup for the connection to be made,

you can modify the parameters as necessary and save the Glo-

bal in the memory with the Write function (see “The Write

window” on page 125).

CONNECTING PA50SD TO A MASTER

KEYBOARD

You can control the Pa50SD with a master keyboard or any

other MIDI keyboard. You only need to connect the MIDI

OUT connector of the master keyboard to the MIDI IN con-

nector of the Pa50SD. The master keyboard will become the

integrated keyboard of the Pa50SD if it transmits over the

same channel programmed as Global in the Pa50SD.

If the master keyboard transmits over the Global channel of

the Pa50SD, the split point and the status of the KEYBOARD

MODE section in the control panel will affect the notes

received from the master keyboard.

Connections and settings

To connect the master keyboard to the Pa50SD follow this

procedure:

1. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master key-

board to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa50SD.

2. Program the master keyboard to transmit over the Glo-

bal channel of the Pa50SD (see “Page 6 - MIDI IN

Channels” on page 127).

For information on the master keyboard programming,

see the user’s manual of the master keyboard.

3. Press GLOBAL to enter the Global mode, then go to

“Page 4 - MIDI Setup” (see page 126).

4. Select the Master Keyboard Setup.

Note: The settings can change when new data is loaded

from a card. To protect the settings from loading, use the

Global Protect function (see “Global Protect” on

page 141).

5. Press WRITE, select Global, and press ENTER to save

the Global. The “Are you sure?” message will appear.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

6. Press one of the buttons in the MODE section to go to

the desired operative mode.

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI

Connecting the Pa50SD to a MIDI accordion

CONNECTING THE PA50SD TO A MIDI

ACCORDION

There are different types of MIDI accordion and each type

requires a different conﬁguration of the Pa50SD. Select one of

the MIDI “Accordion” Setups to conﬁgure the module prop-

erly (see page 126).

Connection and settings

To connect the accordion to the Pa50SD follow this proce-

dure:

1. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the accordion to

the MIDI IN connector of the Pa50SD.

2. Press GLOBAL to enter the Global mode, then go to

“Page 4 - MIDI Setup” (see page 126).

3. Select one of the Accordion Setups.

Note: The settings can change when new data is loaded

from a card. To protect the settings from loading, use the

Global Protect function (see “Global Protect” on

page 141).

4. Press WRITE, select Global, and press ENTER to save

the Global. The “Are you sure?” message will appear.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

5. Press one of the buttons in the MODE section to go to

the desired operative mode.

CONNECTING THE PA50SD TO AN EXTERNAL

SEQUENCER

You can program a new Song on an external sequencer, using

Pa50SD as a multi-timbral expander.

Connections and settings

In order to connect the Pa50SD to a computer, you need to

have a computer with the MIDI interface.

1. Connect the Pa50SD and the computer as in the follow-

ing diagram.

2. Press GLOBAL, and go to “Page 5 - MIDI Controls”. Set

the Local parameter to Off (see page 127).

3. Go to “Page 4 - MIDI Setup” (see page 126). Select the

Ext.Seq Setup.

Note: The settings can change when new data is loaded

from a card. To protect the settings from loading, use the

Global Protect function (see “Global Protect” on

page 141).

4. Press WRITE, select Global, and press ENTER to save

the Global. The “Are you sure?” message will appear.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

5. Set the Upper 1 track in play, and press FULL UPPER in

the KEYBOARD MODE section. This way, you can

transmit to the external sequencer on the full keyboard

range.

6. At this point, the notes played on the Upper 1 track go

from the MIDI OUT of the Pa50SD to the MIDI IN of

the computer/MIDI interface.

The notes generated by the computer (i.e. a Song played

by its sequencer) are sent thru the MIDI OUT of the

MIDI interface to the MIDI IN connector of the

Pa50SD.

The Local Off

When the Pa50SD is connected to an external sequencer, we

recommend you to set the Pa50SD in Local Off mode (see

“Local” on page 127) to avoid that the notes are simulta-

neously played by the keyboard and by the MIDI events sent

by the external sequencer.

When the Pa50SD is in Local Off, the Pa50SD keyboard

transmits data to the external sequencer, but not to the inter-

nal sound generation. The sequencer will receive the notes

played on the Pa50SD keyboard (Upper 1) and send them to

the selected track of the song. The track will transmit the data

to the internal sound generation of the Pa50SD.

Note: In order to send data to the Pa50SD sound generation,

the “MIDI Thru” function must be activated in the external

sequencer (normally active; the name may be different accord-

ing to the type of sequencer). For more information refer to the

instructions manual of the sequencer.

The programs

The Song that is played back by the computer sequencer can

select the Pa50SD Programs through the MIDI messages

Bank Select MSB and Bank Select LSB (bank selection, two

messages) and Program Change (program selection). For a

list of Programs and MIDI values, see “Programs (Program

Change order)” on page 154.

A suggestion for those who program songs on computer:

Even though it is not essential, you usually set the bass on

channel 2, melody on channel 4, drum kit on channel 10,

control for an external voice harmonizer on channel 5.

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

38 MIDI

Playing another instrument with the Pa50SD

PLAYING ANOTHER INSTRUMENT WITH THE

PA50SD

You can use the Pa50SD as the master controller for your

MIDI setup.

1. Connect Pa50SD’s MIDI OUT to the other instrument’s

MIDI IN.

2. Set-up the other instrument’s tracks to the same chan-

nels you want to play from Pa50SD. For example, if you

wish to play the Upper 1 and Upper 2 tracks with the

other instrument’s sound, set the other instrument to

receive on the same channels of the Upper 1 and Upper

2 tracks (by default, channels 1 and 2).

3. Set the general volume of the other instrument with its

own volume controls.

4. Mute/unmute any track right from the Pa50SD front

panel. Set each track’s volume using Pa50SD own VOL-

UME/VALUE controls.

5. Play on Pa50SD’s keyboard.

The Keyboard

Pa50SD’s physical keyboard can drive up to 4 tracks via the

MIDI OUT (Upper 1-3 and Lower). MIDI output channels

are set in Global mode (see “Page 10 - MIDI OUT Channels”

on page 129).

As a default situation (Default Setup), each of Pa50SD Real-

time Tracks transmit on these channels:

When a track is in mute, it can’t transmit any MIDI data to

an external expander or sequencer connected Pa50SD’s MIDI

OUT.

To hear only the expander’s sounds, you can lower the MAS-

TER VOLUME control on the Pa50SD, or set the Realtime

Tracks to the External status (see “Page 15 - Track: Internal/

External” on page 46).

The Sequencer

Any Sequencer’s track can drive a channel on an external

instrument. To set each track’s MIDI output channel, see

“Page 10 - MIDI OUT Channels” on page 129.

To hear only the expander’s sounds, you can lower the MAS-

TER VOLUME control on the Pa50SD, or set the Song tracks

to the External status (see “Page 8 - Track: Internal/External”

on page 78).

Select the Sequencer 1 or Sequencer 2 MIDI Setup (depend-

ing on the Sequencer you are using on the Pa50SD) to set the

channels as follows.

The Arranger

One of the most interesting aspect of MIDI, is that you can

use your Pa50SD to play an external instrument with its

onboard arranger. Yes, it’s hard to beat the audio quality of

Pa50SD, but you could wish to use that old faithful synth you

are still accustomed to…

To assign some of Pa50SD Style tracks to an external instru-

ment, set them to the External status (see “Page 15 - Track:

Internal/External” on page 46).

Select the Default MIDI Setup to set the channels as follows

(this is the default status of Pa50SD).

Track Out Channel

Upper1 1

Upper2 2

Upper3 3

Lower 4

Track Out Channel

Song 1…16 1…16

Track Out Channel

Bass 9

Drums 10

Percussion 11

Acc1…5 12…16

REFERENCE GUIDE

40 Style Play operating mode

What’s a Style?

9. STYLE PLAY OPERATING MODE

The Style Play mode is the boot-up operating mode. When in

this mode, you can play Styles (i.e. automatic accompani-

ments), or just play with one to four Realtime tracks on the

keyboard (Upper 1…3 and Lower).

WHAT’S A STYLE?

A Style is a rhythm/accompaniment structure, that simulates

a band backing your solos.

In a vertical direction, it is composed of 8 different tracks

(Drums, Percussion, Bass, and 5 different harmonic or

melodic instruments). You can play on the keyboard with 4

more Realtime tracks (Upper 1-3 and Lower).

In a horizontal direction, it is a series of Style Elements (i.e.,

the various sets of patterns for each chord and each of the

Intros, Variations, Fills, Breaks and Endings).

STYLES AND PERFORMANCES

Styles and Performances are linked in many ways.

• When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is on, selecting a Style

also changes the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks (a Single

Touch Setting is selected). The Performance settings are

overridden.

• When the STYLE CHANGE LED is on, selecting a Per-

formance also selects a Style (the one whose number is

memorized with the Performance).

• When pressing the WRITE button, you can save the

track’s settings either in a Performance, a Style Perfor-

mance, or a Single Touch Setting (STS).

CHANGING AND RESETTING THE TEMPO

While in the main page of the Style Play mode, you can

change the Tempo using the DIAL or the DOWN/- and UP/+

buttons.

In any other page, keep the SHIFT button pressed, and use

the DIAL to change the Tempo.

To recall the Tempo stored in the current Style, keep the

SHIFT button pressed, and press one of the DOWN/- or UP/

+ buttons.

THE DIRECT SD BANK

In addition to the internal memory Styles, you can have

DIRECT SD Styles, directly accessed from the card.

Just insert a card, and press the DIRECT SD Style bank. The

card drive will read the ﬁrst (in alphabetical order) “.SET”

folder in the card, and will give you direct access to the Styles

it contains (no loading required).

Browse through the DIRECT SD Styles using the PAGE but-

tons. You can have up to 6 pages, and up to 48 DIRECT SD

Styles in a card.

How to make the DIRECT SD bank

To conﬁgure the DIRECT SD bank, save your Styles into the

ﬁrst folder in the card. Folders are read in alphabetical order.

Note: The following procedures requires you overwrite the User

Style banks. Save these banks before proceeding, to avoid loosing

important data.

1. Insert the card into the card drive.

2. Press SD CARD and go to the Load page.

3. Use the F1 (SD) button to rescan the SD card.

4. Load three banks of Styles, to be transformed into the

DIRECT SD bank.

5. Go to the Save page.

6. While the “ALL” item is selected, press F3 (Open) to

open it.

7. Use the E-F (Scroll Up) and G-H (Scroll Down) VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE section

controls) to move the “STYLE” item to the ﬁrst line of

the display, and press F2 (Save).

8. Select the SD card (SD) as the target, using the F1 but-

ton.

9. The card directory appears. Use the E-F (Scroll Up) and

G-H (Scroll Down) VOLUME/VALUE buttons (or the

TEMPO/VALUE section controls), to scroll the card

content. Move the ﬁrst folder of the directory to the ﬁrst

line of the display.

10. Press ENTER twice to save the banks.

Folder DIRECT SD pages

*.SET > STYLE > USER01 1, 2

*.SET > STYLE > USER02 3, 4

*.SET > STYLE > USER03 5, 6

NEWNAME.SET |

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

ALL

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

Style Play operating mode

Main page

MAIN PAGE

This is the page you see after you turn the instrument on.

To access this page from another operating mode, press the

STYLE PLAY button.

Note: When switching from Song Play to Style Play, a Perfor-

mance is automatically selected, and various track parameters

may change.

To return to this page from one of the Style Play edit pages,

press the EXIT/NO button.

To switch between the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks and the

Style tracks, use the TRACK SELECT button.

Style Play icon

When on, this icon indicates that the instrument is in Style

Play mode.

Selected Style

Currently selected Style.

Selected STS or Performance

The last selected Single Touch Setting (STS) or Performance.

A (Drum/Perc grouped tracks)

Use these buttons to select, mute/unmute or change the vol-

ume of both Drum and Percussion tracks (grouped together)

at the same time. To mute these tracks, press both VOLUME/

VALUE buttons. To unmute, press both buttons again. To

change the volume, select the track, then keep one of the but-

tons pressed.

B (Bass track Program name)

Name of the Program assigned to the Bass backing track. Use

these buttons to select, mute/unmute or change the volume

of the Bass track. To mute this track, press both VOLUME/

VALUE buttons. To unmute, press both buttons again. To

change the volume, select the track, then keep one of the but-

tons pressed.

C (Acc.1-5 grouped tracks)

Use these buttons to select, mute/unmute or change the vol-

ume of the instrumental accompaniment tracks (tracks 1-5,

other than Bass, Drum and Percussion). To mute these

tracks, press both VOLUME/VALUE buttons. To unmute

them, press both buttons again. To change the volume, keep

one of the buttons pressed.

E (Upper 1 Program), F (Upper 2 Program), G (Upper 3 Pro-

gram), H (Lower Program)

Name of the Programs assigned to the Realtime (Keyboard)

tracks. Use these buttons to select, mute/unmute or change

the volume of the corresponding tracks.

STYLE TRACKS PAGE

To see and edit the Style tracks, press TRACK SELECT from

the main page. The TRACK SELECT LED turns on.

Press the TRACK SELECT button once again to go back to

the main page.

A-H (Style Track Programs)

Name of the Programs assigned to the Style tracks. Use these

buttons to select, mute/unmute or change the volume of the

corresponding tracks.

HOW TO SELECT PROGRAMS

You can assign a different Program to each of the Realtime

(Keyboard) and Style tracks. See “Selecting a Program” on

page 26 for more information.

After selecting a new Program, save your changes into a Per-

formance, Style or STS (see below “The Write window” sec-

tion).

Note: If you select a Program while grouped tracks (Drum/Per-

cussion or ACC) are selected, the Program will be assigned to

the last selected track.

Drum/Perc GrandPiano

Bass01 DarkPad

Acc.1-5 StrngEns2

AnalogStr

SoftBeat |STS1

Style Play icon Selected Style

Selected STS or

Performance

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks

Accompaniment (backing) tracks (grouped)

Brush 2 Piano01

Perc Kit Guitar01

*AcouBass StrngEns2

AcouPiano2 VoxPad1

SoftBeat |STS1

42 Style Play operating mode

The Write window

THE WRITE WINDOW

Open this window by pressing the WRITE button. Here, you

can save all track settings into a Performance, the Realtime

(Keyboard) track settings into a Single Touch Setting, or the

Style track settings into the current Style Performance.

1. Select the kind of object you want to save your tracks

into.

• Select the “Perf No.” line to save all tracks (and the cur-

rent selected Style settings) into a Performance. Use the

corresponding VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the

TEMPO/VALUE section controls, to select a Perfor-

mance location in memory. The name of the Perfor-

mance already at the target destination will be shown.

• Select the “STS No.” line to save the Realtime (Key-

board) tracks into a Single Touch Setting (STS). Use the

corresponding VOLUME/VALUE buttons or the

TEMPO/VALUE section controls, to select a Single

Touch Setting number.

• Select the Current Style line, to save the Style tracks

into the current Style Performance.

2. If you are saving a Performance, you can change its

name. Select the “Perf name” line.

Move the cursor using the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons.

Select a character using the DIAL. Insert a character at

the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button.

Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the

DELETE button.

3. Press ENTER to save the settings in memory. The “Are

you sure?” message appears. Press ENTER to conﬁrm,

or EXIT to abort.

From any page, press MENU to open the Style Play edit

menu. This menu gives access to the various Style Play edit

sections.

When in the menu, select an edit section using the VOLUME/

VALUE (A-H) buttons, select an edit page using PAGE +, or

press EXIT to exit the menu.

When in an edit page, press EXIT to go back to the main page

of the Style Play operating mode.

Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section. Each

edit section groups various edit pages.

EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE

Select an edit section from the Menu, and/or use the PAGE

buttons to reach the desired page.

Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Play

mode.

All edit pages share the same structure.

Style Play icon

When on, this icon indicates that the instrument is in Style

Play mode.

Page header

The header shows the name of the current edit page. As a

general rule, the header is divided into a ﬁrst word, identify-

ing the section name (e.g., “Mixer:FX Send” is a “Mixer” sec-

tion page), and a second word, referring to the page name

(e.g. “FX Send”).

Page number

This area shows the current page number.

A-H

Each pair of VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons selects a differ-

ent parameter of command, depending on the edit page.

After selecting a parameter, you can change its value by press-

If you select… …you save… …to this location…

Performance All track settings,

selected Style

number, Master

Transpose

Selected Performance

STS Realtime (Key-

board) track set-

tings

Selected Single Touch

Setting (a part of the

current Style)

Current Style Style track set-

tings, Master

Transpose

Current Style Perfor-

mance

Perf.Name:

Perf.No.:

STS No.:

Current Style

Write to

Mixer RT Ctrls

Tuning Sty Ctrls

Effects Input/Pad

Track Edit Preferences

Style Play Menu

|||||| 127 ||||| 090

||||| 100 ||| | 092

|||||| 127 || || 086

|||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

Style Play icon Page header Page number

Section name Page name

Mixer:FX Send

Style Play operating mode

Page 1 - Mixer: Volume

ing one of the two buttons in a pair, or using the TEMPO/

VALUE controls.

PAGE 1 - MIXER: VOLUME

This page lets you set the volume for each of the Realtime

(Keyboard) or Style tracks.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks to the Style tracks, and vice versa.

Volume

Track’s volume.

0…127 MIDI value of the track’s volume.

PAGE 2 - MIXER: PAN

This page lets you set the pan (position in the stereo front)

for each track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks to the Style tracks, and vice-versa.

Pan

L-64 Hard Left.

C+00 Center.

R+63 Hard Right.

Off The direct (uneffected) signal does not go to

the outputs; only the FX signal is heard for this

track.

PAGE 3 - MIXER: FX SEND

This page lets you set the level of the track’s direct (unef-

fected) signal going to the Internal FX processors. The effect

processors included in Pa50SD are connected in parallel, so

you can decide which percentage of the direct signal should

be effected:

There are four Internal FX processors in Style Play mode. You

can assign them any kind of available effects, but we found it

convenient to arrange them in the following way, for all the

Styles included with the Pa50SD:

A Reverb processor for the Style tracks.

B Modulating FX processor for the Style tracks.

C Reverb processor for the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks.

D Modulating FX processor for the Realtime (Keyboard)

tracks.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks to the Style tracks, and vice-versa.

To select a parameter and edit its value:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons to select a

track.

2. Use the F1-F4 buttons to select one of the effect proces-

sors.

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the value.

Send level

000 No effect. Only the direct (uneffected) signal

goes to the outputs.

127 100% effect. The direct (uneffected) and

effected signals go to the outputs with the same

level.

|||||| 127 ||||| 090

||||| 100 ||| | 092

|||||| 127 || || 086

|||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

|||||| 110 ||||| 090

||||| 100 ||| | 092

|||||| 110 || || 086

|||||| 110 |||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

- - - - - C+00

R+20 || C+00

- - - - - C+10 |

C+00

Mixer:Pan

|||L-64 C+00

R+10 || C+00

C+00 |L-10

C+00 C+00

Mixer:Pan

Track Output

FX Processor

- - - - - - C:100 D:050

A:127 B:020 C:100 D:050

- - - - - - C:100 D:050

C:100 D:050

Mixer:FX Send

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:127 B:020 A:100 B:050

A:110 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

Mixer:FX Send

44 Style Play operating mode

Page 4 - Tuning: Detune

PAGE 4 - TUNING: DETUNE

This page is the place where you can set the ﬁne tuning for

each track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks to the Style tracks, and vice-versa.

Detune

This is the ﬁne tuning value.

-64 Lowest pitch.

00 Standard tuning.

+63 Highest pitch.

PAGE 5 - TUNING: SCALE

This page lets you program the alternative scale for the

selected tracks (see “Scale Mode” on page 51). The remaining

tracks use the Scale set in the Global mode (see “Scale” on

page 125).

Scale

Selected scale. See “Scales” on page 227 for a list of the avail-

able scales.

Key

Parameter required for some Scales, when you should select a

preferred key.

Note

Note in edit, to be detuned. This parameter can be accessed

when a User Scale is selected.

Detune

Note detune, relative to the standard Equal tuning. This

parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected.

PAGE 6 - TUNING: PITCHBEND SENSITIVITY

This page lets you program the Pitch Bend range for the Real-

time (Keyboard) tracks.

Parameters

These parameters show the Pitch Bend range for each track,

in semitones.

01…12 Maximum up/down pitchbend range (in semi-

tones). 12 = ±1 octave.

Off No pitchbend allowed.

PAGE 7 - FX: A/B SELECT

This page enables you to select the A and B effects. Usually,

the A effect is the reverb, and the B effect is the modulating

effect for the Style tracks.

A, B

Effects assigned to the A and B effect processors. Usually, A is

the reverb, while B is the modulating effect (chorus, ﬂanger,

delay…). For a list of the available effects, see “Effects” on

page 175.

ModTrk (Modulating Track)

Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modu-

late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a

physical controller.

B>Asend (B>A Send)

Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect.

PAGE 8 - FX: C/D SELECT

This page lets you select the C and D effects. Usually, the C

effect is the reverb, and the D effect is the modulating effect

for the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks.

- - - - - +00

+00 +00

- - - - - +00

+00

Tuning:Detune

- - - - - +00

+00 +00

Scale:User

Key:C

Note:C#

Detune:+63

Tuning:Scale

- - - - - 02

Tuning:PB sens.

A:02 B:89

Compressor Rev-Gate

ModTrk:Up1 B>Asend:127

FX:A/B Select

C:02 D:89

Compressor Rev-Gate

ModTrk:Up1 D>Csend:127

FX:C/D Select

Style Play operating mode

Page 9 - FX: A editing

C, D

Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors. Usually, C is

the reverb, while D is the modulating effect (chorus, ﬂanger,

delay…). For a list of the available effects, see “Effects” on

page 175.

ModTrk (Modulating Track)

Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modu-

late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a

physical controller.

D>Csend (D>C Send)

Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C

effect.

PAGE 9 - FX: A EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect

(usually, reverb for the Style tracks).

Use the E and H VOLUME/VALUE buttons to scroll the

parameter list.

Parameters

See “Effects” on page 175 for a list of available parameters for

each effect type.

PAGE 10 - FX: B EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect

(usually modulating effect for the Style tracks). For more

details, see “Page 9 - FX: A editing” above.

Parameters

PAGE 11 - FX: C EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect

(usually reverb for the Realtime tracks). For more details, see

“Page 9 - FX: A editing” above.

Parameters

PAGE 12 - FX: D EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect

(usually modulating effect for the Realtime tracks). For more

details, see “Page 9 - FX: A editing” above.

Parameters

PAGE 13 - TRACK: EASY EDIT

In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Pro-

grams assigned to each track.

Note: All values are relative to the value of the original Pro-

gram.

You can also change the volume for each class of Drums and

Percussion, if the selected track is set in Drum mode (see

below “Page 14 - Track: Mode”).

Here is the edit procedure:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons to select a

track.

2. Use the F1-F4 buttons to select a Program parameter, or

its value. (For the Drum and Percussion tracks, see

below the “Drum tracks” section).

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the Pro-

gram parameter or its value.

Parameters

Attack Attack time. This is the time during which the

sound goes from zero (at the moment when

you strike a key) to it’s maximum level.

Decay Decay time. Time to go from the ﬁnal Attack

level to the beginning of the Release.

Release Release time. This is the time during which the

sound goes from the sustaining (or Decay)

phase, to zero. The Release is triggered by

releasing a key.

Cutoff Filter cutoff. This sets the sound brightness.

Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to deﬁne the width of

the frequency range affected by the Filter.

Vibrato Rate Speed of the Vibrato.

Vibrato Depth

Intensity of the Vibrato.

Vibrato Delay

Delay time before the Vibrato begins, after the

sound starts.

Drum tracks

When a track is set in Drum Mode (like the Drum and Per-

cussion tracks), you can adjust the volume for each of the

Drum and Percussion categories.

Kick V Kick drums volume.

Snare V Snare drums volume.

Tom V Toms volume.

HiHat V Hi-Hat volume.

CymbalV Ride, Crash and other cymbals volume.

Mix mod. source:JS-Y |

Mix mod. amt.: +127

Reverb Time: 3.07 sec

HF Damping: 30 % |

FX:A Edit (Sty)

- - - - - Attack:0

Attack:0 Attack:0

- - - - - Attack:0

Attack:0

Track:Easy Edit

Kick V:127 Attack:0

Perc1V:127 Attack:0

Attack:0 Attack:0

Track:Easy Edit

46 Style Play operating mode

Page 14 - Track: Mode

Percus1V “Classic” percussion set volume.

Percus2V “Ethnic” percussion set volume.

SFX V Special effects volume.

Reset

You can reset the parameters’ value by keeping the SHIFT

button pressed, while pressing one of the selected track VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons. After you press the above button com-

bination, the Reset window appears:

Press ENTER/YES to reset the currently selected track. Keep

SHIFT pressed, and press ENTER/YES, to reset all tracks.

Press EXIT/NO to abort and keep all parameters unchanged.

PAGE 14 - TRACK: MODE

This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each track.

Parameters

Drum This is a Drum/Percussion track. No Master or

Octave Transpose applies to this track. You can

set a different volume for each class of percus-

sive instruments (see “Page 13 - Track: Easy

edit” on page 45).

Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic, i.e. they can

play more than one note at the same time.

Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic, i.e. each

new note stops the previous note.

Mono Right A Mono track, but with priority assigned to

the rightmost (highest) note.

PAGE 15 - TRACK: INTERNAL/EXTERNAL

This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each

track. It is very useful to let a Style track drive an external

expander, or play a digital piano with one of Pa50SD’s Real-

time tracks.

Parameters

Internal The track plays the sounds generated by the

internal sound engine. It does not play an

external instrument connected to the MIDI

OUT.

External The track plays an external instrument con-

nected to the MIDI OUT. It does not play the

internal sounds, therefore saving polyphony.

When a track is set to “External”, a strings of

transmitted Control Change and Program

Change data is shown instead of the Program

name assigned to the track. In the following

example, CC#0 is the Control Change 0 (Bank

Select MSB), CC#32 is the Control Change 32

(Bank Select LSB), PC is the Program Change.

Both The track plays both the internal sounds and

an external instrument connected to the MIDI

OUT.

RESET NO=Cancel

YES=Trk SHFT+YES=All

- - - - - Mono Right

Poly Poly

- - - - - Poly

Poly

Track:Mode

Drum Mono Right

Drum Poly

Poly Poly

Track:Mode

Both Both

Both External

Both

Track:Int/Ext

External Both

Both Both

Track:Int/Ext

121- 3- 0

CC#0 CC#32 PC

Style Play operating mode

Page 16 - R.T. controls: Damper

PAGE 16 - R.T. CONTROLS: DAMPER

This page lets you enable/disable the Damper pedal for each

of the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks.

D (Damper)

On When you press the Damper pedal and release

the keys, the track’s sound is kept sustained.

Off The Damper pedal is not active on any track

set to this status.

E (Expression)

This parameters allows you to switch the Expression control

on/off on each individual Realtime track. The Expression

control is a relative level control, always subtracted from the

Volume value of the track.

As an example, imagine you have a Piano sound assigned to

Upper 1, and a Strings sound assigned to Upper 2. If you turn

the Expression switch on on Upper 2, and off on Upper 1,

you can use a pedal to control only the Strings’ volume, while

the Piano remains unchanged.

To program a pedal or the Assignable Slider to act as an

Expression control, see “Page 3 - Assignable Pedal/Foot-

switch, Assignable Slider” on page 126. You can only assign

this function to a volume-type pedal, not to a switch-type

one. Assign the “KB Expression” option to the pedal or

Assignable Slider, then press WRITE to save the setting into

the Global.

PAGE 17 - R.T. CONTROLS: JOYSTICK

This page lets you enable/disable the Joystick for each of the

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks.

Here is the edit procedure:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (E-H) buttons to select a

track.

2. Use the F3-F4 buttons to select the X or Y parameter for

that track.

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the status.

This enables/disables the left/right movement of the Joystick

(Pitch Bend, and sometimes the sound parameter’s control).

This enables/disables the front/rear movement of the Joystick

(Y+: Modulation, and sometimes the sound parameter’s con-

trol; Y-: Various controls, or non-active).

PAGE 18 - R.T. CONTROLS: DYNAMIC RANGE

This page lets you program a dynamic range for each of the

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks. This is useful to create a sound

made of up to three dynamic layers, assigning each of the

Upper tracks to a different dynamic range.

As an example, you may assign the El.Piano 1 Program to the

Upper 1, and the El.Piano 2 Program to the Upper 2 track.

Then, set Upper 1 to [L=0, H=80], and Upper 2 to [L=81,

H=127]. The El.Piano 1 will play when playing softer, the

El.Piano 2 when playing louder.

Here is the edit procedure:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (E-H) buttons to select a

track.

2. Use the F3-F4 buttons to select the L or H parameter for

that track.

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the parame-

ter’s value.

L/H

This parameter pair sets the Lower and Higher dynamic

range for the track.

0 Lowest velocity value.

127 Highest velocity value.

PAGE 19 - R.T. CONTROLS: ENSEMBLE

This page lets you program the Ensemble function. This

function harmonizes the right-hand played melody with the

left-hand recognized chords.

Up1…Up3

Right-hand (Upper) tracks.

Off There is no harmonization on this track.

Normal This track is included in the harmonization.

Mute This track only plays the Ensemble notes, but

not the original note.

- - - - - D:On E:On

D:On E:On

RT Ctl:Dmpr&Expr

- - - - - X:On Y:On

X:On Y:On

RT Ctl:Joystick

- - - - - L:0 H:127

L:0 H:127

RT Ctl:DynRange

E:Dual Up1:Normal

Dyn :- 2 Up2:Off

Note:+ 0 Up3:Off

RT Ctl:Ensemble

48 Style Play operating mode

Page 20 - Style controls: Drum/Fill

E(nsemble)

Harmonization type.

Duet Adds a single note to the melody.

Close Adds a closed-position chord to the melody.

Open 1 Adds an open-position chord to the melody.

Open 2 As the above, but with a different algorhythm.

Block Block harmonization – very typical of jazz

music.

Power Ensemble

Adds a ﬁfth and an octave to the melody, as

heard in hard rock.

Fourths LO Typical of jazz, this option adds a perfect

fourth and a minor seventh under the melody.

Fourths UP As the above, but with notes added over the

melody.

Fifths This adds a series of Fifths below the original

note.

Octave Adds one or more octaves to the melody.

Dual This option adds to the melody line a second

note, at a ﬁxed interval set with the “Note”

parameter. When selecting this option, a trans-

position value appears (-24…+24 semitones to

the original note).

Brass Typical Brass section harmonization.

Reed Typical Reed section harmonization.

Trill This option trills the melody note. You can set

the trill speed by using the Tempo parameter

(see below).

Note: You must play at least two notes with this

option!

Repeat The played note is repeated in sync with the

Tempo parameter (see below). When playing a

chord, only the ﬁrst note is repeated.

Echo As the Repeat option, but with the repeated

notes fading away after the time set with the

Feedback parameter (see below).

Dyn(amics)

This parameter sets the velocity difference between the right-

hand melody and the added harmonization notes.

-10…0 Subtracted velocity value.

Tempo

Note: This parameter only appears when the Trill, Repeat or

Echo options are selected.

Note value for the Trill, Repeat or Echo Ensemble options.

This is in sync with the Metronome Tempo.

Feedback

Note: This parameter only appears when the Echo option is

selected.

This parameter sets how many times the original note/chord

is repeated by the Echo option.

PAGE 20 - STYLE CONTROLS: DRUM/FILL

In this page you can select various general parameters for the

Style.

V1-V4 Drum Map

The Drum Mapping lets you select an alternative arrange-

ment of percussive instruments for the selected Drum Kit,

without any additional programming. Just select a Drum

Map, and some percussive instruments will be replaced with

different instruments.

0…7 Drum Map number. Number 0 is the standard

mapping.

Kick D(esignation)

The Kick Designation replaces the original Kick (Bass Drum)

sound with a different Kick of the same Drum Kit.

Off, 1…3 Kick replacing the original one. Off corre-

sponds to the original Kick.

Snare D(esignation)

The Snare Designation replaces the original Snare Drum

sound with a different Snare of the same Drum Kit.

Off, 1…3 Snare replacing the original one. Off corre-

sponds to the original Snare.

Fill1/2

These parameters set a Variation to be automatically selected

at the end of the Fill.

Off The same Variation, playing before selecting a

Fill, will be selected again.

1&2…3&4 The speciﬁed Variations will be alternatively

selected. For example, with the “1&2” option,

Variation 1 and Variation 2 will be alternatively

selected after the end of the Fill.

Up/Down The next higher/lower numbered Variation is

selected, in cycle. After Variation 4, an Up

command will select Variation 1. After Varia-

tion 1, a Down command will select Variation

Inc/Dec The next higher/lower numbered Variation is

selected. When Variation 4 is reached, an Inc

command will select Variation 4 again. When

Variation 1 is reached, a Dec command will

select Variation 1 again.

->1…->4 “Fill to Variation” (->1, ->2, ->3, ->4) auto-

matically selects one of the four available Style

Variations at the end of the ﬁll.

V1 DR.map:5 KickDes:Off

V2 DR.map:5 SnarDes:Off

V3 DrMap:5 Fill1:->1

V4 DrMap:5 Fill2:->3

StyCtl:Drums

Style Play operating mode

Page 21 - Style controls: Wrap Around / Keyboard Range

PAGE 21 - STYLE CONTROLS: WRAP AROUND /

KEYBOARD RANGE

In this page you can program the Wrap Around function and

the Keyboard Range for the Style tracks.

Here is the edit procedure:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons to select a

parameter.

2. Use the F1-F4 buttons to move the cursor between the

parameter and its status or value.

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the parame-

ter’s status or value.

Prog (Program)

This parameter lets you select a different Program, other than

the one recorded into the Style Element (Variations, Fills,

Intros, Endings).

Note: This parameter is automatically set to On each time you

assign a Program to any of the Style tracks, either from the front

panel or via MIDI.

Original Style tracks always use the original Programs.

If you assign a different Program to a Style

track, it may be reset to the original one when

selecting a different Style Element.

On You can assign different Programs to each Style

track, and save them in a Performance or Style

Performance. This becomes the only track’s

Program for all Style Elements.

W (Wrap Around)

The wrap-around point is the highest register limit for the

backing track. The accompaniment patterns will be trans-

posed according to the detected chord. If the chord is too

high, the Style tracks might play in a register that is too high,

and therefore unnatural. If, however, it reaches the wrap-

around point, it will be automatically transposed an octave

lower.

The wrap-around point can be set for each track in semitone

steps up to a maximum of 12 semitones, relative to the chord

root. This value will be the interval between the key speciﬁed

by the Style Element and the wrap-around point.

1…12 Maximum transposition (in semitones) of the

track, referred to the original key of the pat-

tern.

KR (Keyboard Range)

This parameter is an on/off switch for the Key Range param-

eter memorized into the Style.

Or(iginal) The Keyboard Range is used. When a track

goes over the lower or higher limit set by this

(hidden) parameter, it is transposed, to play

into the programmed range.

Off No Keyboard Range used.

PAGE 22 - PADS

This page lets you select a different sound or function for

each of the four PAD buttons.

1-4

Each of the four PAD buttons. See “List of sounds assignable

to the Pads” on page 226 and “List of functions assignable to

the Pads” on page 227.

Note: Function names are preceded by an asterisk (*)

Volume

Volume for each of the four Pad tracks.

Pan

Pan for each of the four Pad tracks.

-64 Fully Left.

00 Centered.

+63 Fully Right.

C Send

Send level to the C Internal FX processor (usually reverb) for

each of the four Pad tracks.

D Send

Send level to the D Internal FX processor (usually modulat-

ing effect) for each of the four Pad tracks.

PAGE 23 - PREFERENCES: LOCK

You can “lock” various functions, to avoid they can be

changed when selecting a different Performance, Style or Sin-

gle Touch Setting.

Hint: When turning the instrument on, Performance 1 is auto-

matically selected. Therefore, if you wish your parameters to

stay unchanged, save your preferred default settings into Perfor-

mance 1 (see “The Write window” on page 42), and turn these

locks on.

Note: These settings are stored in the Global ﬁle. After changing

these settings, press WRITE to save them into the Global. The

Write Global window will appear (see “The Write window” on

page 125).

Pads

Sounds or functions assigned to the Pads.

Prog:Orig W:7 KR:Or

W:12 KR:Or

W:12 KR:Or W:12 KR:Or

StyCtl:Wrap/Rng

1:Crash Volume:127

2:Ride Pan:+00

3:China C Send:100

4:*StyleUp D Send:100

Pads

M.Trnsp:On

Pads :Off

Scale :On

AutoOct:On

Pref:Lock (Gbl)

50 Style Play operating mode

Page 24 - Preferences: controls

Scale

When this lock function is On, the Scale parameter does not

change when selecting a different Performance, Style or Sin-

gle Touch Setting.

Auto Octave

This lock lets the instrument automatically transpose the

Upper tracks when switching between the FULL UPPER and

the SPLIT Keyboard modes.

On When switching to the FULL UPPER or SPLIT

Keyboard Mode, the Upper tracks transposi-

tion is left unchanged.

Off When switching to the FULL UPPER Key-

board Mode, the Upper tracks Octave Trans-

pose is automatically set to “0”.

When switching to the SPLIT Keyboard Mode,

the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automat-

ically set to “-1”.

M.Trnsp (Master Transpose)

The Master Transpose value is memorized into the Perfor-

mance or Style Performance. To prevent the Master Trans-

pose to be automatically changed when selecting a Style or

Performance, this lock should be set to On.

On (Default) The lock is engaged. When selecting

a Style or Performance, the Master Transpose

will not change.

Off The lock is turned off. When selecting a Style

or Performance, the Master Transpose value

may change, according to the data memorized

into the Performance or Style Performance.

PAGE 24 - PREFERENCES: CONTROLS

In this page you can set various general parameters for the

Style.

Note: These settings are stored in the Global ﬁle. After changing

these settings, press WRITE to save them into the Global. The

Write Global window will appear (see “The Write window” on

page 125).

Chord Recognition Mode

This parameter sets how chords are recognized by the auto-

accompaniment engine. Please note that when in Full or

Upper Chord Scanning mode, the Fingered 3 mode is always

selected, and you must always play at least three notes, to let a

chord be recognized.

Fingered 1 Play one or more notes, according to the

selected Chord Scanning Mode. A full Major

chord will be recognized even if only a single

note is played.

Fingered 2 You must always play three or more notes for a

full chord to be recognized. If you play just one

note, a unison will be played. If you play a sus-

pended 5th, a suspended chord will be played.

The full chord will be recognized when you

play three or more notes.

Fingered 3 You must always play three or more notes for a

chord to be recognized.

One Finger You can also compose a chord using a simpli-

ﬁed chord playing technique:

• If you play only one note, a Major chord is

recognized.

• Play the root note, plus a white key on the

left, for a 7th. Ex.: C3 + B2.

• Play the root note, plus a black key on the left,

for a Minor chord. Ex.: C3 + Bb2.

• Play the root note, plus a white and a black

key on the left, for a Minor 7th. Ex.: C3 + B2 +

Bb2.

ChrdRecMode:One Finger

Scale Mode:RT Tracks

Memory Mode:Chord

Velocity Ctl:Start/Stop

Pref:Ctl (Gbl)

Style Play operating mode

Page 24 - Preferences: controls

Scale Mode

This parameter determines which tracks will use the selected

alternative scale (see “Scale” on page 44).

Realtime tracks

The scale will only affect the Realtime (Key-

board) tracks.

Upper tracks

The scale will only affect the Upper 1-3 Real-

time (Keyboard) tracks.

All Tracks The scale will affect all tracks (Realtime, Style,

Pads).

Memory Mode

This parameter sets the way the MEMORY button works.

Chord When its LED is on, the MEMORY button

keeps the recognized chord in memory. When

its LED is off, the chord is reset when raising

the hand from the keyboard.

Chord + Lower

When its LED is on, the MEMORY button

keeps the recognized chord in memory, and

keeps the Lower track held until the next note

or chord is played. When its LED is off, the

chord is reset when raising the hand from the

keyboard, and the Lower track is not sustained.

Lower When its LED is on, the MEMORY button

keeps the Lower track held until the next note

or chord is played. When off, the Lower track is

not sustained when raising the hand from the

keyboard. The chord is always kept in memory.

Velocity Control

Set this parameter to trigger a Fill or a Break simply by play-

ing louder with your left hand. When playing on the Lower

track with a velocity higher than 95, the selected Style Ele-

ment will start. For this function to work, the SPLIT Key-

board Mode and LOWER Chord Scanning Mode must be

selected.

Off The function is turned off.

Break, Fill 1, Fill 2

When playing with a velocity higher than 95

on the Lower track, the selected element is

automatically triggered.

Start/Stop You can start or stop the Style by playing

harder on the keyboard.

52 Style Record mode

The Style’s structure

10. STYLE RECORD MODE

By entering the Style Record mode, you can create your own

Styles, or edit an existing Style.

THE STYLE’S STRUCTURE

The term “Style” relates with music sequences automatically

played by the arranger of the Pa50SD. A Style consists of a

predeﬁned number of Style Elements (E) (Pa50SD features

ten different Style Elements: Variation 1-4, Intro 1-2, Fill 1-2,

Ending 1-2). When playing, these Style Elements can be

selected directly from the control panel, using the corre-

sponding buttons.

To explain the Style structure, we can use a tree-structure, as

shown in the following diagram:

Each Style Element is made up of smaller units, called Chord

Variations (CV), but not all of them have the same number

of CVs. Variations 1-4 have up to 6 CVs each, while the other

Style Elements have only up to 2 CVs.

When you play on the chord recognition area (Lower, Upper

or Full, depending on the Chord Scanning section on the

control panel), the arranger scans the keyboard and deter-

mines which chord you are playing. Then, depending on the

selected Style Element, it determines which Chord Variation

(CV) should be played for the scanned chord. Which Chord

Variation corresponds to each scanned chord is a setting of

the Style: the Chord Variation Table. Each Style Element

contains a Chord Variation Table, whose prototype is the fol-

lowing:

After deciding what CV to play, the arranger triggers the right

sequence for each track. Since each sequence is written in a

particular key (for example, CMajor, GMajor or Emin), the

arranger transposes it according to the scanned chord. Notes

in the sequence are carefully transposed according to the

Note Transposition Tables (NTT), to make them work ﬁne

with all recognized chords. The NTT allows you to record

just some Chord Variations, and have all the notes play in the

right place, avoiding dissonances and transposing the pattern

notes to the notes of the recognized chord.

Going deeper into the Style structure, we can see that each

Chord Variation is made up of Track Sequences, and the

Pa50SD supports 8 different tracks. DRUM and PERC are

used for drum and percussion sequences, BASS for bass and

Pop Ballad

Variation 1

CV1

Drum

Perc

Bass

Acc1

Acc2

Acc3

Acc4

Acc5

CV2

CV3

CV4

CV5

CV6

Variation 2

Variation 3

Variation 4

Intro1

CV1

CV2

Intro 2

Fill 1

Fill 2

Ending 1

Ending 2

Chord Chord Variations (CVs)

Variation 1-4 Intro 1-2, Fill 1-2, Ending 1-2

Maj

CV1 – CV6 CV1 – CV2

M7b5

Sus4

Sus2

M7sus4

min

m7b5

mM7

7b5

7sus4

dim

dimM7

aug

aug7

augM7

no 3rd

no 3rd, no 5th

Style Record mode

Style Import/Export

ACC1-5 are for accompaniment sequences (string, guitar,

piano or other accompaniment instruments).

Just to summarize, when you play a chord on the chord rec-

ognition area, the arranger determines which Style Element

is used, then determines which Chord Variation should be

used for the played chord, then Style sequences for every

track of that Chord Variation are transposed from the origi-

nal chord to the recognized chord using the NTT, and so on

every time you play a chord.

Note: The Break and the Count In are not Style Elements, and

cannot be programmed by the user. While in record/edit, the

BREAK/COUNT IN button does not work.

What to record

Recording a Style is a matter of recording tracks, inside a

series of Chord Variations, inside a series of Style Elements,

inside the Style itself.

You don’t need to record all Chord Variations for all Style

Elements. It is often only necessary to record just a Chord

Variation for each Style Element. Exceptions are the Intro 1

and Ending 1, where we suggest to record both a Major and

minor Chord Variations.

STYLE IMPORT/EXPORT

You can use Korg’s Style To Midi application to exchange

Styles between your computer and the Pa50SD, through the

Standard MIDI File (SMF) format. The application is freely

downloadable from www.korgpa.com. Please read the

included instructions.

ENTERING THE RECORD MODE

While in the Style Play operating mode, press RECORD. The

following page will appear in the display:

• Select Current Style to edit the current Style. If it is a

Factory Style, you will not be able to save it on the origi-

nal location; you will select a User Style instead.

When editing an existing Style, the original Style Perfor-

mance is recalled, but the following parameters are reset

to their default values: Drum Mapping (0), Snare & Kick

Designation (Off), Program (Original), Keyboard

Range (Original). This means that you can hear some

differences between the Style in play and the same Style

being edited; for example, resetting the Drum Mapping

may lead to some instrument’s replacement.

After editing the Style, please save it (see “Exit and Save/

Abort Style” below). Then, edit the Style Performance to

adjust the track’s settings (Tempo, Volume, Pan, FX

Send… see page 43 and following in the “Style Play

operating mode” chapter) and save it by pressing the

WRITE button.

• Select New Style to start from a new, empty Style. A

default Style Performance will be recalled. When ﬁn-

ished recording, you will save the new Style onto a User

Style location.

After recording the Style, please save it (see “Exit and

Save/Abort Style” below). Then, edit the Style Perfor-

mance to adjust the track’s settings (Tempo, Volume,

Pan, FX Send… see page 43 and following in the “Style

Play operating mode” chapter) and save it by pressing

the WRITE button.

Note: After a record or edit operation, the Style is rewritten

in memory. When you press START/STOP there is a delay

before you can actually listen to the Style. This delay is

higher with a Style containing more MIDI events.

Note: While in Record mode, all footswitches are disabled.

LISTENING TO THE STYLE WHILE IN RECORD/

EDIT MODE

While you are in Record/Edit mode, you can listen to the

selected Chord Variation or to the whole Style, depending

on the page you are in.

To select a Chord Variation, go to the Main page of the

Record/Edit mode (see “E (Style Element)” and “CV

(Chord Variation)” on page 55).

• When you are in the Quantize, Transpose, Velocity, or

Delete pages, you can listen to the selected Chord Vari-

ation. Press START/STOP to check how it works. Press

START/STOP again to stop the playback.

• When you are in the Delete All, Copy, Style Element

Controls or Style Control pages, you can listen to the

whole Style. Press START/STOP and play some chords

to do your tests. Select any Style Element using the

control panel buttons (VARIATION 1-4, INTRO 1-2,

FILL 1-2, ENDING 1-2). Press START/STOP again to

stop the playback.

Note: When doing the above tests, the Fingered 3 Chord

Scanning mode is automatically selected.

EXIT AND SAVE/ABORT STYLE

When ﬁnished editing, you can save your Style in memory, or

abort any change. Press WRITE or RECORD to go to the

Write page (see “The Write window” on page 54).

Note: When saving the Style in memory, Pa50SD automatically

compresses it to reduce its size and save memory.

Hint: Save often while recording, to avoid accidentally losing

your Style.

Current Style

New Style

Record

54 Style Record mode

The Write window

THE WRITE WINDOW

This page appears when you press the WRITE or RECORD

button while in Record mode. Here you can save the recorded

or edited Style in memory.

• To save the Style to the internal memory, press the A or

B VOLUME/VALUE buttons, then press ENTER. The

“Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

• To return to the previous Style Record page, leaving all

untouched and the Style unsaved, press EXIT.

• To delete all changes to the Style, press one of the D

VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the Abort com-

mand. The “Are you sure message?” will appear. Press

ENTER to conﬁrm deletion, or EXIT to return to the

Write page.

Style name

Use this parameter to change the Style’s name. Press the right

A VOLUME/VALUE button to enter editing, and modify the

name using the UP/DOWN buttons to move the cursor, and

the DIAL to select a character. Press INSERT to insert a char-

acter at the cursor position, or DELETE to delete it

To ( Style number)

Use the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls, to select a different User Style location in memory.

Note: Only User locations are available.

Abort

Select this command to delete any change to the Style.

LIST OF RECORDED EVENTS

The Style Record mode ﬁlters out some events that may dam-

age the right operation of the Style. Here are the recorded

events, and the most important ﬁltered-out events.

(*) A Note Off will always be inserted at the end of the

Chord Variation.

Note: Some Control Change messages cannot be recorded

directly using Pa50SD integrated controls.

FAST DELETE USING THE CONTROL PANEL

BUTTONS

While in the Main page or the Style Tracks page, you can use

the control panel buttons to delete various elements of the

Style:

DELETE + note

When a track is selected, you can use this key sequence to

delete a single note or a single percussive instrument.

If the Style is playing, this shortcut deletes the instrument

only while the key is kept pressed, leaving all other notes

untouched within the track.

DELETE + Track

While in the Style Tracks page, you can delete a whole track

with a single shortcut. Keep the DELETE button pressed,

then press one of the VOLUME/VALUE buttons correspond-

ing to the track to be deleted. The “Are you sure?” message

appear. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Style name: NewBossa

To: U1-01 Bossa

Abort

Write to

Control function CC# (Control Change Number)

Allowed

Note On

Note Off*

Pitch Bend

Modulation 1 1

Modulation 2 2

Pan 10

Expression 11

CC#12 12

CC#13 13

Damper 64

Filter Resonance 71

Low Pass Filter Cutoff 74

CC#80 80

CC#81 81

CC#82 82

Not allowed

After Touch

Volume 7

All other Control Change messages

Style Record mode

Main page

MAIN PAGE

After pressing the RECORD button, and selected the Style to

record/edit, the Main page of the Style Record mode appears.

Style Play icon

When this icon appears in the display, you are in Style Play or

Style Record mode.

Chord

While in the Main and Style Tracks page, this area shows the

Original Key/Chord (see “Original Key/Chord” on page 56)

for the selected track.

Style name

This is the name of the Style in record/edit.

Measure counter

This counter shows the measure in record. The measure

range is speciﬁed by the “RecLen” parameter (see “RL

(Recording Length)” on page 55).

Track in record/edit

Most editing in this edit mode are executed on a single track.

While in the main page, the currently selected track is shown

on the upper right area of the display. The abbreviations are:

DR (Drums), PC (Percussion), BS (Bass), A1…A5 (Accom-

paniment 1…5).

To select the track to edit, press TRACK SELECT to jump to

the Style Tacks page (see “Style Tracks page” on page 56) and

use the VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select it.

E (Style Element)

Use the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the line, and

the F1 button to select this parameter.

This parameter lets you select the Style Element to put in

edit. Each Style Element corresponds to one of the buttons

on the control panel carrying the same name.

Note: When this parameter and the assigned value is in small

letters (e:v1), the Style Element is empty; when it is in capitals

(E:V1), it is already recorded

V1…V4 Variation 1 to Variation 4

I1…I2 Intro 1 to Intro 2

F1…F2 Fill 1 to Fill 2

E1…E2 Ending 1 to Ending 2

CV (Chord Variation)

Use the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the line, and

the F2 button to select this parameter. This parameter lets

you select the Chord Variation to edit, after selecting the Style

Element this Chord Variation pertains to.

Note: When this parameter and the assigned value is in small

letters (cv:cv1), the Chord Variation is empty; when it is in cap-

itals (CV:CV1), it is already recorded

SE:V1…V4 You can select one of 6 Chord Variations to

edit.

SE:I1…E4 You can select one of 2 Chord Variations to

edit.

R (Recording Mode)

This parameters lets you select between the Realtime and the

Step recording modes. Use one of the E VOLUME/VALUE

buttons and the F3 function key to select this parameter.

Change its status using the E VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or

the TEMPO/VALUE controls.

RT Realtime. This methods allows you to record in

realtime each pattern of the Style.

Stp Step Record. This method allows you to enter

the events one at a time. See “Style Record pro-

cedure” below for more information.

RL (Recording Length)

This parameter sets the recording length (in measures) of the

selected track. Its value is always equal to, or a divider of, the

Chord Variation Length (see next parameter).

This is not the total length of the Chord Variation, but just of

the current track. For example, you may have a Chord Varia-

tion eight measures long, with a drum pattern repeating each

two measures. If so, set the CV Len parameter to “8”, and the

RecLen parameter to “2” before starting recording the Drum

track. When saving the Style, or executing any edit operation

on the Style, the 2-measures pattern will be extended to the

full 8-measures length of the Chord Variation.

Warning: If you assign CVLen a value lower than RecLen,

the value of RecLen is not immediately updated in the dis-

play. Therefore, you are still free of changing the value of

CVLen, before the measures exceeding its value are deleted

(see warning in “CVLen (Chord Variation Length)” below).

However, if you press START/STOP to begin recording, the

real RecLen value is changed to the new one, even if the dis-

play still shows the old value.

For example, you may have CVLen = 4 and RecLen = 4. If

you set CVLen to 2, and press START/STOP to begin record-

ing, RecLen is still shown as 4, but it is in reality set to 2, and

recording will cycle for just 2 measures. After you press

START/STOP to stop recording, RecLen is updated to 2, and

all measures after the second measure are deleted.

CVLen (Chord Variation Length)

This parameter sets the total length (in measures) for the

selected Chord Variation. When playing a Style, this will be

the length of the accompaniment pattern to be cycled, when

the chord corresponding to the Chord Variation is recognized

on the keyboard.

Warning: If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after

recording, any measure after the selected length will be

deleted. Be very careful when setting the CVLen to a lower

value after recording!

Metro (Metronome)

This is the metronome heard during recording.

Off No metronome click will be heard during

recording. A one-bar precount will be played

before starting recording.

e:v1 cv:cv1 R:RT RL:2

CV Len:16 Metro:On1

Resol: Meter:4/4

C maj7 NTT:5th

NewBossa |T:DR

Style Play icon Measure counter

Track in record/edit

Style name

Chord

56 Style Record mode

Style Tracks page

On1 Metronome on, with a one-bar precount

before starting recording.

On2 Metronome on, with a two-bar precount

before starting recording.

Resol (Resolution)

This parameter sets the quantization during recording.

 (1/32)… (1/8)

Grid resolution, in musical values. For exam-

ple, when you select 1/16, all notes are moved

to the nearest 1/16 division. When you select 1/

8, all notes are moved to the nearest 1/8 divi-

sion.

Meter

This is the meter (time signature) of the Style. You can edit

this parameter only when the Style is empty, i.e. before you

begin recording anything.

Original Key/Chord

This is the track’s original key and chord. Use the D VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons to select the line, and the F1 and F2

buttons to switch from the key/chord name and the key/

chord type (Maj, min…).

When in Style Play mode, this chord will be played back

exactly as it was recorded, without any NTT processing (see

below). To record just one Chord Variation for a Style Ele-

ment, the suggested original key/chord is “maj7”. Be very

careful to play the 7th+ note (i.e., with a “Cmaj7th” key/

chord, the B), to avoid the lack of notes, or a bad NTT con-

version when playing different chords.

Note: To conform to Korg speciﬁcations, it is advisable to record

both the “Major” and “minor” Chord Variations for the Intro 1

and Ending 1 Style Elements.

When you select a track, the original key/chord assigned to

the selected track will be activated. All recorded tracks will

play back on that key/chord. For example, if the original key/

chord for the Acc1 track is A7th, when selecting the Acc1

tracks all the remaining tracks will play according to the A7th

key/chord.

In the above example, you will record the Acc1 track in the

AMajor key, with notes that will comply with the A7th chord.

This is the pattern that will be recalled exactly as it was

recorded, when playing an A7th chord.

Copying the Key/Chord value to all other tracks of the same

Chord Variation. While in this page, you can keep the SHIFT

button pressed, while pressing one of the [D] VOLUME/

VALUE buttons, to copy the Key of the currently selected

track to all other tracks of the same Chord Variation. This

function is useful to speed-up pattern programming, and to

avoid having different tracks in different keys within the same

Chord Variation.

NTT

The Note Transposition Table (NTT) determines how the

arranger will transpose pattern notes, when playing a chord

that does not exactly match to the original chord of a Chord

Variation. For example, if you only recorded a Chord Varia-

tion for the CMaj chord, when a CMaj7 is recognized on the

keyboard the arranger must transpose some notes to create

the missing 7th.

Note: To conform to Korg speciﬁcations, it is advisable to set the

NTT to “No Transpose” on the Intro 1 and Ending 1.

Root The root note (in CMaj = C) is transposed to

the missing notes.

5th The 5th note (in CMaj = G) is transposed to

the missing notes.

i-Series All original patterns must be programmed on

the “Maj7” or “min7” chords. When loading

old Korg i-Series instruments, this option is

automatically selected.

No Transp No transposition applied. The pattern will

always play as recorded. This is the standard

setting of Intro 1 and Ending 1 in Korg’s origi-

nal Styles.

STYLE TRACKS PAGE

While in the main Style Record page, press TRACK SELECT

to jump to this page. Here you can see and select any Style

track.

Program name

Select a track using the VOLUME/VALUE buttons. Select a

Program using the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section.

While in this page, you can set the track’s volume using the

VOLUME/VALUE buttons. Since the track’s volume is mem-

orized in the Style Performance and not in the pattern, this

setting will not be recorded and saved. However, this will

No quanti-

zation

1/16

1/8

As recorded with

NTT = Root or 5th

(Key/Chord = CMaj)

When you play a CM7

with NTT = Root

When you play a CM7

with NTT = 5th

As recorded with

NTT = i-Series

(Key/Chord = CM7)

When you play a CMaj

with NTT = i-Series

When you play a CM7

with NTT = i-Series

Brush 2 Piano01

Perc Kit Guitar01

*AcouBass StrngEns2

AcouPiano2 VoxPad1

NewBossa |V1-CV1

Style in record/edit

Style Element-Chord Variation

in record/edit

Style tracks

Style Record mode

Step Record page

allow you to play back louder any reference track, or the track

you are recording.

Track status

When in the Style Tracks page, each track can be in one of

three status.

Play (Visible status icon). This status is available

only for non-selected tracks. When in play, a

track can play back the recorded pattern.

Mute (Hidden status icon). When in this status, you

can play the track on the keyboard, but you

can’t record on it. This is useful to do some

preliminary test, before actually start record-

ing.

To set a track in mute, ﬁrst select it, then press

both corresponding VOLUME/VALUE buttons

to hide the status icon. To set the track in

record again, press again the corresponding

VOLUME/VALUE buttons.

Record (Flashing status icon). When in this status, the

track is ready to record. Just select a track to set

it in record status.

STEP RECORD PAGE

Access this page from the Main page of the Style Record

mode, by selecting the “Stp” recording mode (“R” parame-

ter), and pressing START/STOP.

(a) section

Previously inserted event. You may delete this event, and set it

in edit again, by pressing the < button.

(b) section

Event to be inserted. See the following parameters for infor-

mation on each element of this section.

M (Measure)

This is the position of the event (note, rest or chord) to be

inserted.

Meter

Meter of the current measure. This parameter can’t be edited.

You can set the Meter in the Main page of the Style Record

mode, before actually starting recording (see step 6 on

page 58 for more information).

key?

This is a prompt, asking for a note or chord to be played on

the keyboard, to enter an event on the current step.

Step value

Length of the event to be inserted. Use the NOTE VALUE

buttons, on the lower left area of the control panel, to change

this value.

 … Note value.

Dot (.) Augments the selected note by one half of its

value.

Triplet (3) Makes the selected note a triplet note.

V (Velocity)

Set this parameter before entering a note or chord. This will

be the playing strength (i.e., velocity value) of the event to be

inserted.

KBD Keyboard. You can select this parameter, by

turning all counter-clockwise the dial. When

this option is selected, the playing strength of

the played note is recognized and recorded.

1…127 Velocity value. The event will be inserted with

this velocity value, and the actual playing

strength of the note played on the keyboard

will be ignored.

D (Duration)

Relative duration of the inserted note. The percentage is

always referred to the step value.

50% Staccato.

85% Ordinary articulation.

100% Legato.

Buttons used in Step Record mode

TIE button

Ties the note to be inserted to the previous note.

REST button

Inserts a rest.

NOTE VALUE buttons

Select the step value.

START/STOP button

Exits the Step Record mode.

< (Previous step)

Goes to the previous step, deleting the inserted step.

>> (Fast Forward)

Goes to the next measure, and ﬁll the remaining space with

rests.

M001.01.000

C4 V:64 D:85%

M001.01.192 Meter: 4/4

key? V:64 D:85%

Step V1-CV1 T:DR

(a)

(b)

Previous event Event to be inserted

Current position

Waiting for a keystroke…

Step value

58 Style Record mode

Style Record procedure

STYLE RECORD PROCEDURE

There are two different methods for recording a Style: Real-

time and Step.

• Realtime Recording allows you to record Style patterns

in realtime.

• Step Recording allows you to create a new Style by enter-

ing the single notes or chords in each track. This is very

useful when transcribing an existing score, or needing a

higher grade of detail, and is particularly suitable to cre-

ate drum and percussion tracks.

Preparing to record

1. If you like to edit an existing Style, select that Style.

2. Press RECORD to enter the Style Record mode. You are

prompted to select either the Current Style, or a New

Style.

Select “Current Style” if you want to edit the current

Style, or make a new Style starting from an existing one.

Select “New Style” if you want to start from scratch with

an empty Style.

3. After you select your preferred option, the Main page of

the Style Record mode will appear.

4. Use the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons, and the F1 and F2

function keys to select the E (Style Element) and CV

(Chord Variation) parameter.

Note: For more information on the Style Elements and

Chord Variations, and the Style structure in general, see

“The Style’s structure” on page 52.

5. Use the RL (Recording Length) parameter to set the

length (in measures) of the pattern to step-record. Select

this parameter using the E VOLUME/VALUE buttons

and the F4 function key. Use the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols to set the value.

6. Use the Meter parameter to set the Style’s meter. You can

edit this parameter only if you selected the New Style

option when entering the Record mode.

7. Set the tempo. Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and use

the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the tempo.

8. At this point, if you want to do a Realtime Recording go

on reading “Realtime Record procedure” below. Other-

wise, if you prefer to do a Step Record, jump to “Step

Record procedure” on page 59.

Realtime Record procedure

1. When still in the Main page of the Style Record mode,

press one of the E VOLUME/VALUE buttons, to select

the “R” parameter. Use these buttons, or the TEMPO/

VALUE controls, to select the “RT” (Realtime) recording

mode.

2. Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks page.

Here you can assign the right Program to each Style

track. (For more details, see “Style Tracks page” on

page 56).

3. If you like, you can set the tempo again from this page:

just use the TEMPO/VALUE controls.

4. Assign a Program to each track, by using the PRO-

GRAM/PERFORMANCE section.

5. If needed, set the Octave Transpose for each track. Note:

The Octave Transpose will affect only the notes coming

from the keyboard, and not from the arranger.

6. Select the track to put in record. Its status icon will

begin ﬂashing.

Note: When entering the Record mode, the last selected

track is already in record. When you press START/

STOP after entering the Record mode, you can immedi-

ately start recording.

If you like, you can try your part before recording:

• Set the track in mute, by pressing both corresponding

VOLUME/VALUE buttons; the status icon disappears.

• Press START/STOP to play back the other tracks, if

already recorded, and practice on the keyboard.

• When you have ﬁnished practicing, press START/

STOP to stop the arranger, and unmute the track by

pressing both VOLUME/VALUE buttons; the track will

be in record again.

7. While the status icon is ﬂashing, press START/STOP to

begin recording. Depending on the “Metro” (metro-

nome) option you selected, a 1- or 2-bars precount may

play before the recording actually begins. When it

begins, play freely. The pattern will last for some mea-

sures, according to the RecLen value, then restart.

Since the recording will happen in overdub, you can add

notes on any following passage. This is very useful to

record different percussive instruments at any cycle on a

Drum or Percussion track.

Note: While recording, the track’s Keyboard Range (see

page 68) is ignored, and the track can play over the whole

keyboard range. The Local parameter (see “Local” on

Current Style

New Style

Record

e:v1 cv:cv1 R:RT RL:2

CV Len:16 Metro:On1

Resol: Meter:4/4

C maj7 NTT:5th

NewBossa |T:DR

R:RT

Brush 2 Piano01

Perc Kit Guitar01

*AcouBass StrngEns2

AcouPiano2 VoxPad1

NewBossa |V1-CV1

Style Record mode

Style Record procedure

page 127) is also automatically set to On, to allow playing

on the keyboard.

8. When ﬁnished recording, press START/STOP to stop

the arranger. Select a different track, and go on record-

ing the whole Chord Variation.

Note: You can select a different track only when the

arranger is not running.

9. When ﬁnished recording the Chord Variation, select a

different Chord Variation or Style Element to go on

recording the whole Style.

10. When ﬁnished recording the new Style, press WRITE or

RECORD to save it in memory. The Write page will

appear:

• To change the Style’s name: press the right A VOL-

UME/VALUE button to enter editing, and modify the

name using the UP/DOWN buttons to move the cursor,

and the DIAL to select a character. Press INSERT to

insert a character at the cursor position, or DELETE to

delete it.

• To select a different location in memory, press one of

the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons, then select a location

with these buttons or the TEMPO/VALUE controls.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or one of the D (Abort) VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons to abort the save. The “Are you

sure?” message will appear in the display. Press ENTER

to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort. After pressing ENTER, you

will exit from the Record mode.

If you press EXIT while in the Write page, you will go

back to the previous Style Record page, without any

change.

Step Record procedure

1. When still in the Main page of the Style Record mode,

press one of the E VOLUME/VALUE buttons, to select

the “R” parameter. Use these buttons, or the TEMPO/

VALUE controls, to select the “Stp” recording mode.

2. Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks page.

Here you can assign the right Program to each Style

track. (For more details, see “Style Tracks page” on

page 56).

3. Assign a Program to each track, by using the PRO-

GRAM/PERFORMANCE section.

4. Press START/STOP to turn on its LED and enter the

Step Record page. (See “Step Record page” on page 57

for more information on each parameter of this page).

The ﬁrst two lines (a) are the latest inserted event. The

last two lines (b) are the event currently in edit, ready to

be inserted.

The “Empty” event marks the beginning of the pattern,

when there are no events inserted. It is automatically

inserted when entering the Record mode. It will be

removed when an event is inserted.

5. The “Maaa.bb.ccc” parameter in (b) is the current posi-

tion. This is the place where the note in edit will be

inserted.

• If you don’t want to insert a note at this position,

insert a rest instead, as shown in step 7.

• To jump to the next measure, ﬁlling the remaining

beats with rests, press the >> button.

6. To change the step value, use the NOTE VALUE buttons,

on the lower left area of the control panel.

7. Insert a note, rest or chord at the current position.

• To insert a single note, just play it on the keyboard. The

inserted note length will match the step length. You may

change the velocity and relative duration of the note, by

editing the V (Velocity) and D (Duration) parameters.

See “V (Velocity)” and “D (Duration)” on page 57.

• To insert a rest, just press the REST button. Its length

will match the step value.

• To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one, press

the TIE button. A note will be inserted, tied to the previ-

ous one, with exactly the same name. You don’t need to

play it on the keyboard again.

• To insert a chord or a second voice, see “Chords and

second voices in Step Record mode” below.

8. After inserting a new event, you may go back by pressing

the < button. This will delete the previously inserted

event, and set the step in edit again.

9. When the end of the pattern is reached, the “End Loop”

(End of Loop) event is shown in the ﬁrst two lines of the

display (a), and the recording restarts from the

“M001.01.000” position. Any note exceeding the pattern

length, inserted at its end, will be reduced to ﬁt the total

length of the pattern.

Style name: NewBossa

To: U1-01 Bossa

Abort

Write to

R:Stp

Brush 2 Piano01

Perc Kit Guitar01

*AcouBass StrngEns2

AcouPiano2 VoxPad1

NewBossa |V1-CV1

M---.--.--- Empty

M001.01.000 Meter: 4/4

key? V:64 D:85%

Step V1-CV1 T:DR

(a)

(b)

Previous event Event to be inserted

Current position

Waiting for a keystroke…

Step value

60 Style Record mode

Style Record procedure

At this point, you may go on, inserting new events in

overdub mode (the previously inserted events will not

be deleted). This is very useful when recording a drum

or percussion track, where you may want to record the

bass drum on a ﬁrst cycle, the snare drum on the second

cycle, and the hi-hat and cymbals during the following

cycles.

10. When ﬁnished recording, press START/STOP to turn off

its LED. The Main page of the Style Record mode

appears.

When exiting, the “RT” recording mode is automati-

cally selected. You may press START/STOP to listen to

the Style. Press START/STOP again to stop the playback.

To enter the Step Record mode again, select the “Stp”

recording mode, and press START/STOP.

11.From the Main page of the Style Record mode, press

RECORD to exit the Record mode. You will be

prompted to assign a new name to the Style, and select a

memory location where to save it. See “The Write win-

dow” on page 54 for information on how to save a Style.

Chords and second voices in Step Record

mode

With Pa50SD, you are not obliged to insert single notes in a

track. There are several ways to insert chords and double

voices. Lets look at some.

Inserting a chord. When the “key?” prompt appears in the

display, play a chord instead of a single note. The event’s

name will be the ﬁrst note of the chord you pressed, followed

by the “…” marking.

Inserting a chord with notes with different velocity values.

You can make the upper or lower note of a chord, for exam-

ple, louder than the remaining ones, to make the most

important note emerge from the chord. Here is how to insert

a three-note chord:

1. Edit the Velocity value of the ﬁrst note.

2. Press the ﬁrst note and keep it pressed.

3. Edit the Velocity value of the second note.

4. Press the second note and keep it pressed.

5. Edit the Velocity value of the third note.

4. Press the third note, then release all notes.

Inserting a second voice. You can insert passages where one

note is kept pressed, and another voice moves freely.

Ex. 1:

Ex.2:

Ex.3:

E:V1 CV:CV1 R:RT RL:2

CV Len:16 Metro:On1

Resol: Meter:4/4

C maj7 NTT:5th

NewBossa |T:DR

C4 , V:64 D:85%



Step Time =



Step Time =

Press E and C

Press G









Off

Release G and C

Release E (continue holding C)



Step Time = 

Step Time =

Press C

Press G (continue holding C)







Off

Release G and C

Tie



Step Time = 

Step Time =

Press F and C Press G

(continue holding C)



OffOn On

Release F

(continue holding C)



Step Time = 

Step Time =

Press E

(continue holding C)

OffOn

Release E and C



Step Time = 

Step Time =

Press D

(continue holding C)

Off On

Release G

(continue holding C)



Step Time =

Off

Release D

(continue holding C)

Style Record mode

From any page of the Style Record mode, press MENU to

open the Style Record edit menu. This menu gives access

to the various Style Record edit sections.

Note: While the Style is in play, you cannot access the Edit sec-

tion pages from the Main page and the Style Tracks page (see

page 55 and page 56). Stop the playback before pressing MENU.

When in the menu, select an edit section using the VOL-

UME/VALUE (A-H) buttons, select an edit page using

PAGE +, or press EXIT to exit the menu.

When in an edit page, press EXIT to go back to the main

page (or the Style Tracks page) of the Style Record mode.

Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section.

Each edit section groups various edit pages.

Note: When switching from the Edit section pages (Quantize,

Transpose, Velocity, Delete) to the other pages, or vice-versa, the

Style (if in play) is automatically stopped.

EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE

Select an edit section from the Menu, and/or use the PAGE

buttons to reach the desired page.

Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Record

mode.

All edit pages share the same structure.

Style Play icon

When on, this icon indicates that the instrument is in Style

Play mode.

Page header

The header shows the name of the current edit page. As a

general rule, the header is divided in a ﬁrst word, identifying

the section name (e.g., “Edit:Quantize” is an “Edit” section

page), and a second word, referring to the page name (e.g.

“Quantize”).

Page number

This area shows the current page number.

A-H

Each pair of VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons selects a differ-

ent parameter of command, depending on the edit page.

After selecting a parameter, you can change its value by press-

ing one of the two buttons in a pair, or using the TEMPO/

VALUE controls.

Quantize Copy

Transp/Vel. S.Elem.Ctl.

Event Edit Style Ctl.

Delete

Record MENU

E:V1 CV:CV1 Trk:All

Resol:

S001-01-000 E001-01-192

Bottom:G-1 Top:C8

Edit:Quantize

Style Play icon Page header Page number

Section name Page name

Edit:Quantize

62 Style Record mode

Page 1 - Edit: Quantize

PAGE 1 - EDIT: QUANTIZE

The quantize function may be used to correct any rhythm

error after recording, or to give the pattern a “groovy” feeling.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)

(Non editable) These read-only parameters show which Style

Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for edit-

ing. See the Main page “E (Style Element)” and “CV (Chord

Variation)” parameters on page 55 for information on select-

ing a different Style Element and Chord Variation.

Trk (Track)

Use this parameter to select a track.

All All tracks selected.

Drum…Acc5 Selected track.

Resol (Resolution)

This parameter sets the quantization after recording. For

example, when you select 1/8a, all notes are moved to the

nearest 1/8 division. When you select 1/4, all notes are moved

to the nearest 1/4 division.

 (1/32)… (1/4)

Grid resolution, in musical values. An “a” after

the value means no swing. A “b…f ” after the

value means swing-quantization.

S / E (Start/End)

Use these parameters to set the starting (S) and ending (E)

points of the range to quantize.

If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you want to

select it all, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000, and the

End at 5.01.000.

Bottom / Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range to quantize. If you select the same note as the

Bottom and Top parameters, you can select a single percus-

sive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track.

Note: These parameters are available only when a Drum or

Percussion track is selected.

PAGE 2 - EDIT: TRANSPOSE

In this page you can transpose the selected track(s).

Note: After transposing, please don’t forget to readjust the

“Original Key/Chord” parameter in the Style Record page (see

page 56).

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)

(Non editable) These read-only parameters show which Style

Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for edit-

ing. See the Main page “E (Style Element)” and “CV (Chord

Variation)” parameters on page 55 for information on select-

ing a different Style Element and Chord Variation.

Trk (Track)

Use this parameter to select a track.

All All tracks selected, apart for tracks set in Drum

mode (like the Drum and Percussion tracks).

The whole selected Chord Variation will be

transposed.

Drum…Acc5 Single selected track.

Value

Transpose value (±127 semitones).

S / E (Start/End)

Use these parameters to set the starting (S) and ending (E)

points of the range to be transposed.

If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you want to

select it all, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000, and the

End at 5.01.000.

Bottom / Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range to be transposed. If you select the same note as

the Bottom and Top parameters, you can select a single per-

cussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track. Since in a

Drum Kit each instrument is assigned to a different note of

the scale, transposing a percussive instrument means assign-

ing the part to a different instrument.

Note: These parameters are available only when a Drum or

E:V1 CV:CV1 Trk:All

Resol:

S001-01-000 E001-01-192

Bottom:G-1 Top:C8

Edit:Quantize

No quanti-

zation

1/8

1/4

E:V1 CV:CV1 Trk:DRUM

Value:+000

S001-01-000 E001-01-192

Bottom:G-1 Top:C8

Edit:Transpose

Style Record mode

Page 3 - Edit: Velocity

PAGE 3 - EDIT: VELOCITY

In this page you can change the velocity (dynamics) value of

notes in the selected track.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)

(Non editable) These read-only parameters show which Style

Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for edit-

ing. See the Main page “E (Style Element)” and “CV (Chord

Variation)” parameters on page 55 for information on select-

ing a different Style Element and Chord Variation.

Trk (Track)

Use this parameter to select a track.

All All tracks selected. The velocity for all notes of

the whole selected Chord Variation will be

changed.

Drum…Acc5 Selected track.

Value

Velocity change value (±127).

S / E (Start/End)

Use these parameters to set the starting (S) and ending (E)

points of the range to be modiﬁed.

If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you want to

select it all, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000, and the

End at 5.01.000.

Bottom / Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range to be modiﬁed. If you select the same note as the

Bottom and Top parameters, you can select a single percus-

sive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track.

Note: These parameters are available only when a Drum or

Percussion track is selected.

PAGE 4 - EVENT EDIT

The Event Edit page allows you to edit each event in a single

track. See “Event Edit procedure” on page 64 for more infor-

mation on the event editing procedure.

Trk (Track)

Track in edit. To select a different track, press one of the A

VOLUME/VALUE buttons to open the Go To Track window.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a track, and press

ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)

Selected Style Element and Chord Variation. This parameter

can’t be edited. To select a different Style Element and Chord

Variation, press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Style

Record mode (see “Main page” on page 55).

Position

Position of the event shown in the display, expressed in the

form ‘aaa.bb.ccc’:

• ‘aaa’ is the measure

• ‘bb’ is the beat

• ‘ccc’ is the tick (each quarter beat = 384 ticks)

You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different

position.

Ev (Event)

Type and values of the event shown in the display. Depending

on the selected event, the value may change. This parameter

also shows the (non-editable) “End Loop” marking, when the

end of a track is reached.

To change the event type, use the C VOLUME/VALUE but-

tons to select the Event line, then use the same buttons or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a different event type.

To select and edit the event’s value, use the F3 and F4 func-

tion keys, and use the G/VOLUME/VALUE buttons or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls.

Length

Length of the selected Note event. The value format is the

same as the Position value.

Note: If you change a length of “000.00.000” to a different

value, you can’t go back to the original value. This rather

uncommon zero-length value may be found in some drum or

percussion tracks.

Transport, navigation and editing controls

E/F and H VOLUME/VALUE buttons

These buttons are the “Scroll to previous event” (E/F) and

“Scroll to next event” (H) controls. They corresponds to the

scrolling arrows shown on the screen.

G VOLUME/VALUE buttons

Use these buttons to select the corresponding parameter

value area.

EV1 CV:CV1 Trk:DRUM

Value:+000

S001-01-000 E001-01-192

Bottom:G-1 Top:C8

Edit:Velocity

Trk: DRUM E:V1 CV:CV1

Position: 001.01.000 |

Ev: Note F#2 72

Lenght:000.00.000 |

Event Edit

Event Type First value Second value

Event First value Second value

Note Note name Velocity

Ctrl Control Change number Control Change value

Bend Bending value –

Go to Track: DRUM

Enter=Ok Exit=Cancel

64 Style Record mode

Page 5 - Event Filter

F3 and F4 buttons

After selecting the parameter value area with the G VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons, use these buttons to select, respec-

tively, the ﬁrst and second value of the event in edit.

START/STOP button

Press START/STOP and play some chords on the keyboard to

test the pattern in edit. Press START/STOP again to stop the

pattern running.

SHIFT + << or >>

Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the << or >> but-

ton to open the Go to Measure window.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a measure, then

press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

INSERT

Press the INSERT button to insert a new event at the current

shown Position. The default values are Type = Note, Pitch =

C4, Velocity = 100, Length = 192.

After inserting an event, use the C VOLUME/VALUE buttons

to select the Event line, and the same buttons or the TEMPO/

VALUE controls to select a different event type.

DELETE

Press the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the

display.

PAGE 5 - EVENT FILTER

This page is where you can select the event types to be shown

in the Event Edit page. You can access this page by pressing

the PAGE+ button, while you are in the Event Edit page.

Turn Off the ﬁlter for all event types you wish to see in the

Event Edit page.

Note: Some of the events are “ghosted”, and non editable, since

the corresponding events are not editable in a Style.

Note Notes.

Ctrl Control Change events. Only the following

Control Change numbers are allowed.

Bend Pitch Bend events.

EVENT EDIT PROCEDURE

The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single

MIDI event of the selected Style Element. You can, for exam-

ple, replace a note with a different one, or change its playing

strength (i.e., velocity value). Here is the general event editing

procedure.

1. Select the Style to edit, and press RECORD. Select the

“Current Style” option to enter recording. The LED on

the RECORD button will turn on, and the Main page of

the Style Record mode will appear.

2. Use the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons, and the F1 and F2

function keys to select the E (Style Element) and CV

(Chord Variation) parameters.

Note: For more information on the Style Elements and

Chord Variations, and the Style structure in general, see

“The Style’s structure” on page 52.

3. Press MENU, and use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) but-

tons to select the Event Edit section. The Event Edit page

appears (see “Page 4 - Event Edit” on page 63 for more

information).

4. Press START/STOP to listen to the selected Chord Varia-

tion. If you like, play some chords on the keyboard, to

test the pattern. Press START/STOP to stop it.

5. Press PAGE+ to go to the Event Filter page, and turn

“Off” the ﬁlters for the event types you wish to see in the

Control function CC# (Control Change Number)

Modulation 1 1

Modulation 2 2

Pan 10

Expression(a) 11

CC#12 12

CC#13 13

Go to Measure: 1

Enter=Ok Exit=Cancel

Note: Off Aftt: Off

Prog: Off PAft: Off

Ctrl: Off Bend: Off

T/Meter: Off SysEx: Off

Edit: Ev. Filter

Damper 64

Filter Resonance 71

Low Pass Filter Cutoff 74

CC#80 80

CC#81 81

CC#82 82

(a) Expression events cannot be inserted at the starting Position

(001.01.000). An Expression value is already among the default

“header” parameters of the Style Element.

Control function CC# (Control Change Number)

e:v1 cv:cv1 R:RT RL:2

CV Len:16 Metro:On1

Resol: Meter:4/4

C maj7 NTT:5th

NewBossa |T:DR

Style Element Chord Variation

Trk: DRUM E:V1 CV:CV1

Position: 001.01.000 |

Ev: Ctrl 11 110

Event Edit

Style Record mode

Event Edit procedure

display (see “Page 5 - Event Filter” on page 64 for more

information).

6. Press PAGE- to go back to the Event Edit page.

7. Press the A VOLUME/VALUE button (Trk), to select the

track to edit. The Go To Track window appears.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a track, and

press ENTER to conﬁrm (or EXIT to abort).

8. The list of events contained in the selected track (in the

Style Element and Chord Variation selected on step 2)

will appear in the display. The ﬁrst step, or Measure

Start, is currently shown. Since it contains an initializa-

tion event, it is not editable and appears “in grey” (i.e.,

written with a “ghost” character).

9. Press one of the H VOLUME VALUE buttons (Scroll

Down arrow), to go to the next step. This is usually a

note, that you can edit.

For more information on the event types and their val-

ues, see “Page 4 - Event Edit” on page 63.

10. Use the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the Posi-

tion line. Use these buttons or the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols to change the event’s position.

11.Use the C VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the Event

line. You may use the C VOLUME/VALUE buttons or

the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the event type.

Use the G VOLUME/VALUE buttons, and the F3 and F4

function keys to respectively select the ﬁrst and second

value of the parameter. Use the G VOLUME/VALUE

buttons or the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the

selected value.

12. If a Note event is selected, use the D VOLUME/VALUE

buttons to select the Length line, and use the same but-

tons, or the TEMPO/VALUE controls, to change the

event’s length.

• After having modiﬁed the shown event, you may scroll

to the next event with the H VOLUME/VALUE buttons

(Scroll to next), or to the previous event with the E/F

VOLUME/VALUE buttons (Scroll to previous).

• You may use the SHIFT + << or >> shortcut to go to a

different measure (see “SHIFT + << or >>” on page 64)

• As described in step 4, you may press START/STOP

and play some chords to listen how the pattern sounds

after your changes. Press START/STOP again to stop the

pattern running.

13. Use the INSERT button to insert an event at the Position

shown in the display (a Note event with default values

will be inserted). Use the DELETE button to delete the

event shown in the display.

14. When the editing is complete, you may select a different

track (go to step 7), or a different Style Element and

Chord Variation (press EXIT to go back to the Main

page of the Style Record mode, then go to step 2).

15. When ﬁnished editing the whole Style, press WRITE to

open the Write Style page.

• Use the A or E VOLUME/VALUE buttons to enter the

Text Editing mode. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to

move the cursor, and the dial to select a character.

• Use the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select a target

location. The name of the Style already existing at the

selected location is shown after the Style Bank-Location

number.

Warning: If you select an existing Style and conﬁrm writ-

ing, the older Style is deleted and replaced by the new one.

Save the Styles you don’t want to loose on a card, before

overwriting them.

16. Press ENTER to save the Style to the internal memory,

or one of the D VOLUME/VALUE buttons (Abort) to

delete any changes made in Style Record mode. When

the “Are you sure?” message appears, press ENTER to

conﬁrm, or EXIT to go back to the Write Style page.

Note: Off Aftt: Off

Prog: Off PAft: Off

Ctrl: Off Bend: Off

T/Meter: Off SysEx: Off

Edit: Ev. Filter

Go to Track: DRUM

Enter=Ok Exit=Cancel

Position: 001.01.000

Ev: Ctrl 11 110

Trk: DRUM E:V1 CV:CV1

Position: 001.01.000 |

Ev: Note F#2 72

Lenght:000.00.000 |

Event Edit

Position: 001.01.001

Measure Beat Tick

Ev: Note F#2 72

Event Type First value Second value

Lenght:000.00.000

Measure Beat Tick

Style name: Groove Bld

To: U01-01 Foxtrot 3

Abort

WRITE to:

66 Style Record mode

Page 6 - Edit: Delete

PAGE 6 - EDIT: DELETE

This page is where you can delete single elements or MIDI

events out of the Style.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)

(Non editable) These read-only parameters show which Style

Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for edit-

ing. See the Main page “E (Style Element)” and “CV (Chord

Variation)” parameters on page 55 for information on select-

ing a different Style Element and Chord Variation.

Trk (Track)

Use this parameter to select a track.

All All tracks selected. After deletion, the selected

Chord Variation will remain empty.

Drum…Acc5 Selected track.

Ev (Event)

Type of MIDI event to delete.

All All events. The measures are not removed from

the Chord Variation.

Note All notes in the selected range.

Dup.Note All duplicate notes. When two notes with the

same pitch are encountered on the same tick,

the one with the lowest velocity is deleted.

A.Touch After Touch events.

Note: This kind of data is automatically removed

during recording.

P.Bend Pitch Bend events.

PrChange Program Change events, excluding the bun-

dled Control Change #00 (Bank Select MSB)

and #32 (Bank Select LSB).

Note: This kind of data is automatically removed

during recording.

C.Change All Control Change events, for example Bank

Select, Modulation, Damper, Soft Pedal…

CC00/32…CC127

Single Control Change events. Double Control

Change numbers (like 00/32) are MSB/LSB

bundles.

Note: Some CC data are automatically removed

during recording. See the table on page 54 for

more information on the allowed data.

S / E (Start/End)

Use these parameters to set the starting (S) and ending (E)

points of the range to delete.

If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you want to

select it all, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000, and the

End at 5.01.000.

Bottom / Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range to delete. If you select the same note as the Bot-

tom and Top parameters, you can select a single percussive

instrument in a Drum or Percussion track.

Note: These parameters are available only when the All or Note

option is selected.

PAGE 7 - EDIT: DELETE ALL

This function lets you quickly delete a selected Style Element

or Chord Variation, or the whole Style, resetting it to the

default parameter’s values.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

When in this page, press the corresponding button on the

control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …

ENDING2).

Del (Delete)

Use this parameter to select the whole Style, a single Style

Element, or a single Chord Variation.

All All Style Elements, i.e. the whole Style. When

Del=All and Trk=All, the whole Style is

deleted, and all parameters set to the default

status.

Var1…End2 Single Style Element.

V1-CV1…E2-CV2

Single Chord Variation.

Trk (Track)

All All tracks of the selected Style, Style Element or

Chord Variation.

Drum-Acc5 Single track of the selected Style, Style Element

or Chord Variation.

E:V1 CV:CV1 Trk:All

Ev:Note

S001-01-000 E001-01-192

Bottom:G-1 Top:C8

Edit:Delete

Del:V1-CV1 Trk:All

Edit:Delete All

Style Record mode

Page 8 - Edit: Copy

PAGE 8 - EDIT: COPY

Here you can copy a track, Chord Variation or Style Element

inside the same Style, or from a different one. Furthermore,

you can copy a whole Style.

Warning: The Copy operation deletes all data at the target

location (overwrite).

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Note: If you copy too many events on the same “tick”, the “Too

many events!” message appears, and the copy operation is

aborted.

Note: When you copy over an existing Chord Variation, Pro-

gram Change data is not copied, to leave the original Programs

unchanged for that Chord Variation.

When in this page, press the corresponding button on the

control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …

ENDING2).

From Style

Use the ﬁrst parameter to select the source Style to copy the

track, Chord Variation or Style Element from.

From… to Style Element/Chord Variation

Use these parameters to select the source and target Style Ele-

ments or Chord Variations.

Note: You can’t copy from a Variation to a different Style Ele-

ment (or vice-versa), because of their different structure.

All All Style Elements, i.e. the whole Style. You

can’t change the target, that is automatically set

to All.

Var1…End2 Single Style Element.

V1-CV1…E2-CV2

Single Chord Variation.

From… to Track

Use these parameters to select the source and target track to

copy.

All All tracks of the selected Style, Style Element or

Chord Variation.

Drum-Acc5 Single track of the selected Style, Style Element

or Chord Variation.

Copying on a Chord Variation with a different

length

You can copy a Chord Element on a different Chord Element

with a different length. Just keep in mind the following:

• If the source length is a divider of the target length, the

source Chord Variation will be multiplied to ﬁt the tar-

get Chord Variation. For example, if the source is 4-

measures long, and the target 8-measures, the source

will be copied two times.

• If the source length is not a divider of the target length,

the source Chord Variation will be copied for as many

measures as can ﬁt the target Chord Variation. For

example, if the source is 6-measures long, and the target

8-measures, the source will be copied once, then the ﬁst

2 measures will be copied to ﬁt the remaining 2 mea-

sures.

Note: Avoid copying on a Chord Variation with a different

meter, for example a 4/4 Chord Variation onto a 3/4 one.

PAGE 9 - STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS:

PROGRAMS

In this page you can assign a different Program to each track

of the selected Style Element. Each Style Element can have

different Programs; after saving the new Style, please don’t

forget to set the “Prog” parameter to “Original” (see “Prog

(Program)” on page 49), to let the Style select the Program

bypassing the Style Performance settings.

When in this page, press the corresponding button on the

control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …

ENDING2).

To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element,

keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press the button of the

target Style Element.

Program

Use the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section to assign a

Program to the selected track.

From:S01-01 8BeatMax

From:V1-CV1 To:V1-CV2

FromTrk:DR ToTrk:DR

Edit:Copy

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2

5 6

StandardDK Jazz GT

PercKit 1 Brass

FingerBass Vibes

Ac.Piano VoxPad

SECtl:Program V1

68 Style Record mode

Page 10 - Style Element Controls: Expression

PAGE 10 - STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS:

EXPRESSION

In this page you can modify the Expression (CC#11) value

for each of the Style tracks. This lets you reduce the relative

level of a track in a single Style Element, without reducing the

overall Volume of the Style.

This is a very useful control, when you have different Pro-

grams assigned to the same track in different Style Elements,

and the internal level of these Programs is different.

When in this page, press the corresponding button on the

control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …

ENDING2).

To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element,

keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press the button of the

target Style Element.

Value

Use this parameter to set the Expression value for the corre-

sponding track.

PAGE 11 - STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS:

KEYBOARD RANGE

The Keyboard Range automatically transposes any pattern

note that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch,

compared to the original acoustic instrument, when trans-

posed by the arranger. This will result in a more natural

sound for each accompaniment instrument.

For example, the lower limit for a guitar is E2. If you play a

chord under the E2, the transposed pattern could exceed this

limit, and sound unnatural. A Bottom limit set to E2 for the

guitar track will solve the problem.

Note: The Keyboard Range is ignored while recording. The

selected track can play on the full range of the keyboard.

When in this page, press the corresponding button on the

control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …

ENDING2).

To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element,

keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press the button of the

target Style Element.

Bottom/Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range for the corresponding track.

PAGE 12 - STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS: CHORD

VARIATION TABLE

This is the page where you can assign a Chord Variation to

each recognized chord. When a chord is recognized, the

assigned Chord Variation will be automatically selected by

the arranger to play the accompaniment.

When in this page, press the corresponding button on the

control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …

ENDING2).

E-F (Scroll Up), G-H (Scroll Down)

Use these buttons to scroll the available parameters in the dis-

play.

Chords / Chord Variation

Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to each of

the enlisted chords.

PAGE 13 - STYLE CONTROLS: MODE/TENSION

In this page you can set the Retrigger mode for the Style

tracks, and activate/deactivate the Tension for the Accompa-

niment tracks.

When in this page, press the corresponding button on the

control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …

ENDING2).

M (Mode)

This setting harmonizes the notes of the Bass track or the

Acc1-5 tracks to the new chord when the chord is changed.

Off Each time you play a new chord, the current

notes will be stopped. The track will remain

silent until a new note will be encountered in

the pattern.

Rt (Retrigger) The sound will be stopped, and

new notes matching the recognized chord will

be played back.

Rp (Repitch) New notes matching the recognized

chord will be played back, by repitching notes

already playing. There will be no break in the

Value: 100 Value: 100

SECtl:Express.V1

- - - - - - C-1 G#9

C-1 G#9 C-1 G#9

SECtl:KbdRng V1

Bottom Top

Major: CV1

Minor: CV2

Seventh: CV1

Maj7th: CV2

SECtl:ChTable V1

- - - - - - M:Off T:On

- - - - - - M:Rt T:On

M:Rp M:Rp T:On

M:Rt T:On M:Rp T:Off

StCtl:Mode/Tens

Style Record mode

Page 13 - Style Controls: Mode/Tension

sound. This is very useful on Guitar and Bass

tracks.

T (Tension)

Tension adds notes (a 9th, 11th and/or 13th) that have actu-

ally been played to the accompaniment, even if they haven't

been written in the Style pattern. This parameter speciﬁes

whether or not the Tension included in the recognized chord

will be added to the Acc1-5 tracks.

On The Tension will be added.

Off No Tension will be added.

70 Song Play operating mode

The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format

11. SONG PLAY OPERATING MODE

The Song Play operating mode is where you can listen to

Songs (played directly from the card), and play along with

the Song on the four Realtime (Keyboard) tracks (Upper 1-3,

Lower). Since the Pa50SD is equipped with two onboard

sequencers, you can play two Songs at the same time. This is

very useful to mix between two Songs during a live perfor-

mance.

THE SONGS AND THE STANDARD MIDI FILE

FORMAT

The native Song ﬁle format of the Pa50SD is the Standard

MIDI File (SMF), an universal standard set by all manufac-

turers. You can read these ﬁles with any musical instrument

or computer.

A difference could be in the sound played by each track. If

you recorded a Song with the Pa50SD (Song mode), using

only General MIDI programs, you can play the same Song on

virtually any other musical instrument or computer. If you

used KORG native programs, you cannot reproduce the same

sounds on instruments from other brands.

When you read SMFs in Song Play mode, there is no problem

reading ﬁles made using only General MIDI sounds. Sounds

could be different when playing a Song made on a different

instrument: despite the wide compatibility of Pa50SD with

other, non-standard formats, differences may arise.

If so, go to the Song operating mode and load the SMF. Then,

manually reassign the non-matching Programs, replacing

them with similar Programs on the Pa50SD. Then, save the

SMF again, and you will be able to play it in Song Play mode

with the correct Programs.

TRANSPORT CONTROLS

You can use the separate transport controls for each of the

two onboard sequencers. Use the SEQ1 controls for

Sequencer 1, and SEQ2 controls for Sequencer 2. See

“SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS - SEQ1 and

SEQ2” on page 18 for more information).

MIDI CLOCK

In Song Play mode the MIDI Clock is always generated by the

internal sequencer, even if the Clock parameter is set to

External (see “Clock” on page 127). Pa50SD transmits only

the MIDI Clock message generated by Sequencer 1.

SWITCHING BETWEEN SEQUENCERS DURING

EDITING

When you enter Edit mode, you can edit the selected

sequencer’s parameters. Go to the main page of Song Play

mode, and select the S1 (A buttons) or S2 (B buttons) to

select the sequencer you wish to edit (see “Main page” on

page 72).

SELECTING A SONG COMPOSING ITS

PROGRESSIVE NUMBER

Each Song on a card (up to 9,999) has a progressive number

assigned. You can see this number before the Song’s name in

the Song Select page.

While in the Main, Song Select, or Lyrics page, the STYLE

section doubles as a numeric keypad. You can use it for com-

posing the 4-digit number corresponding to the Song you

wish to select; the folder selected in the Song Select page will

become the current folder. This way, you can speed up the

Song retrieval.

Selecting a Song in the Song Select page

1. Open the Song Select page.

2. Select the card and open the folder containing the Song

to be selected. This folder will be used also in the Main

and Lyrics page.

3. Compose the 4-digit number corresponding to the Song

you wish to select (for example: if the Song is number

“1043”, dial 1, 0, 4, 3).

After the fourth digit has been inserted, the window

automatically disappears, and the Song is selected.

• If the Song number is just 1, 2 or 3-digit long, dial the

number, then press ENTER to conﬁrm (for example: if

the Song is number “52”, dial 5, 2, ENTER).

Note: If no Song corresponds to the dialed number, the

“Song not available” message appears. Press any button to

make it disappear.

Selecting a Song in the Main page

While the S1 or S2 ﬁeld is selected, compose the number

corresponding to the Song you wish to select. The current

folder is the one selected in the Song Select page.

Selecting a Song in the Lyrics page

Compose the number corresponding to the Song you wish

to select. The current folder is the one selected in the Song

Select page.

REALTIME AND SEQUENCER TRACKS

The Pa50SD is equipped with a double sequencer. Each Song

can play a maximum of 16 tracks, for a total of 32 sequencer

tracks.

In addition, you can play on the keyboard with four addi-

tional Realtime tracks (Upper 1-3 and Lower). You can edit

the Volume, Mute status, and Program selection for these

tracks on the main page of the Song Play mode.

When you enter Song Play mode from the Style Play mode,

the Realtime tracks are the same as the Style Play mode. A

0001 MYSONG.MID

Song number:

000-

Song Play operating mode

Master Volume, Sequencer Volume, BALANCE

quick way to select Programs and Effects for the Realtime

tracks is choosing a different Performance.

MASTER VOLUME, SEQUENCER VOLUME,

BALANCE

While the MASTER VOLUME slider controls the general vol-

ume of the instrument, you can use the ACC/SEQ VOLUME

slider to control only the Sequencer’s tracks volume. This lets

you adjust the Sequencer’s volume alone, while the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks are not affected by this slider.

Use the BALANCE slider to mix between Sequencer 1 and

Sequencer 2. Move it to the center for the maximum volume

of both sequencers.

EFFECTS IN SONG PLAY MODE

The Pa50SD is equipped with four effect processors, or DSPs

(Digital Signal Processors). In Song Play mode you can have

two or four effects at the same time, depending on the midi-

ﬁle you are reading.

Note: When playing back a Song that makes use of all four

effects (A-D), you can’t edit any parameter devoted to the

effects. These parameters appear greyed out in the display.

• A Song created on the Pa50SD (in Song or Backing

Sequence mode) can use up to 4 effects (usually 2

reverbs + 2 modulating effects); each track may use the

A/B or C/D pair.

• A Standard MIDI File will only use 2 effects (usually 1

reverb + 1 modulating effect). This lets you use the

remaining 2 effects for the Realtime tracks.

• When using both sequencers at the same time, and the

“S2 FX Mode” is set to “A/B Mode” (see page 80), they

only use the A/B pair, while the C/D pair is reserved to

the Realtime (keyboard tracks).

• When using both sequencers at the same time, and the

“S2 FX Mode” is set to “C/D Mode” (see page 80),

Sequencer 1 uses the A/B pair, while Sequencer 2 uses

the C/D pair, sharing it with the Realtime (keyboard

tracks).

GROOVE QUANTIZE WINDOW

You can apply a realtime “groove-quantization” to Sequencer

1. Groove-quantization is a way of changing the music

groove during the playback, moving notes to the nearest axis

of a rhythmic “grid”. Please feel free to experiment: this func-

tion is a great source of musical invention.

While in Song Play, press G.QUANTIZE. The following win-

dow will appear.

Press EXIT to exit this window.

Enable

Enables/disable the quantize. It is automatically set to Off

each time the instrument is turned on, or when selecting a

different Song.

NStart (Note Start)

Enables/disables the quantization of the Note On event (i.e.

beginning of the note).

NDurat (Note Duration)

Enables/disables the quantization of the Note Off event (i.e.

the length of the note).

Res (Resolution)

Coarse quantize grill resolution. This parameter is the main

quantization value, to be varied with the Acc, Swing and

Window values.

 (1/32)… (1/4)

Grid resolution, in musical values (a “3” after

the value means “triplet”). For example, when

you select 1/8, all notes are moved to the near-

est 1/8 division. When you select 1/4, all notes

are moved to the nearest 1/4 division.

Acc (Accuracy)

Accuracy percentage of quantize. For example, if Acc=50, and

the note is 20 tics away from the coarse grid, it is moved to

the grid of only 10 tics.

0 No accuracy. The quantize is not executed.

100 Maximum accuracy. The note is moved exactly

at the grid position.

Swing

Asymmetry of quantization. Grid axis are moved to the near-

est grid axis.

0 Even-numbered axis are totally moved over the

previous odd-numbered axis.

50 Axis are perfectly equidistant.

100 Even-numbered axis are totally moved over the

following odd-numbered axis.

Window

Area of quantize intervention, bordering the grid axis.

0 The quantize window corresponds to the axis.

No quantization happens.

Enable:On

NStart:On Acc(%):100

NDurat:On Swng(%):100

Res: Wndw(%):100

Groove Quantize

No quanti-

zation

1/8

1/4

Swng=50

Swng=25

Swng=75

72 Song Play operating mode

The Write window

100 The quantize window extends to the nearest

window; all events are quantized.

THE WRITE WINDOW

You can save onto the internal memory a Seq1+Seq2 Setup.

There is a separate Setup for each of the two onboard

sequencers.

This Setup memorizes the Internal FX settings, the Internal/

External status of each track, and the Play/Mute status of

each track. When a new Song is selected, the saved Setup is

automatically recalled, and all parameters are reset.

• Globally setting the Internal FX parameters allows you,

for example, to assign to all Songs a Reverb suitable for

the venue where you are performing, without having to

modify any of the Songs. (This is true only for non-

Pa50SD/80 Songs).

• Globally setting the Internal/External status allows you,

for example, to send the Piano track of all Songs to a

dedicated expander (just set globally the Piano track to

the External mode).

• The Play/Mute status allows you to globally mute tracks

that you don’t want to play during a show, for example

the melody track. (This is ture only for non-Pa50SD/80

Songs).

For more information on the Internal FX settings for the

Song Play mode, see “Page 3 - Mixer: FX send A/B” or “Page

3 - Mixer: FX send C/D”, and following, on page 76.

Here is the procedure to save the Seq1+Seq2 Setup in mem-

ory.

1. Press WRITE. The Write page appears.

2. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

If you conﬁrm, the Setup is saved into the Global. You

may then save this Setup on the card together with the

Global data.

MAIN PAGE

Press SONG PLAY to access this page from another operating

mode.

Note: When switching from Style Play to Song Play, the Song

Setup is automatically selected, and various track parameters

may change.

Press EXIT/NO to access this page from the Menu or any of

the Song Play edit pages.

To see the Song’s tracks, use the TRACK SELECT button to

switch from the main page (showing the Realtime tracks), to

the other tracks. Pressed a ﬁrst time, you will see tracks 1-8

(enlightened TRACK SELECT LED); a second press will

show tracks 9-16 (ﬂashing TRACK SELECT LED); pressed

again, you will go back to the Realtime tracks (TRACK

SELECT LED switched off).

Song Play icon

When on, this icon shows that the instrument is in Song Play

mode.

Page header

This line shows the currently selected sequencer, and the

assigned Song (“S1:Song Name” or “S2:Song Name”).

When no Song is assigned to the current sequencer, this line

shows only the selected sequencer number (“S1:” or “S2:”,

depending on the selected sequencer).

When no sequencer or Song is selected, only the “No Song”

text appears.

Press either A (S1:) or B (S1:) to switch between Sequencer 1

and Sequencer 2. When one of the sequencers is selected, the

sequencer number is also shown at the right of the metro-

nome Tempo.

When a Jukebox ﬁle is in play, its name appears on the page

header.

Selected Sequencer

These indicators show if the currently selected sequencer is

Seq1 or Seq2. Use the A and B VOLUME/VALUE buttons to

select a sequencer.

Win=0

Win=50

Win=100

Press 'Enter/Yes'

to memorize

the Seq 1/2 Setup

WRITE:

S1: Piano01

S2: Guitar01

Lyrics StrngEns2

VoxPad1

No song

Song Play icon Page header

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks

Song select commands

Selected Sequencer

Measure number

Song Play operating mode

Tracks 1-8 page

Bar number

This counter shows the current bar number position of the

selected Song.

A (S1:SongName)

Pressed a ﬁrst time (with a Song already selected) this button

pair selects Sequencer 1. Pressed a second time (or with no

Song selected), it opens the Song Selection page (see “Song

Select page” on page 73), allowing for selection of a single

Song or a Jukebox ﬁle for Sequencer 1.

If you select another Song, while a Song is in play within the

same Sequencer, the new Song will start playing.

While this parameter is selected, you can select a Song by

composing its progressive number (see “Selecting a Song

composing its progressive number” on page 70).

B (S2:SongName)

Pressed a ﬁrst time (with a Song already selected) this button

pair selects Sequencer 2. Pressed a second time (or with no

Song selected), it opens the Song Selection page (see “Song

Select page” on page 73), allowing for selection of a single

Song for Sequencer 2.

If you select another Song, while a Song is in play within the

same Sequencer, the new Song will start playing.

While this parameter is selected, you can select a Song by

composing its progressive number (see “Selecting a Song

composing its progressive number” on page 70).

C (Lyrics)

Open the Lyrics page (see “The Lyrics page” on page 74). Lyr-

ics will be shown only if included into the selected Song, and

compatible with a standard format that Pa50SD can recog-

nize.

E (Upper 1 Program), F (Upper 2 Program), G (Upper 3 Pro-

gram), H (Lower)

Name of the Programs assigned to the Realtime (Keyboard)

tracks. Use these buttons to select, mute/unmute or change

the volume of the corresponding tracks.

TRACKS 1-8 PAGE

To see and edit tracks 1-8, press TRACK SELECT from the

main page. The TRACK SELECT LED turns on.

Press the TRACK SELECT button twice, to go back to the

main page.

A-H (Tracks 1-8 Programs)

Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 1-8. Use these but-

tons to select, mute/unmute or change the volume of the cor-

responding tracks.

TRACKS 9-16 PAGE

To see and edit tracks 9-16, press TRACK SELECT once from

the Tracks 1-8 page, or twice from the main page. The

TRACK SELECT LED begins ﬂashing.

Press the TRACK SELECT button again, to go back to the

main page.

A-H (Tracks 9-16 Programs)

Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 9-16. Use these but-

tons to select, mute/unmute or change the volume of the cor-

responding tracks.

SONG SELECT PAGE

This page appears when you press either the A (S1:) or B (S2:)

button while you are in the main page. You can also access the

Song Select page by pressing PAGE +.

Press EXIT (or PAGE-) to go back to the main page of the

Song Play operating mode, without selecting a Song.

While in this page, select a Song for the selected Sequencer, or

a Jukebox ﬁle for Sequencer 1.

Note: There is a separate working directory for each onboard

sequencer.

A-C (File, folder)

Move the “.MID”, “.KAR” or “.JBX” ﬁle, or folder, to be

selected to the ﬁrst line of the display. To select a ﬁle, press the

F2 (Select) button. To open a folder, press the F3 (Open) but-

ton.

The “ ” symbol identiﬁes a folder.

E-F (Scroll Up)

Scroll the list up. Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these

buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical section.

G-H (Scroll Down)

Scroll the list down. Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of

these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical section.

F1 (SD)

Press this button after replacing a card in the card drive. The

new card will be read, and the ﬁle list shown on the display

Piano1 Piano1

DkStrings Guitar01

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn VoxPad1

S1:MySong

Strings1 VocaEns

DkStrings Bassi

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn Strings2

S1:MySong

CLUB |

BALLADS

0001 MYSONG.MID |

SD SELECT OPEN CLOSE

Song Selection

74 Song Play operating mode

The Lyrics page

will be updated.

F2 (Select)

Selects the item on the ﬁrst line in the display (Song or Juke-

box ﬁle). If a Song is already playing, it stops, and the new

Song starts playing. You are returned to the Main page.

F3 (Open)

Opens the selected folder (item whose name begins with

“ ”).

F4 (Close)

Closes the current folder, returning to the parent (“upper”)

folder.

THE LYRICS PAGE

This page shows the lyrics and chord abbreviations included

in the midiﬁle (if any).

To access this page, select the Lyrics command, or press

PAGE+ twice, from the main page of the Song Play mode (see

“Main page” on page 72).

Exit from this display, and go back to the main page of the

Song Play mode, by pressing the EXIT button.

While the Song is playing, the text ﬂows in the display, and

the chord abbreviations (if any) will appear on the chords

area of the display. The lyrics at the current position are

underlined:

A (1)

Press this button pair to show Lyrics and Chords of

Sequencer 1.

B (2)

Press this button pair to show Lyrics and Chords of

Sequencer 2.

PLAYING A JUKEBOX FILE

With Sequencer 1, you can select a Jukebox ﬁle (a ﬁle with the

“.JBX” extension) instead of a single Song. This lets you play a

list of Songs without multiple selections.

Note: The Jukebox ﬁle can be assigned to the Sequencer 1

only.

Note: To create a Jukebox ﬁle, go to the Jukebox page (see

page 79).

Warning: Should you delete a Song included into the Jukebox

list currently in play, the sequencer will stop, and the “No Song”

message will appear. At this point, press SHIFT+>> (Seq1) to

go to the next Song, and press PLAY/STOP again.

Transport controls

When you select a Jukebox ﬁle, Sequencer 1 transport con-

trols are slightly different than with single Songs.

<< and >> Pressed alone, these buttons are the Rewind

and Fast Forward commands.

Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and

press these buttons to scroll to the previous or

next Song in the Jukebox list.

PAUSE Pauses the Song at the current position. Press

PAUSE or PLAY/STOP to start the Song play-

ing again.

PLAY/STOP Starts or stops the current Song. When you

stop the Song, the sequencer goes back to mea-

sure 1 of the current Song.

If the Jukebox page is open, you can start from

the Song at the ﬁrst line of the display. See

“Page 9 - Jukebox” on page 79.

From any page, press MENU to open the Song Play edit

menu. This menu gives access to the various Song Play edit

sections.

When in the menu, select a section using the VOLUME/

VALUE buttons, press PAGE+ to select a page, or press EXIT

to exit the menu.

When in an edit page, press EXIT to go back to the Song Play

mode main page.

Michelle, ma belle

S1:Michelle

Chords

Michelle, ma belle

S1:Sunday Piano01

S2:no song Guitar01

Lyrics StrngEns2

VoxPad1

S1:MEDLEY1.JBX

Mixer Preferences

Effects

Track ctrls

Jukebox

Song Play Menu

Song Play operating mode

Edit page structure

Each item of this menu corresponds to an edit section. Each

edit section groups many edit pages.

EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE

Select an edit section from the Menu, and/or use the PAGE

buttons to reach the desired page.

Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song Play

mode.

All edit pages share the same structure.

Song Play icon

When on, this icon indicates that the instrument is in Song

Play mode.

Page header

The header shows the name of the current edit page. Usually,

the header is divided into a ﬁrst word, identifying the section

name (e.g., “Mixer:FX Send” is a “Mixer” section page), and a

second word, referring to the page name (e.g. “FX Send”).

Selected Sequencer

These indicators show if the currently selected sequencer is

Seq1 or Seq2. Go to the Main page and use the A and B VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons to select a sequencer.

Page

This area shows the current page number.

A-H

Each pair of VOLUME/VALUE buttons select a different

parameter of command, depending on the edit page.

PAGE 1 - MIXER: VOLUME

Here you can adjust the volume for each of the 16 sequencer

tracks. Press both VOLUME/VALUE button to mute/unmute

the corresponding track.

A muted track remains muted even when selecting a different

Song.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

|||| 090 |||| 090

|||| 090 |||| 092

|||| 090 |||| 086

|||| 090 ||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

Song Play icon Page header Page number

Selected Sequencer

Section name Page name

Mixer:FX Send

|||| 090 |||| 090

|||| 090 |||| 092

|||| 090 |||| 086

|||| 090 ||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

|||| 090 |||| 090

|||| 090 |||| 092

|||| 090 |||| 086

|||| 090 ||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

76 Song Play operating mode

Page 2 - Mixer: Pan

PAGE 2 - MIXER: PAN

Here you can adjust the pan for each Song track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

Pan

-64 Hard Left.

+00 Center.

+63 Hard Right.

Off The direct (uneffected) signal does not go to

the outputs; only the FX signal is heard for this

track.

PAGE 3 - MIXER: FX SEND A/B

This page lets you set the level of the track’s direct (unef-

fected) signal going to the A and B Internal FX processors

(usually assigned to Sequencer 1).

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1-8 to

tracks 9-16.

Note: When playing back a Song that makes use of all four

effects (A-D), you can’t edit any effect parameter. These param-

eters appear greyed out in the display.

Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the

default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the

Song, change the effects, then start the Song again. Edit the Song

in Song mode to permanently change the effects.

Here is the edit procedure:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons to select a

track.

2. Use the F1-F4 buttons to select a parameter for that

track.

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the parame-

ter’s value.

Parameters

000 No effect. Only the direct (uneffected) signal

goes to the outputs.

127 100% effect. The direct (uneffected) and

effected signals go to the outputs with the same

level.

PAGE 3 - MIXER: FX SEND C/D

This page lets you set the level of the track’s direct (unef-

fected) signal going to the C and D Internal FX processors.

Note: You can access this page only while editing the Sequencer

2, and the “S2 FX Mode” parameter is set to “CD Mode” (see

page 80).

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1-8 to

tracks 9-16.

Here is the edit procedure:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons to select a

track.

2. Use the F1-F4 buttons to select a parameter for that

track.

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the parame-

ter’s value.

Parameters

000 No effect. Only the direct (uneffected) signal

goes to the outputs.

127 100% effect. The direct (uneffected) and

effected signals go to the outputs with the same

level.

C+00 C+00

Mixer:Pan

C+00 C+00

Mixer:Pan

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:127 B:020 A:100 B:050

A:110 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

Mixer:FXSend

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:127 B:020 A:100 B:050

A:110 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

Mixer:FXSend

C:100 D:050 C:100 D:050

C:127 D:020 C:100 D:050

C:110 D:050 C:100 D:050

C:100 D:050 C:100 D:050

Mixer:FXSend

C:100 D:050 C:100 D:050

C:127 D:020 C:100 D:050

C:110 D:050 C:100 D:050

C:100 D:050 C:100 D:050

Mixer:FXSend

Song Play operating mode

Page 4 - FX: A/B Select

PAGE 4 - FX: A/B SELECT

This page lets you select the A and B effects. Usually, the A

effect is a reverb, while the B effect is a modulating effect.

Effects A and B are usually reserved to Sequencer 1. You can,

however, create Songs by using all four effects in Song mode.

Depending on the status of the “S2 FX Mode” parameter, this

effect pair could be reserved to Sequencer 2, too (see

page 80).

Note: When playing back a Song that makes use of all four

effects (A-D), you can’t edit any effect parameter. These param-

eters appear greyed out in the display.

Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the

default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the

Song, change the effects, then start the Song again. Edit the Song

in Song mode to permanently change the effects.

A, B

Effects assigned to the A and B effect processors. Usually, A is

the reverb, while B is the modulating effect (chorus, ﬂanger,

delay…). For a list of the available effects, see “Effects” on

page 175.

ModTrk (Modulating Track)

Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modu-

late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a

physical controller.

B>Asend (B>A Send)

Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect.

PAGE 4 - FX: C/D SELECT

This page lets you select the C and D effects. Usually, the C

effect is a reverb, while the D effect is a modulating effect.

Effects C and D are usually reserved to Sequencer 2 and the

Realtime tracks. You can, however, create Songs using all four

effects in Song mode. Depending on the status of the “S2 FX

Mode” parameter, Sequencer 2 might also use the A/B effect

pair (see page 80).

Note: When playing back a Song that makes use of all four

effects (A-D), you can’t edit any effect parameter. These param-

eters appear greyed out in the display.

Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the

default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the

Song, change the effects, then start the Song again. Edit the Song

in Song mode to permanently change the effects.

C, D

Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors. Usually, C is

the reverb, while D is the modulating effect (chorus, ﬂanger,

delay…). For a list of the available effects, see “Effects” on

page 175.

ModTrk (Modulating Track)

Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modu-

late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a

physical controller.

D>Csend (D>C Send)

Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C

effect.

PAGE 5 - FX: A EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect

(usually, reverb for Sequencer 1).

Use the E-F and G-H VOLUME/VALUE button pairs to scroll

the parameter list.

Use the A-D VOLUMME/VALUE button pairs to select and

edit a parameter.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to edit the selected param-

eter.

Note: When playing back a Song that makes use of all four

effects (A-D), you can’t edit any effect parameter. These param-

eters appear greyed out in the display.

Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the

default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the

Song, change the effects, then start the Song again. Edit the Song

in Song mode to permanently change the effects.

Parameters

See “Effects” on page 175 for a list of available parameters for

each effect type.

PAGE 6 - FX: B EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect

(usually modulating effect for Sequencer 1). For more details,

see “Page 5 - FX: A editing” above.

PAGE 5 - FX: C EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect.

You can access this page only when the “S2 FX Mode” param-

eter is set to C/D (see “S2 FX Mode” on page 80). For more

details, see “Page 5 - FX: A editing” above.

Note: C and D effects are used also by the Realtime (Keyboard)

tracks.

A:02 B:97

BigHall MlwChrs

ModTrk:Up1 B>Asend:127

FX:A/B Select

C:02 D:97

BigHall MlwChrs

ModTrk:Up1 D>Csend:127

FX:C/D Select

Rev Time [sec]: 3.07 |

High Damp [%]:0

Pre Dly [ms]:0

Pre Dly Thru [%]:0 |

FX:A Edit

78 Song Play operating mode

Page 6 - FX: D editing

PAGE 6 - FX: D EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect.

You can access this page only when the “S2 FX Mode” param-

eter is set to C/D (see “S2 FX Mode” on page 80). For more

details, see “Page 5 - FX: A editing” above.

Note: C and D effects are used also by the Realtime (Keyboard)

tracks.

PAGE 7 - TRACK: MODE

This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each Song

track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1-8 to

tracks 9-16.

Parameters

Drum This is a Drum/Percussion track. No Master or

Octave Transpose applies to this track.

Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic, i.e. they can

play more than one note at the same time.

Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic, i.e. each

new note stops the previous note.

Mono Right A Mono track, but with priority assigned to

the rightmost (highest) note.

PAGE 8 - TRACK: INTERNAL/EXTERNAL

This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each

track. It is very useful to let a Song track drive an external

expander.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1-8 to

tracks 9-16.

Parameters

Internal The track plays the sounds generated by the

internal sound engine. It does not play an

external instrument connected to the MIDI

OUT.

External The track plays an external instrument con-

nected to the MIDI OUT. It does not play the

internal sounds, therefore saving polyphony.

When a track is set to “External”, a strings of

transmitted Control Change and Program

Change data is shown instead of the Program

name assigned to the track. In the following

example, CC#0 is the Control Change 0 (Bank

Select MSB), CC#32 is the Control Change 32

(Bank Select LSB), PC is the Program Change.

Both The track plays both the internal sounds and

an external instrument connected to the MIDI

OUT.

Poly Poly

Track:Mode

Poly Mono Right

Drum Poly

Poly Poly

Track:Mode

Internal Internal

Internal External

Internal Internal

Track:Int/Ext

Internal Internal

Internal External

Internal Internal

Track:Int/Ext

121- 3- 0

CC#0 CC#32 PC

Song Play operating mode

Page 9 - Jukebox

PAGE 9 - JUKEBOX

The Jukebox function lets you play a list of Songs (127 max),

at the simple touch of a button. You can play a Jukebox ﬁle by

selecting it in the Song Select page (see “Playing a Jukebox

ﬁle” on page 74), just as if it was a normal Song.

In this page, you can create, edit and save a Jukebox ﬁle. If a

Jukebox ﬁle is already selected into a Sequencer, you will

enter this page with that ﬁle ready to be edited. Otherwise,

you will enter this page with an empty “NEW_NAME.JBX”

ﬁle.

To create a new ﬁle, even when a Jukebox ﬁle is already

selected, press SHIFT+ F4 (Del), and conﬁrm with ENTER

(see below the “F4 (Del)” paragraph).

When you press PLAY/STOP from this page, the Jukebox

playback begins from the currently selected Song (i.e., the

Song on the ﬁst line of the display).

F1 (Save)

Press this button to save the Jukebox ﬁle to the card. The

Jukebox Save page appears, allowing you to save your ﬁle to

the card.

Note: You can save your “.JBX” ﬁle only in the same folder as

the Songs in the list.

You can create a new ﬁle, or overwrite an existing one.

1. Move to the ﬁrst line of the display the “.JBX” ﬁle you

want to save your list into. Select an existing ﬁle if you

want to overwrite it. Select the “NEW_NAME.JBX”

item to create a new ﬁle.

Use the E-F (Scroll Up) and G-H (Scroll Down) VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons, or the TEMPO/VALUE controls

to scroll the list.

2. If you are making a new ﬁle, when the

“NEW_NAME.JBX” item is on the ﬁrst line of the dis-

play, press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons. You

are prompted to assign a name to the selected item:

3. Move the cursor using the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons.

Select a character using the DIAL. Insert a character at

the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button.

Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the

DELETE button.

4. When you have ﬁnished writing a name, press F2 (Save)

to conﬁrm. The “Are you sure?” message appears. Press

ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

F2 (Add)

Adds a Song at the end of the current list. You can add up to

127 Songs in a list.

Note: A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the

same folder.

F3 (Ins)

Inserts a Song at the cursor position (i.e., the ﬁrst line of the

display). All subsequent Songs are moved to the next higher-

numbered slot. You can add up to 127 Songs in a list.

Note: A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the

same folder.

F4 (Del)

This command let’s you delete the Song on the ﬁrst line of the

display.

Pressed while keeping SHIFT pressed, the whole

Jukebox list is deleted. (The instrument asks for a conﬁrma-

tion with the “Are you sure?” message; press ENTER to con-

ﬁrm, EXIT to abort).

The Jukebox ﬁle name changes to “NEW_NAME.JBX”.

PAGE 10 - PREFERENCES

In this page, you can set various general parameters.

Use the A-D VOLUME/VALUE button pairs to select a

parameter.

Note: These settings are stored in the Global ﬁle. After changing

these settings, press WRITE to save them into the Global. The

Write Global window will appear (see “The Write window” on

page 72).

Note: You can always start both sequencers simultaneously.

Start both sequencers simultaneously by keeping SHIFT held

down while pressing one of the PLAY/STOP controls.

Link Mode

The two onboard Sequencers can work each with a different

Tempo (Off), or use the same Tempo (Link modes).

Off The sequencers Tempo are not linked. Each

sequencer uses its own Tempo.

Link Measure

The two sequencers Tempo are linked together.

The Tempo data written into the Songs are

ignored. Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO/

VALUE controls.

Start one of the sequencers, by pressing its own

PLAY/STOP control. Then, start the other

sequencer, by pressing the other PLAY/STOP

control; the second sequencer starts at the next

measure.

01 Sunday.mid |

02 Likeavrg.mid

SAVE ADD INS DEL

JB List:NEW_NAME

NEW_NAME.JBX |

MEDLEY1.JBX

SD SAVE ABORT

JBX Save

NEW_NAME

Link Mode:Off

S2 FX Mode:CD

Perf. FX Mode:CD

Preferences (Gbl)

80 Song Play operating mode

Saving a list of Songs

Link Beat The two sequencers Tempo are linked together.

The Tempo data written into the Songs are

ignored. Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO/

VALUE controls.

Start one of the sequencers, by pressing its own

PLAY/STOP control. Then, start the other

sequencer, by pressing the other PLAY/STOP

control; the second sequencer starts at the next

beat (quarter or octave, depending on the

Song’s Time Signature).

S2 FX Mode

This parameter selects the effects mode for Sequencer 2.

When a 4-effects Song is loaded, all four effects are used,

independently from this setting.

AB The A and B effect pair is used. Sequencer 2

shares its effects with Sequencer 1.

CD The C and D effect pair is used.

Note: When this parameter is set to CD,

Sequencer 2 shares its effects with the Realtime

(Keyboard) tracks, so these effects can be changed

either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2, or select-

ing a Performance (unless the “Performance FX

Mode” parameter is set to Off – see below).

Performance FX Mode

This parameter selects the effects mode for the Performance.

Off When selecting a Performance, no effect is

selected.

CD The Performance selects the C and D effect

pair.

Note: When both this parameter and the “S2 FX

Mode” parameter are set to CD, Sequencer 2

shares its effects with the Realtime (Keyboard)

tracks, so these effects can be changed either

selecting a Song for Sequencer 2, or selecting a

Performance.

SAVING A LIST OF SONGS

How to save a list of Songs contained in a

folder

1. Press SONG PLAY to select the Song Play operative

mode.

2. Press one of the A (S1:) VOLUME/VALUE button to

select the Load Song page.

3. Use the F3 (Open) and F4 (Close) buttons to browse

through the folders inside the card.

4. Move the folder you are looking for to the ﬁrst line of

the display. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls, or the E-F

(Scroll Up) and G-H (Scroll Down) VOLUME/VALUE

buttons.

5. Once the folder is selected, press SHIFT + F2.

6. A dialog box will appear, asking you to insert a new card

into the card drive. Insert the card, and press ENTER to

conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Note: The text ﬁle will contain a list of “*.mid”, “*.kar” and

“*.jbx” ﬁles only (i.e., the ﬁles you can select using the numeric

keypad – see “Selecting a Song composing its progressive num-

ber” on page 70). Folders and different kinds of ﬁles will not be

included.

When saved, the text ﬁle will be named after the selected folder.

For example, a folder named “Dummy” will generate a

“Dummy.txt” ﬁle. If a ﬁle with the same name already exists on

the card, it will be overwritten without waiting for any conﬁr-

mation. A ﬁle containing the list of all valid ﬁles contained into

the root of the card will generate a “Root.txt” ﬁle.

The list will include the progressive number assigned to each

Song, ﬁle names in MS-DOS format (8.3), the total number of

ﬁles in the list.

For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal

computer, use a ﬁxed size (i.e., non-proportional) character in

your text editor.

Warning: While the list may contain more than 9999 ﬁles, you

can’t select Songs outside the 0001-9999 range when using the

numeric keypad.

Song Play operating mode

Saving a list of Songs

How to save a list of Songs contained in a

Jukebox ﬁle

1. Press SONG PLAY to select the Song Play operative

mode.

2. To select an existing Jukebox ﬁle, press one of the A (S1:)

VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the Load Song page.

If you are creating a new Jukebox ﬁle, press MENU

instead, select the Jukebox page, and jump to step 7.

3. Use the F3 (Open) and F4 (Close) buttons to browse

through the folders inside the card.

4. Move the folders and ﬁles to select to the ﬁrst line of the

display. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls, or the E-F

(Scroll Up) and G-H (Scroll Down) VOLUME/VALUE

buttons.

5. When the Jukebox ﬁle you are looking for is selected,

press F2 (Select) to select it.

6. Once the Jukebox ﬁle is selected, press MENU and select

the Jukebox page.

7. While you are in the Jukebox page, press SHIFT + F2 to

save the list.

8. A dialog box will appear, asking you to insert a new card

into the card drive. Insert the card, and press ENTER to

conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Note: When saved, the text ﬁle will be named after the selected

Jukebox ﬁle. For example, a Jukebox ﬁle named “Dummy.jbx”

will generate a “Dummy.txt” ﬁle. A new, unnamed Jukebox ﬁle

will generate a “New_name.txt” ﬁle. If a ﬁle with the same

name already exists on the card, it will be overwritten without

waiting for any conﬁrmation.

The list will include the progressive number assigned to each

Song, ﬁle names in MS-DOS format (8.3), the total number of

ﬁles in the list.

For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal

computer, use a ﬁxed size (i.e., non-proportional) character in

your text editor.

82 Backing Sequence operating mode

Transport controls

12. BACKING SEQUENCE OPERATING MODE

The Backing Sequence mode lets you record a live perfor-

mance with the Styles. The front panel controls work mostly

as in Style Play mode, but here you are recording what you

are playing. After recording, the result is a new Song made of

the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks.

TRANSPORT CONTROLS

When in Backing Sequence mode, use SEQ1 transport con-

trols (PLAY/STOP, PAUSE…). See “SEQUENCER TRANS-

PORT CONTROLS - SEQ1 and SEQ2” on page 18 for more

information).

THE BACKING SEQUENCE, SONG AND SONG

PLAY MODES

The Backing Sequence and Song modes are linked together:

go to Backing Sequence mode to record a Song, and switch to

Song mode to edit it.

Since they use the same sequencer and memory area, record-

ing a new Song in Backing Sequence mode deletes the Song

loaded in Song mode.

Note: The Song is kept in RAM, so save it before turning the

instrument off, or it will be lost.

Warning: When switching to Song Play, the Song is deleted,

since Backing Sequence, Song and Song Play share the same

sequencer (Sequencer 1). The “Erase Song?” message appears.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to stay in Backing Sequence

mode, and avoid deleting the Song.

HOW TO PLAYBACK A SONG

You can load a Standard MIDI File, and play it back while in

Backing Sequence mode.

Note: When in the Main page (Backing Sequence Play) the key-

board doesn’t play.

1. Enter the Backing Sequence mode. The Backing

Sequence Playback page appears (see page 83).

2. Press one of the B (Load Song) VOLUME/VALUE but-

tons to load a Song (see “Load Song page” on page 84).

You can load any Standard Midi File (ﬁles with the

“.MID” or “.KAR” extension).

3. Press PLAY/STOP to start the playback.

4. Press PLAY/STOP again to stop the playback. The play-

back is automatically stopped at the end of the Song.

REALTIME RECORDING MODE

While in Backing Sequence mode, you can record a new Song

in realtime mode (i.e., recording exactly what you play).

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks will be Song tracks 1-4, Pads will

be Song tracks 5-8, while Style tracks will be Song tracks 9-

16.

1. Enter the Backing Sequence mode.

2. Press RECORD. You will be prompted to select the Real-

time Recording mode, or the Chord/Acc Step Mode.

3. Press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select

the Realtime Recording mode. The Realtime Recording

page appears (see “Realtime Recording page” on

page 85).

4. The last selected Style is currently selected. Should it not

be the right one, select a different Style to start recording

with. (See “Selecting a Style” on page 26).

5. The last selected Performance or STS is currently

selected. If you prefer, select a different Performance or

STS. (See “Selecting a Performance” on page 25, and

“Selecting a Single Touch Setting (STS)” on page 27).

6. Select the status of the Backing Sequence tracks, using

the G (RT) and H (Ch/Acc) button pairs. (RT stays for

Realtime/Keyboard; Ch/Acc stays for Chord/Accompa-

niment, i.e. the Style tracks). To record all you play on

the keyboard, plus the automatic accompaniment, leave

their status to REC (see “Realtime Recording page” on

page 85).

Warning: Tracks set to REC are automatically deleted

when starting recording. Set a track to the PLAY status,

when you don’t want to delete it. For example, if you are

recording a Realtime (Keyboard) part on and existing

Style track, set the Ch/Acc parameter to PLAY, and the RT

track to REC.

7. Start recording by pressing the left PLAY/STOP button

(or the START/STOP button). After a count-in (see

“Metro (Metronome)” on page 85), you can start

recording.

Play a solo intro, or start the auto-accompaniment with

the START/STOP button. To start with the Style playing

Load Song Metro:Off

Save Song Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

BS:New Song

Realtime Recording

Chord/Acc Step Mode

Record

Style:NewBossa 99%

Perf:01-01 Metro:On1

Resol:HI RT/Pad:REC

Sel.Tempo Ch/Acc:REC

Rec:NewSong

Backing Sequence operating mode

Chord/Acc Step recording

right from bar 1, keep the chord pressed during the pre-

count, and press START/STOP before the end of the

precount. Otherwise, the Style will start playing from

the next bar, following the one where you pressed

START/STOP.

Since you can use any Style control, you could start with

the usual combinations (INTRO, ENDING, FILL… see

“2 - Playing a Style” on page 29 for more information).

Note: While in Backing Sequence mode, you can’t record

the SYNCHRO, FADE IN/OUT, TAP TEMPO/RESET,

ACCOMPANIMENT VOLUME controls.

8. Play your music. You can even stop the Style by pressing

START/STOP. If you stop the Style while recording, start

it again with the START/STOP button.

9. When ﬁnished recording your performance, press the

left PLAY/STOP button. The RECORD LED will turn

off, and you will go back to the Playback page (see “How

to playback a Song” before).

The recorded Song will be automatically converted to

the Standard MIDI File format.

10. At this point, you can edit the Song in Song mode (see

“Song operating mode” on page 88), or save it to a card

(see “Save Song page” on page 84).

Warning: The recorded Song is in RAM (Random Access

Memory), and will be deleted when turning the instru-

ment off, or entering Record again (either in Backing

Sequence or Song mode). Save the Song to the card, if you

wish to preserve it.

CHORD/ACC STEP RECORDING

While in the Backing Sequence operative mode, you can

enter the Chord/Acc Step Mode to create or edit the Style

(Chord/Acc) part of a Song. This mode lets you enter chords

even if you are not a keyboard player, or ﬁx any error made

playing chords or selecting Style controls, during the Real-

time Recording mode.

You can edit only Songs created on the Pa50SD, Pa60 or Pa80

(Backing Sequence mode), provided that you have the same

Styles in the same locations. When saving a Song created in

Backing Sequence mode, all Chord/Acc data is preserved, and

can be loaded later, to be edited using the Chord/Acc Step

Mode.

Here is how to enter the Chord/Acc Step Mode, and execute

your editing:

1. Press B.SEQ to enter the Backing Sequence mode.

2. Press RECORD. You will be prompted to select the Real-

time Recording mode or the Chord/Acc Step Mode.

3. Press one of the B (Chord/Acc Step Mode) VOLUME/

VALUE buttons to enter the Step Mode. The Chord/Acc

Step mode page appears (see “Chord/Acc Step Record-

ing page” on page 85).

4. Select the M(easure) parameter, and go to a different

position into the Song, using the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols, or the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons. Alternatively,

you can move the locator using the < > and << >> but-

tons. See “Transport controls” on page 87.

5. Select the parameter type to insert, edit or delete at the

current position. If an arrow ( ) appears next to a

parameter, the shown event has been inserted at the cur-

rent position.

6. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the selected

event. Delete it using the DELETE button. When editing

a parameter without the arrow ( ) next to it, a new

event is inserted.

7. Exit the Chord/Acc Step Mode by pressing the RECORD

button.

8. Press START/STOP to listen to the results of your edit-

ing. If they are ﬁne, save the Backing Sequence on a

card.

MAIN PAGE (BACKING SEQUENCE PLAY)

This is the main page of the Backing Sequence mode.

To access this page from another operating mode, press the

B.SEQ button.

Note: When in this page, the keyboard doesn’t play.

Backing Sequence icon

When on, this icon indicates that the instrument is in Back-

ing Sequence mode.

Page header

This header shows the name of the selected Song.

B (Load Song)

Use these buttons to select a Song (i.e., a Standard MIDI

File). The Song Select page opens, and you can select a Song

(see below “Load Song page”).

Realtime Recording

Chord/Acc Step Mode

Record

M001.01.000 Tempo:120

Style:Umpl_Bossa

Perf :01-1 SE:Off

C Maj - /C

Step Chord/Acc

Load Song Metro:Off

Save Song Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

BS:New Song

Backing Sequence icon Page header

84 Backing Sequence operating mode

Load Song page

C (Save Song)

This command saves the recorded Song as a Standard MIDI

File. The ﬁle is automatically added the “.MID” extension.

After pressing this command, the Save Song page appears

(see “Save Song page” on page 84).

D (Select Tempo)

Select this parameter to use the TEMPO/VALUE section to

select the Tempo. When you select this parameter, the VALUE

LED turns off.

F (Metro)

Use these buttons to turn the metronome on/off during play-

back.

G (Meter)

This non-editable parameter shows the starting meter (or

time signature) of the selected Song.

H (Tempo mode)

This sets the Tempo change mode.

Man(ual) When the cursor is on the “D (Select Tempo)”

parameter, you can change the Tempo using

the TEMPO/VALUE section controls. The

Song will be played back using the manually

selected tempo.

Auto The Tempo recorded into the Song will be used

instead.

LOAD SONG PAGE

This page appears when you press PAGE+ or either the B

(Load Song) buttons while you are in the main page.

Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Backing

Sequence operating mode, without selecting a Song.

A-C (File, folder)

Move the ﬁle or folder to be selected to the ﬁrst line of the

display. To select a ﬁle, press the F2 (Select) button. To open a

folder, press the F3 (Open) button.

The “ ” symbol identiﬁes a folder.

E-F (Scroll Up)

Scroll the list up. Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these

buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical section.

G-H (Scroll Down)

Scroll the list down. Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of

these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical section.

TEMPO/VALUE section

These controls scroll the list up or down.

F1 (SD)

Press this button after replacing a card in the card drive. The

new card will be read, and the ﬁle list shown on the display

will be updated.

F2 (Load)

Load the Song at the ﬁrst line of the display.

F3 (Open)

Opens the selected folder (ﬁle whose name begins with the

“ ” symbol).

F4 (Close)

Closes the current folder, returning to the parent (“upper”)

folder.

SAVE SONG PAGE

The recorded Song is contained in RAM, and is lost when

turning the instrument off. The Song is also lost when you

overwrite it in Record mode, or when switching to the Song

Play mode. You must save to a card any Song you wish to pre-

serve.

1. If you are in Record mode (RECORD LED on), stop the

sequencer and press RECORD to go back to the Backing

Sequence Playback page.

2. Select the Save Song button. The Save Song page

appears.

3. Move the folder where you wish to save your Song to the

ﬁrst line of the display, using the E-F (Scroll Up) and G-

H (Scroll Down) VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls. Press F3 (Open) to open it.

Close the current folder by pressing F4 (Close).

4. When in the selected folder, you can save the Song over

an existing ﬁle, or create a new ﬁle.

• To overwrite an existing ﬁle, move it to the ﬁrst line of

the display.

• To create a new ﬁle, move the “NEW_NAME.MID”

item to the ﬁrst line of the display.

5. When the “NEW_NAME.MID” item is selected, press

one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons. You are

prompted to assign a name to the new folder:

Move the cursor using the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons.

Select a character using the DIAL. Insert a character at

the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button.

Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the

DELETE button.

6. When you have ﬁnished writing a name for the new

midiﬁle, press F2 (Save) to conﬁrm. The “Are you sure?”

message will appear. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT

to abort.

BALLADS |

MYSONGS

MYSONG.MID |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Load Song

NEW_NAME.MID |

MYSONGS

MYSONG.MID |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

BS:Save Song

NEW_NAME.MID

Backing Sequence operating mode

Realtime Recording page

REALTIME RECORDING PAGE

While you are in Backing Sequence mode, press RECORD,

then one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons, to access the

Realtime Recording mode. The RECORD LED turns on.

Style

This non-editable parameter shows the selected Style. If no

Style is selected, the name will be empty. You can select a dif-

ferent Style, using the STYLE section (see “Selecting a Style”

on page 26).

0…99%

This non-editable parameters shows the remaining recording

space in memory, as a percentage.

Perf or STS (Performance or STS)

This non-editable parameter shows the selected Performance

or STS (depending on the last item selected). If no Perfor-

mance or STS is selected, the name will be empty. You can

select a different Performance, using the PROGRAM/PER-

FORMANCE section (see “Selecting a Performance” on

page 25). To select one of the four STS for the current Style,

use the F1-F4 buttons.

Resol (Resolution)

Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording.

Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors; notes

played too soon or too later are moved to the nearest axis of a

rhythmic “grid”, set with this parameter, thus playing per-

fectly in time.

Hi No quantization applied.

 (1/32)… (1/8)

Grid resolution, in musical values. For exam-

ple, when you select 1/8, all notes are moved to

the nearest 1/8 division. When you select 1/4,

all notes are moved to the nearest 1/4 division.

Sel.Tempo (Select Tempo)

Select this parameter to use the TEMPO/VALUE section to

select the Tempo. When you select this parameter, the VALUE

LED turns off.

Metro (Metronome)

This parameter sets the metronome mode during recording.

Off The metronome can be heard only during the

precount.

On1 The metronome plays during recording.

Recording begins with a 1-bar precount. Start

recording after bar -1.

On2 The metronome plays during recording.

Recording begins with a 2-bar precount. Start

recording after bar -1.

RT/Pads

Ch/Acc

These parameters let you decide the track status during

recording.

RT/Pads: This Backing Sequence track includes the four

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks, and the four Pads. They will be

Song tracks 1-8, as in the following table:

Ch/Acc: This Backing Sequence track includes all Style

tracks, including recognized chords. They will be Song tracks

9-16.

MUTE The track is muted. If this tracks has already

been recorded, it will not be heard during

recording of the other Backing Sequence track.

PLAY The track is in play. If there are recorded data,

they will be heard during recording of the

other Backing Sequence track.

REC The track is in record. All previously recorded

data will be deleted.

CHORD/ACC STEP RECORDING PAGE

While you are in Backing Sequence mode, press RECORD,

then one of the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons, to access the

Chord/Acc Step Recording mode. The RECORD LED turns

on.

Side arrow ( )

The small arrow next to a parameter means that its value is

effective at the current position. For example, if you are at the

“M003.01.000” position, and an arrow lights up next to the

Chord parameter, this means that a chord change happens at

the “M003.01.000” position.

Style:NewBossa 99%

Perf:01-01 Metro:On1

Resol:HI RT/Pad:REC

Sel.Tempo Ch/Acc:REC

Rec:NewSong

Hi (no

quantiza-

tion)

1/16

1/8

RT/Pad track Song track/Channel

Upper 1 1

Upper 2 2

Upper 3 3

Lower 4

Pad 1 5

Pad 2 6

Pad 3 7

Pad 4 8

M001.01.000 Tempo:120

Style:Umpl_Bossa

Perf :01-1 SE:Off

C Maj - /C

Step Chord/Acc

86 Backing Sequence operating mode

Chord/Acc Step Recording page

M(easure)

This is the locator. It shows the current position of the Step

Editor. To go to a different position within the Song, select

this parameter, then use the TEMPO/VALUE controls, the A

VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the < > buttons (while the <<

>> buttons let you move to the previous or following mea-

sure). When using one of these controls, the locator moves in

steps of 1/8 (192 ticks), or jumps to the next event.

The locator’s format is as follows:

Measure: Measure or bar number.

Beat: Divider in the Time Signature ratio (e.g., a quarter in a

3/4 time).

Tick: Minimal sequencer’s resolution. The Pa50SD internal

sequencers feature a resolution of 384 ticks per quarter.

INSERT When the Measure parameter is selected, press

INSERT to insert a measure starting from the

current position. All Chord/Acc events con-

tained into the current measure will be moved

to the following measure. The event at the

Mxxx.xx.000 position (i.e., exactly at the

beginning of the measure, like a Time Signa-

ture or Style change) will not be moved.

DELETE When the Measure parameter is selected, press

DELETE to delete the current measure. All

Chord/Acc event contained into the following

measures are moved to the current measure.

SHIFT + DELETE

When the Measure parameter is selected, press

SHIFT + DELETE to delete all events in the

Style tracks, starting from the current position

to the end of the Song. To delete all events in

the Style tracks, go back to the M001.01.000

position, and press SHIFT + DELETE.

Note: All events on the very ﬁrst tick

(M001.01.000), like Style, Tempo, Chord, Style

Element selection, cannot be deleted.

Tempo

This is the Tempo Change parameter. To insert a Tempo

Change event at the current position, select this parameter

and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change its value.

DELETE When the Tempo parameter is selected, and

the side arrow ( ) – showing that a Tempo

Change event has been selected at the current

position – appears next to it, press DELETE to

delete the Tempo Change at the current posi-

tion.

Note: If the side arrow doesn’t appear, the event

was not selected at the current position, and will

not be deleted.

SHIFT + DELETE

When the Tempo parameter is selected, press

SHIFT + DELETE to delete all Tempo Change

events, starting from the current position to

the end of the Song. To delete all Tempo

Change events in the Song, go back to the

M001.01.000 position, and press SHIFT +

DELETE.

Note: All events on the very ﬁrst tick

(M001.01.000), like Perf, Style, Tempo, Chord,

Style Element selection, cannot be deleted.

Style

This is the last selected Style. To insert a Style change at the

current position, follow the standard selecting procedure

using the buttons of the STYLE section.

Note: Any Style Change inserted after the beginning of the mea-

sure (i.e., to a position other than Mxxx.01.000) will be effective

at the following measure. For example, if a Style Change event

has been inserted at M004.03.000, the selected Style will be

effectively selected at M005.01.000. (This works exactly as in

Style Play mode).

Note: When inserting a Style Change, you may also insert a

Tempo Change at the same position. A Style Change will not

automatically insert the Style’s Tempo.

DELETE When the Style parameter is selected, and the

side arrow ( ) – showing that a Style Change

event has been selected at the current position

– appears next to it, press DELETE to delete

the Style Change at the current position.

Note: If the side arrow doesn’t appear, the event

was not selected at the current position, and will

not be deleted.

SHIFT + DELETE

When the Style parameter is selected, press

SHIFT + DELETE to delete all Style Change

events, starting from the current position to

the end of the Song. To delete all Style Change

events in the Song, go back to the

M001.01.000 position, and press SHIFT +

DELETE.

Note: All events on the very ﬁrst tick

(M001.01.000), like Perf, Style, Tempo, Chord,

Style Element selection, cannot be deleted.

Perf

This is the last selected Performance. Select a Performance to

recall the Style it memorizes. To insert a Performance change

at the current position, follow the standard selecting proce-

dure using the buttons of the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE

section.

Note: The STYLE CHANGE LED is automatically turned on

when entering the Chord/Acc Step Mode. This means that

selecting a Performance automatically selects the Style memo-

rized into the Performance.

The SINGLE TOUCH and STS buttons are automatically dis-

abled, meaning that you can’t change the Realtime (Keyboard)

tracks while in Chord/Acc Step Mode.

DELETE When the Perf parameter is selected, and the

side arrow ( ) – showing that a Performance

Change event has been selected at the current

position – appears next to it, press DELETE to

delete the Performance Change at the current

position.

M001.01.000

Measure Beat Tick

Backing Sequence operating mode

How to delete a whole Song

Note: If the side arrow doesn’t appear, the event

was not selected at the current position, and will

not be deleted.

SHIFT + DELETE

When the Perf parameter is selected, press

SHIFT + DELETE to delete all Performance

Change events, starting from the current posi-

tion to the end of the Song. To delete all Per-

formance Change events in the Song, go back

to the M001.01.000 position, and press SHIFT

+ DELETE.

Note: All events on the very ﬁrst tick

(M001.01.000), like Perf, Style, Tempo, Chord,

Style Element selection, cannot be deleted.

SE (Style Element)

This is the Style Element (i.e., a Variation, Fill, Intro, or End-

ing). The length of the selected Style Element is always shown

on the measure counter, at the top of the display:

This will let you know where to place the following Style Ele-

ment Change. For example, if you inserted an Intro event

lasting for 4 measures, you can insert 4 empty measure after

this event, and a Variation event at the end of the Intro,

beginning at the 4th empty measure.

“Off” means that the accompaniment will not play at the

selected position – only the Realtime tracks will play.

Hint: Insert a Style Element Off event exactly where the auto-

accompaniment must stop, at the end of the Song.

Chord

Use the D VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the Chord line.

Use the F1-F4 buttons to select the part of the chord you wish

to edit.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the selected

parameter. You can also play a chord, and it will be automati-

cally recognized. While recognizing a chord, the status of the

BASS INVERSION button will be considered.

“No chord” means that the accompaniment will not play at

the current position (apart for the Drum and Percussion

tracks). To select the “No chord” option, press F1 to select the

Name part of the Chord, then use the TEMPO/VALUE sec-

tion to select the very last value (C…B, Off).

Note: If you replace a chord with a different one, please remem-

ber that the Lower track will not be automatically changed.

Transport controls

While in Step Mode, you can use various control panel but-

tons to accomplish the editing procedure.

<< or >> (Rewind or Fast Forward)

Use these buttons to move to the previous or following mea-

sure. These commands are effective even if the M(easure)

parameter is not selected.

< or > (Previous or Next Step)

Use these button to go to the previous or next step (1/8, or

192 ticks). If an event is located before the previous or next

step, the locator stops on that event. For example, if you are

positioned on M001.01.000, and no event exists before

M001.01.192, the > button moves to the M001.01.192 loca-

tion. If an event exists on M001.01.010, the > button stops to

the M001.01.010 location.

These commands are effective even if the M(easure) parame-

ter is not selected.

+ < or > (Previous or Next Event)

Keep the SHIFT button pressed while pressing the < or >

button, to move to the previous or next recorded event.

HOW TO DELETE A WHOLE SONG

You can delete a whole Song with the simple SHIFT +

DELETE key sequence.

1. Enter the Backing Sequence mode. You must be in the

main page of the mode. If you are in Record mode, go

back to the Playback mode.

2. Press SHIFT + DELETE.

3. The “Delete Song?” message appears. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

C Maj - /C

Name Type Tension Extension

88 Song operating mode

Transport controls

13. SONG OPERATING MODE

The Song operating mode is the full-featured onboard

sequencer, where you can create from scratch or edit a Song.

You can also use this mode to edit the initial parameters of a

Standard MIDI File, either made with an external sequencer

or with Pa50SD own Song and Backing Sequence modes.

You can save the edited Song as a Standard MIDI File

(“.MID” ﬁle), and playback it either in Song Play, Backing

Sequence or Song mode.

For a practical example of Song editing, see “5 - Editing a

Song” on page 32.

TRANSPORT CONTROLS

While in Song mode, use the SEQ1 transport controls for the

Song playback. See “SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CON-

TROLS - SEQ1 and SEQ2” on page 18 for more informa-

tion).

MASTER VOLUME AND SEQUENCER VOLUME

You can use the MASTER VOLUME and ACC/SEQ VOL-

UME sliders to set the volume. See “Master Volume,

Sequencer Volume, BALANCE” on page 71.

Move the BALANCE slider to the center (or the left) for the

maximum volume of the sequencer (Song mode relies on

Sequencer 1).

THE SONGS AND THE STANDARD MIDI FILE

FORMAT

The native Song format for Pa50SD is the Standard MIDI

File. See “The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format” on

page 70.

When saving a Song as a SMF, an empty measure in automat-

ically inserted to the beginning of the Song. This measure

contains various Song initialization parameters.

When a SMF is loaded, the empty measure is automatically

removed.

FAST TRACK DELETION

When you are in the Main page of the Song Record mode,

and the Song tracks are shown in the display, keep the

DELETE button pressed, and press one of the VOLUME/

VALUE buttons corresponding to the track to delete. The

“Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to delete

the track, or EXIT to abort.

HOW TO DELETE A WHOLE SONG

While in the Main page, you can delete a whole Song, with

the simple SHIFT + DELETE key sequence.

1. Enter the Song mode. You must be in the Main page of

the mode. If you are in Record mode, go back to the

Playback mode.

2. Press SHIFT + DELETE.

3. The “Delete Song?” message appears. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

MAIN PAGE

Press SONG to access this page from another operating

mode.

Note: When switching from Style Play to Song, the Song Setup

is automatically selected, and various track parameters may

change.

Press EXIT/NO to access this page from the Menu or any of

the Song Play edit pages.

To see the Song’s tracks, use the TRK SELECT button to

switch from the Main page to the Tracks pages. Pressed a ﬁrst

time, you will see tracks 1-8 (enlightened TRK SELECT

LED); a second press will show tracks 9-16 (ﬂashing TRK

SELECT LED); pressed again, you will go back to the Main

page (TRK SELECT LED switched off).

Song icon

When on, this icon shows that the instrument is in Song

mode.

Page header

This line shows the selected Song name.

Bar number

This counter shows the current bar number position of the

selected Song.

B (Load Song)

Use these buttons to select a Song (i.e., a Standard MIDI

File). The Song Select page opens, and you can select a Song

(see below “Song Select page”).

C (Save Song)

This command saves the edited Song as a Standard MIDI

File. After pressing this command, the Save Song page

appears (see “Save Song page” on page 90).

D (Select Tempo)

Select this parameter to use the TEMPO/VALUE section to

select the Tempo. When you select this parameter, the VALUE

LED turns off.

Note: The tempo is always record in overwrite mode (old data is

replaced by the new data).

F (Metro)

Use these buttons to turn the metronome on/off during play-

back.

G (Meter)

This non-editable parameter shows the starting meter (or

time signature) of the selected Song.

H (Tempo mode)

This sets the Tempo change mode.

Load Song Metro:Off

Save Song Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

New Song

Song icon Page header Bar number

Song operating mode

Tracks 1-8 page

Man(ual) When the cursor is on the “D (Select Tempo)”

parameter, you can change the Tempo using

the TEMPO/VALUE section controls. The

Song will be played back using the manually

selected tempo.

Auto The Tempo recorded to the Song will be used.

TRACKS 1-8 PAGE

To see and edit tracks 1-8, press TRACK SELECT from the

main page. The TRACK SELECT LED turns on.

Press the TRACK SELECT button twice, to go back to the

main page.

A-H (Tracks 1-8 Programs)

Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 1-8. Use these but-

tons to select, mute/unmute or change the volume of the cor-

responding tracks.

TRACKS 9-16 PAGE

To see and edit tracks 9-16, press TRACK SELECT once from

the Tracks 1-8 page, or twice from the main page. The

TRACK SELECT LED begins ﬂashing.

Press the TRACK SELECT button again, to go back to the

main page.

A-H (Tracks 9-16 Programs)

Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 9-16. Use these but-

tons to select, mute/unmute or change the volume of the cor-

responding tracks.

SONG SELECT PAGE

This page appears when you press PAGE+ or either the B

(Load Song) buttons while you are in the main page.

Press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Song operating

mode, without selecting a Song.

A-C (File, folder)

Move the ﬁle or folder to be selected to the ﬁrst line of the

display. To select a ﬁle, press the F2 (Load) button. To open a

folder, press the F3 (Open) button.

The “ ” symbol identiﬁes a folder.

E-F (Scroll Up)

Scroll the list up.

G-H (Scroll Down)

Scroll the list down.

TEMPO/VALUE section

These controls scroll the list up or down.

F1 (SD)

Press this button after replacing a card in the card drive. The

new card will be read, and the ﬁle list shown on the display

will be updated.

F2 (Load)

Load the Song at the ﬁrst line of the display.

F3 (Open)

Opens the selected folder (ﬁle whose name begins with the

“ ” symbol).

F4 (Close)

Closes the current folder, returning to the parent (“upper”)

Piano1 Piano1

DkStrings Guitar01

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn VoxPad1

MySong

Strings1 VocaEns

DkStrings Bassi

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn Strings2

MySong

BALLADS |

MYSONGS

MYSONG.MID |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Load Song

90 Song operating mode

Save Song page

SAVE SONG PAGE

The new or edited Song is contained in RAM, and is lost

when turning the instrument off. The Song is also lost when

you overwrite it in Backing Sequence Record mode, or when

switching to the Song Play mode. You must save to a card any

Song you wish to preserve. The Song is saved as a Standard

MIDI File (SMF).

Note: When saving a Song as a SMF, an empty measure in

automatically inserted to the beginning of the Song. This mea-

sure contains various Song initialization parameters.

1. If you are in an edit page, press EXIT to go back to the

Main page.

2. Select the Save Song button. The Save Song page

appears.

3. Move the folder where you wish to save your Song to the

ﬁrst line of the display, using the E-F (Scroll Up) and G-

H (Scroll Down) VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls. Press F3 (Open) to open it.

Close the current folder by pressing F4 (Close).

4. When in the selected folder, you can save the Song over

an existing midiﬁle (a ﬁle with a “.MID” extension), or

create a new midiﬁle.

• To overwrite an existing midiﬁle, move it to the ﬁrst

line of the display.

• To create a new midiﬁle, move the

“NEW_NAME.MID” item to the ﬁrst line of the display.

5. When the “NEW_NAME.MID” item is selected, press

one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons. You are

prompted to assign a name to the new ﬁle:

Move the cursor using the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons.

Select a character using the DIAL. Insert a character at

the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button.

Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the

DELETE button.

6. When you have ﬁnished writing a name for the new

midiﬁle, press F2 (Save) to conﬁrm. The “Are you sure?”

message will appear. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT

to abort.

Play/Mute status saved with the Song

When saving a Song, the Play/Mute status is saved with the

Song. This status is preserved when playing back the same

Song in Song Play mode.

Master Transpose saved with the Song

When saving a Song, the Master Transpose value is saved

with the Song. Since this value is saved as System Exclusive

data, it is preserved when playing back the Song in Song Play

mode.

Hint: Since the Master Transpose is a global parameter, loading

a Song with a non-standard transposition may result in

unwanted transposing when loading other Songs that do not

contain their own transposition data. To transpose a Song it is

advisable to use the Edit-Transpose function; you can access this

function by pressing the MENU button and one of the E VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons (see “Page 18 - Edit: Transpose” on

page 100).

You may also lock the Master Transpose for various tracks, to

avoid unwanted transposition. See “Page 2 - Master Transpose”

on page 126 of the Global chapter.

As a general rule, you should use the Master Transpose

(TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel) when you need to

transpose the Realtime tracks together with the Song. You

should use the Edit-Transpose function (Song Edit mode) when

only the Song has to be transposed.

Note: The Master Transpose value is always shown in the upper

right corner of the display:

NEW_NAME.MID

MYSONGS

MYSONG.MID |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Save Song

NEW_NAME.MID

Song operating mode

Realtime Record procedure

REALTIME RECORD PROCEDURE

Here is the general procedure to follow for the Realtime

Recording.

1. Press SONG to enter the Song mode.

2. Press RECORD to enter the Song Record mode.You are

now in the Main page of the Song Record mode, and

you can prepare your recording. (For more details, see

“Song Record page” on page 93).

3. Be sure one of the Overdub or Overwrite recording

options is selected (see “Rec (Record mode)” on

page 93).

4. Set the tempo. There are two ways of changing tempo:

• Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and use the TEMPO/

VALUE controls to change the tempo.

• Move the cursor to the “Sel.Tempo” parameter, and use

the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change tempo.

5. Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Song Tracks 1-8

page.

Press the button again to switch to the Song Tracks 9-16

page.

6. If you like, you can set the tempo again from these

pages: just use the TEMPO/VALUE controls.

7. Assign the right Program to each track.

8. Select the track to put in record. Its status icon will auto-

matically begin ﬂashing.

9. While the status icon is ﬂashing, press PLAY/STOP to

begin recording. Depending on the Metro option you

selected, a 1- or 2-bars precount may play before the

recording actually begins. When it begins, play freely.

• If you selected the Auto Punch recording mode, the

recording will begin only when reaching the Start point.

• If you selected the Pedal Punch recording mode, press

the pedal when you want to begin recording. Press it

again to ﬁnish recording.

Note: The Punch functions will not work on an empty

Song. At least one track must already be recorded.

10. When ﬁnished recording, press PLAY/STOP to stop the

sequencer. Select a different track, and go on recording

the whole Song.

11.When ﬁnished recording the new Song, press RECORD

to exit the Record mode. The Song will be saved in

memory.

Warning: Save the Song to a card, to avoid it is lost when

turning the instrument off.

Note: When exiting the Record mode, the Octave Trans-

pose is automatically reset to “0”.

12. Edit the new Song; press the MENU page, and select the

various edit pages.

STEP RECORD PROCEDURE

The Step Record allows you to create a new Song by entering

the single notes or chords in each track. This is very useful

when transcribing an existing score, or needing a higher

grade of detail, and is particularly suitable to create drum and

percussion tracks.

1. While in the Main screen of the Song mode, press

RECORD to enter the Song Record mode. The Main

page of the Song Record mode will appear.

2. Use the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the “Rec”

(Recording Mode) parameter. Use these buttons, or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls, to select the “Step Dub” (Step

Overdub) or the “StepOwr” (Step Overwrite) recording

mode.

• The Step Overdub mode lets you add events to the

existing events.

• The Step Overwrite mode will overwrite all existing

events.

3. Press SEQ1 PLAY/STOP to turn its LED on, and enter

the Step Record page. (See “Step Record page” on

Rec:Overdub Trk:1 98%

S: E: Metro:On1

Resol: Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

Rec:NewSong

Piano1 Piano1

DkStrings Guitar01

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn VoxPad1

Rec:NewSong

Strings1 VocaEns

DkStrings Bassi

Legato StrngEns2

BrassyHorn Strings2

Rec:NewSong

Rec:Overdub Trk:1 98%

S: E: Metro:On1

Resol: Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

Rec:NewSong

92 Song operating mode

Step Record procedure

page 94 for more information on each parameter of this

page).

The ﬁrst two lines (a) are the latest inserted event. The

second two lines (b) are the event currently in edit,

ready to be inserted.

The “Empty” event marks the beginning of the Song,

when there are no events inserted. It is automatically

inserted when entering the Record mode. It will be

removed when an event is inserted.

4. The “Maaa.bb.ccc” parameter in (b) is the current posi-

tion. This is the place where the note in edit will be

inserted.

• If you don’t want to insert a note at this position,

insert a rest instead, as shown in step 6.

• To jump to the next measure, ﬁlling the remaining

beats with rests, press the >> button.

5. To change the step value, use the NOTE VALUE buttons,

on the lower left area of the control panel.

6. Insert a note, rest or chord at the current position.

• To insert a single note, just play it on the keyboard. The

inserted note length will match the step length. You may

change the velocity and relative duration of the note, by

editing the V (Velocity) and D (Duration) parameters.

See “V (Velocity)” and “D (Duration)” on page 94.

• To insert a rest, just press the REST button. Its length

will match the step value.

• To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one, press

the TIE button. A note will be inserted, tied to the previ-

ous one, with exactly the same name. You don’t need to

play it on the keyboard again.

• To insert a chord or a second voice, see “Chords and

second voices” below.

7. After inserting a new event, you may go back by pressing

the < button. This will delete the previously inserted

event, and set the step in edit again.

8. When ﬁnished recording, press SEQ1 PLAY/STOP to

turn off its LED. The Main page of the Song Record

mode appears again.

9. From the Main page of the Song Record mode, press

RECORD to exit the Record mode. While in the Main

page of the Song mode, you may press SEQ1 PLAY/

STOP to listen to the Song, or select the Save Song com-

mand to save the Song to the card.

Chords and second voices

With Pa50SD, you are not obliged to insert single notes in a

track. There are several ways to insert chords and double

voices. For more information, see the “Chords and second

voices in Step Record mode” section on page 10-60 of the

“Style Record mode” chapter.

Step Owr

M---.--.--- Empty

M001.01.000 Meter: 4/4

key? V:64 D:85%

(a)

(b)

Previous event Event to be inserted

Current position

Waiting for a keystroke…

Step value

Rec:Overdub Trk:1 98%

S: E: Metro:On1

Resol: Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

Rec:NewSong

Song operating mode

Song Record page

SONG RECORD PAGE

While in the Song mode, press RECORD to enter the Song

Record mode. The Song Record page appears.

Rec (Record mode)

Set this parameter to select a recording mode.

Overdub The newly recorded events will be mixed to any

existing events.

Overwrite The newly recorded events will replace any

existing events.

Auto Punch Recording will automatically begin at the “S”

position, and stop at the “E” position (see the

following line).

Note: The Auto Punch function will not work on

an empty Song. At least one track must already

be recorded.

PedalPunch Recording will begin when pressing a pedal set

to the “Punch In/Out” function, and will ﬁnish

when pressing the same pedal again.

Note: The Pedal Punch function will not work

on an empty Song. At least one track must

already be recorded.

StepDub Step Overdub. This recording mode lets you

enter events one at a time, adding events to the

existing events.

StepOwr Step Overwrite. This recording mode lets you

enter events one at a time, overwriting all exist-

ing events.

Trk (Track)

Track in record.

1…16 One of the 16 tracks selected. To select a track,

go to the Track pages (see “Tracks 1-8 page” on

page 89 and “Tracks 9-16 page” on page 89).

S/E (Start/End)

These parameters appear only when the “Auto Punch”

recording mode is selected. They set the starting and ending

points of the Punch recording.

Metro (Metronome)

This is the metronome heard during recording.

Off No metronome click will be heard during

recording. A one-bar precount will be played

before starting recording.

On1 Metronome on, with a one-bar precount

before starting recording.

On2 Metronome on, with a two-bar precount

before starting recording.

Resol (Resolution)

Use this parameter to set the quantization during record-

ing. Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors;

notes played too soon or too later are moved to the nearest

axis of a rhythmic “grid”, set with this parameter, thus

playing perfectly in time.

Hi No quantization applied.

 (1/32)… (1/8)

Grid resolution, in musical values. For

example, when you select 1/16, all notes are

moved to the nearest 1/16 division. When

you select 1/8, all notes are moved to the

nearest 1/8 division.

Meter

This is the meter (or time signature) of the Song. You can edit

this parameter only when the Song is empty, i.e. before you

begin recording anything. To insert a meter change in the

middle of the Song, use the “Insert Measure” function (see

page 13-101).

Sel.Tempo (Select Tempo)

Select this parameter to use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to

set the tempo.

Note: You can always change the Tempo, when other parame-

ters are selected, by keeping the SHIFT button pressed, and

rotating the DIAL.

Note: The tempo is always record in overwrite mode (old data is

replaced by the new data).

Tempo (Tempo mode)

This parameter sets the way tempo events are read.

Record All Tempo changes made during recording will

be recorded to the Master Track.

Auto The Sequencer plays back all recorded Tempo

events. No new Tempo events are recorded.

Manual The latest manual Tempo setting (made using

the TEMPO/VALUE controls) is considered

the current Tempo value. No Tempo change

will be recorded. This is very useful to record

the Song much slower than its actual Tempo.

Rec:Overdub Trk:1 98%

S: E: Metro:On1

Resol: Meter:4/4

Sel.Tempo Tempo:Auto

Rec:NewSong

No quanti-

zation

1/16

1/8

94 Song operating mode

Step Record page

STEP RECORD PAGE

Access this page from the Main page of the Song Record

mode, by selecting the “StepDub” or “StepOwr” recording

mode (“Rec” parameter), and pressing SEQ1 PLAY/STOP.

(a) section

Previously inserted event. You may delete this event, and set it

in edit again, by pressing the < button.

(b) section

Event to be inserted. See the following parameters for infor-

mation on each element of this section.

M (Measure)

This is the position of the event (note, rest or chord) to be

inserted.

Meter

Meter of the current measure. This parameter can’t be edited.

You can set a Meter change by using the Insert function of the

Edit menu, and inserting a new series of measures with a dif-

ferent Meter (see “Page 22 - Edit: Insert Measures” on

page 101).

key?

This is a prompt, asking for a note or chord to be played on

the keyboard, to enter an event on the current step.

Step value

Length of the event to be inserted. Use the NOTE VALUE

buttons, on the lower left area of the control panel, to change

this value.

 … Note value.

Dot (.) Augments the selected note by one half of its

value.

Triplet (3) Makes the selected note a triplet note.

V (Velocity)

Set this parameter before entering a note or chord. This will

be the playing strength (i.e., velocity value) of the event to be

inserted.

KBD Keyboard. You can select this parameter, by

turning all counter-clockwise the dial. When

this option is selected, the playing strength of

the played note is recognized and recorded.

1…127 Velocity value. The event will be inserted with

this velocity value, and the actual playing

strength of the note played on the keyboard

will be ignored.

D (Duration)

Relative duration of the inserted note. The percentage is

always referred to the step value.

50% Staccato.

85% Ordinary articulation.

100% Legato.

Buttons used in Step Record mode

TIE button

Ties the note to be inserted to the previous note.

REST button

Inserts a rest.

NOTE VALUE buttons

Select the step value.

SEQ1 PLAY/STOP button

Exits the Step Record mode.

< (Previous step)

Goes to the previous step, erasing the inserted event.

>> (Fast Forward)

Goes to the next measure, and ﬁll the remaining space with

rests.

Step Owr

M---.--.--- Empty

M001.01.000 Meter: 4/4

key? V:64 D:85%

(a)

(b)

Previous event Event to be inserted

Current position

Waiting for a keystroke…

Step value

Song operating mode

While in any page, press MENU to open the Song edit menu.

This menu gives access to the various Song edit sections.

When in the menu, select an edit section using the VOLUME/

VALUE (A-H) buttons, select an edit page using PAGE +, or

press EXIT to exit the menu.

When in an edit page, press EXIT to go back to the main page

of the Song operating mode.

Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section. Each

edit section groups various edit pages.

EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE

Select an edit section from the Menu, and/or use the PAGE

buttons to reach the desired page.

Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song mode.

All edit pages share the same structure.

Song icon

When on, this icon indicates that the instrument is in Song

mode.

Page header

The header shows the name of the current edit page. Usually

the header is divided in a ﬁrst word, identifying the section

name (e.g., “Mixer:FX Send” is a “Mixer” section page), and a

second word, referring to the page name (e.g. “FX Send”).

Page

This area shows the current page number.

A-H

Each pair of VOLUME/VALUE buttons select a different

track, parameter of command, depending on the edit page.

Track status icons

A series of icons near each track show the track’s status.

Selected track or parameter. When this symbol

appears, you can execute any available opera-

tion on the selected item.

Track in play or already recorded.

(no icon) The track is in mute, or does not contain data.

PAGE 1 - MIXER: VOLUME

Here you can adjust the volume for each of the 16 sequencer

tracks. Press both VOLUME/VALUE button to mute/unmute

the corresponding track.

A muted track remains muted even when selecting a different

Song.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

PAGE 2 - MIXER: PAN

Here you can adjust the pan for each Song track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

Mixer/Tun. Transp/Vel

Effects Del/Cut-Ins

Track Edit Copy

Quantize Event Edit

Song Edit MENU

|||| 090 |||| 090

|||| 090 |||| 092

|||| 090 |||| 086

|||| 090 ||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

Song icon Page header Page number

Track status icons

Section name Page name

Mixer:FX Send

|||| 090 |||| 090

|||| 090 |||| 092

|||| 090 |||| 086

|||| 090 ||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

|||| 090 |||| 090

|||| 090 |||| 092

|||| 090 |||| 086

|||| 090 ||||| 112

Mixer:Volume

C+00 C+00

Mixer:Pan

C+00 C+00

Mixer:Pan

96 Song operating mode

Page 3 - Mixer: FX Block

Pan

-64 Hard Left.

+00 Center.

+63 Hard Right.

Off The direct (uneffected) signal does not go to

the outputs; only the FX signal is heard for this

track.

PAGE 3 - MIXER: FX BLOCK

This page lets you select a pair of effect processor (AB or CD)

for each of the Song track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

PAGE 4 - MIXER: FX SEND A/B (OR C/D)

This page lets you set the level of the track’s direct (unef-

fected) signal going to the A and B, or C and D Internal FX

pair. Go to the previous page (“Page 3 - Mixer: FX Block”) to

select an FX pair.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1-8 to

tracks 9-16.

Here is the edit procedure:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons to select a

track.

2. Use the F1-F4 buttons to select a parameter for that

track.

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the parame-

ter’s value.

Parameters

000 No effect. Only the direct (uneffected) signal

goes to the outputs.

127 100% effect. The direct (uneffected) and

effected signals go to the outputs with the same

level.

PAGE 5 - TUNING: DETUNE

This page is where you can set the ﬁne tuning for each track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

Detune

This is the ﬁne tuning.

-64 Lowest pitch.

0 Standard tuning.

+63 Highest pitch.

AB AB

Mixer:FX Block

AB AB

Mixer:FX Block

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:127 B:020 A:100 B:050

A:110 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

Mixer:FXSend

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:127 B:020 A:100 B:050

A:110 B:050 A:100 B:050

A:100 B:050 A:100 B:050

Mixer:FXSend

+OO +OO

Tuning:Detune

+OO +OO

Tuning:Detune

Song operating mode

Page 6 - Tuning: Scale

PAGE 6 - TUNING: SCALE

This page lets you program the alternative scale for the Song

tracks.

Scale

Alternative scale for the Song tracks. See “Scales” on page 227

for a list of available scales. To enable/disable the alternative

scale for each Song track, see “Page 7 - Tuning: PitchBend/

Scale” on page 97.

Key

Parameter required for some Scales, when you should set a

preferred key.

Note

Note in edit, to be detuned. This parameter can be accessed

when a User Scale is selected.

Detune

Note detune, compared to the standard Equal tuning. This

parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected.

PAGE 7 - TUNING: PITCHBEND/SCALE

This page lets you program the Pitch Bend range for the Song

tracks. Furthermore, it lets you activate/deactivate the alter-

native scale for each track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

PB(end)

This parameters shows the Pitch Bend range for each track,

in semitones.

01…12 Maximum positive/negative pitchbend range

(in semitones). 12 = ±1 octave.

Off No pitchbend allowed.

Sc(ale)

This parameter lets you activate/deactivate the alternative

scale for each track. (See “Page 6 - Tuning: Scale” on page 97

for more information on selecting an alternative scale).

Yes The track is tuned according to the alternative

scale.

No The track is tuned according to the Global

scale (see “Scale” on page 125).

PAGE 8 - FX: A/B SELECT

This page lets you select the A and B effects. Usually, the A

effect is a reverb, while the B effect is a modulating effect.

Standard MIDI Files usually require two effects only. You can,

however, assign all four effects to a Song (see “Page 3 - Mixer:

FX Block” on page 96).

Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the

default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the

Song, change the effects, then start the Song again. Save the

Song to permanently change the effects.

A, B

Effects assigned to the A and B effect processors. Usually, A is

the reverb, while B is the modulating effect (chorus, ﬂanger,

delay…). For a list of the available effects, see “Effects” on

page 175.

ModTrk (Modulating Track)

Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modu-

late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a

physical controller.

B>Asend (B>A Send)

Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect.

PAGE 9 - FX: C/D SELECT

This page lets you select the C and D effects. Usually, the C

effect is a reverb, while the D effect is a modulating effect.

Standard MIDI Files usually require two effects only. You can,

however, assign all four effects to a Song (see “Page 3 - Mixer:

FX Block” on page 96).

Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the

default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the

Scale:User

Key:C

Note:C#

Detune:+63

Tuning:Scale

PB:02 Sc:N PB:02 Sc:N

Tuning:PB/Scale

PB:02 Sc:N PB:02 Sc:N

Tuning:PB/Scale

A:02 B:89

Compressor Rev-Gate

ModTrk:Up1 B>Asend:127

FX:A/B Select

C:02 D:89

Compressor Rev-Gate

ModTrk:Up1 D>Csend:127

FX:C/D Select

98 Song operating mode

Page 10 - FX: A editing

Song, change the effects, then start the Song again. Edit the Song

in Song mode to permanently change the effects.

C, D

Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors. Usually, C is

the reverb, while D is the modulating effect (chorus, ﬂanger,

delay…). For a list of the available effects, see “Effects” on

page 175.

ModTrk (Modulating Track)

Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modu-

late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a

physical controller.

D>Csend (D>C Send)

Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C

effect.

PAGE 10 - FX: A EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect

(usually a reverb).

Use the E-F and G-H VOLUME/VALUE button pairs to scroll

the parameter list.

Use the A-D VOLUME/VALUE button pairs to select and edit

a parameter.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to edit the selected param-

eter.

Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the

default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the

Song, change the effects, then start the Song again. Edit the Song

in Song mode to permanently change the effects.

Parameters

See “Effects” on page 175 for a list of available parameters for

each effect type.

PAGE 11 - FX: B EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect

(usually a modulating effect). For more details, see “Page 10 -

FX: A editing” above.

PAGE 12 - FX: C EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect.

For more details, see “Page 10 - FX: A editing” above.

PAGE 13 - FX: D EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect.

For more details, see “Page 10 - FX: A editing” above.

PAGE 14 - TRACK: EASY EDIT

In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Pro-

grams assigned to each track.

Note: All values are relative to the value of the original Pro-

gram.

You can also change the volume for each class of Drums and

Percussions, if the selected track is set in Drum mode (see

below “Page 15 - Track: Mode”).

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

Here is the edit procedure:

1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (A-H) buttons to select a

track.

2. Use the F1-F4 buttons to select a sound parameter, or its

value. (For the Drum and Percussion tracks, see below

the “Drum tracks” section).

3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the sound

parameter or its value.

Parameters

Attack Attack time. This is the time during which the

sound goes from zero (at the moment when

you strike a key) to it’s maximum level.

Decay Decay time. Time to go from the ﬁnal Attack

level to the beginning of the Release.

Release Release time. This is the time during which the

sound goes from the sustaining (or Decay)

phase, to zero. The Release is triggered by

releasing a key.

Cutoff Filter cutoff. This sets the sound brightness.

Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to deﬁne the width of

the frequency range affected by the Filter.

Vibrato Rate Speed of the Vibrato.

Vibrato Depth

Intensity of the Vibrato.

Vibrato Delay

Delay time before the Vibrato begins, after the

sound starts.

Rev Time [sec]: 3.07 |

High Damp [%]:0

Pre Dly [ms]:0

Pre Dly Thru [%]:0 |

FX:A Edit (Sq1)

Attack:0 Attack:0

Track:Easy Edit

Attack:0 Attack:0

Track:Easy Edit

Song operating mode

Page 15 - Track: Mode

Drum tracks

When a track is set in Drum Mode (like the Drum and Per-

cussion tracks), you can adjust the volume for each of the

Drum and Percussion categories.

Kick V Kick drums volume.

Snare V Snare drums volume.

Tom V Toms volume.

HiHat V Hi-Hat volume.

CymbalV Ride, Crash and other cymbals volume.

Percus1V “Classic” percussion set volume.

Percus2V “Ethnic” percussion set volume.

SFX V Special effects volume.

Reset

You can reset the parameters’ value by keeping the SHIFT

button pressed, while pressing the selected track VOLUME/

VALUE button. When you press the above combination, the

Reset window appears:

Press ENTER/YES to reset the currently selected track. Keep

SHIFT pressed, and press ENTER/YES, to reset all tracks.

Press EXIT/NO to abort and leave all parameters unchanged.

PAGE 15 - TRACK: MODE

This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each track.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

Parameters

Drum This is a Drum/Percussion track. No Master or

Octave Transpose applies to this track. You can

set a different volume for each class of percus-

sive instruments (“Page 14 - Track: Easy edit”

on page 98).

Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic, i.e. they can

play more than one note at the same time.

Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic, i.e. each

new note stops the previous note.

Mono Right A Mono track, but with priority assigned to

the rightmost (highest) note.

PAGE 16 - TRACK: INTERNAL/EXTERNAL

This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each

track. It is very useful to let a Song track drive an external

expander.

Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song

tracks 1-8, Song tracks 9-16, and back again.

Parameters

Internal The track plays the sounds generated by the

internal sound engine. It does not play an

external instrument connected to the MIDI

OUT.

External The track plays an external instrument con-

nected to the MIDI OUT. It does not play the

internal sounds, thus saving polyphony.

When a track is set to “External”, a strings of

transmitted Control Change and Program

Change data is shown instead of the Program

name assigned to the track. In the following

example, CC#0 is the Control Change 0 (Bank

Select MSB), CC#32 is the Control Change 32

(Bank Select LSB), PC is the Program Change.

Both The track plays both the internal sounds and

an external instrument connected to the MIDI

OUT.

RESET NO=Cancel

YES=Trk SHFT+YES=All

Poly Poly

Track:Mode

Poly Poly

Drum Poly

Poly Poly

Track:Mode

Both Both

Both External

Both Both

Track:Int/Ext

Both Both

Both External

Both Both

Track:Int/Ext

121- 3- 0

CC#0 CC#32 PC

100 Song operating mode

Page 17 - Edit: Quantize

PAGE 17 - EDIT: QUANTIZE

The quantize function corrects any rhythm error after

recording.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Trk (Track)

Use this parameter to select a track.

All All tracks selected.

1…16 Selected track.

Resol (Resolution)

This parameter sets the quantization after recording. For

example, when you select 1/8a, all notes are moved to the

nearest 1/8 division. When you select 1/4, all notes are moved

to the nearest 1/4 division.

 (1/32)… (1/4)

Grid resolution, in musical values. An “a” after

the value means no swing. A “b…f ” after the

value means swing-quantization.

S / E (Start/End)

Use these parameters to set the starting (S) and ending (E)

points of the range to quantize.

If you wish to select a four-measure sequence starting at the

beginning of the Song, the Start will be positioned at

1.01.000, and the End at 5.01.000.

Bottom / Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range to quantize. If you select the same note as the

Bottom and Top parameters, you can select a single percus-

sive instrument in a Drum track.

Note: These parameters are available only when a Drum track

is selected.

PAGE 18 - EDIT: TRANSPOSE

Here you can transpose the Song, a track or a part of a track.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Trk (Track)

Use this parameter to select a track.

All All tracks selected (apart for Drum tracks).

1…16 Selected track.

Value

Value of the transpose (in semitones).

S / E (Start/End)

Use these parameters to set the starting (S) and ending (E)

points of the range to transpose.

If you wish to select a four-measure sequence starting at the

beginning of the Song, the Start will be positioned at

1.01.000, and the End at 5.01.000.

Bottom / Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range to transpose. If you select the same note as the

Bottom and Top parameters, you can select a single percus-

sive instrument in a Drum track.

PAGE 19 - EDIT: VELOCITY

Here you can change the Velocity value for the notes.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Trk (Track)

Use this parameter to select a track.

All All tracks selected.

1…16 Selected track.

Value

Velocity change value.

S / E (Start/End)

Use these parameters to set the starting (S) and ending (E)

points of the range to edit.

Trk:1

Resol:

S001.01.000 E001.01.192

Bottom:C-1 Top: G9

Edit:Quantize

No quanti-

zation

1/8

1/4

Trk:1

Value: +0

S001-01-000 E001-01-192

Bottom:G-1 Top:C8

Edit:Transpose

Trk:1

Value: +0

S001-01-000 E001-01-192

Bottom:G-1 Top:C8

Edit:Velocity

101

Song operating mode

Page 20 - Edit: Delete

If you wish to select a four-measure sequence starting at the

beginning of the Song, the Start will be positioned at

1.01.000, and the End at 5.01.000.

Bottom / Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range to edit. If you select the same note as the Bottom

and Top parameters, you can select a single percussive instru-

ment in a Drum track.

PAGE 20 - EDIT: DELETE

This page is where you can delete MIDI events from the

Song.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Trk (Track)

Use this parameter to select a track.

All All tracks selected.

1…16 Selected track.

Master Master track. This is where the Tempo, Scale

and Effect events are recorded.

Ev (Event)

Type of MIDI event to delete.

All All events. The measures will not be removed

from the Song.

Note All notes in the selected range.

Dup.Note All duplicate notes. When two notes with the

same pitch are encountered on the same tick,

the one with the lowest velocity is deleted.

A.Touch After Touch events.

P.Bend Pitch Bend events.

PrChange Program Change events, excluding the bun-

dled Control Change #00 (Bank Select MSB)

and #32 (Bank Select LSB).

C.Change All Control Change events, for example Bank

Select, Modulation, Damper, Soft Pedal…

CC00/32…CC127

Single Control Change events. Double Control

Change numbers (like 00/32) are MSB/LSB

bundles.

S / E (Start/End)

Use these parameters to set the starting (S) and ending (E)

points of the range to delete.

If you wish to select a four-measure sequence starting at the

beginning of the Song, the Start will be positioned at

1.01.000, and the End at 5.01.000.

Bottom / Top

Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key-

board range to delete. If you select the same note as the Bot-

tom and Top parameters, you can select a single percussive

instrument in a Drum track.

Note: These parameters are available only when the All or Note

options are selected.

PAGE 21 - EDIT: CUT MEASURES

In this page you can cut measures from the Song.

After selecting the Start and Length parameters, press ENTER

to execute. The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press

ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

After the cut, the following measure are moved back, to ﬁll

the cut measures.

Start

First measure where to begin cutting.

Length

Number of measures to be cut.

PAGE 22 - EDIT: INSERT MEASURES

In this page you can insert measures in the Song. You can also

use this function to insert measures with a different meter

(time signature).

After selecting the Meter, Start and Length parameters, press

ENTER to execute. The “Are you sure?” message will appear.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Note: You cannot append measures after the end of the Song. To

append measures use the Record or Copy function.

Note: You cannot use this function on an empty Song.

Meter

Meter of the measures to be inserted.

Start

First of the inserted measures.

Length

Number of measures to be inserted.

Trk:1

Ev:All

S001-01-000 E001-01-192

Bottom:G-1 Top:C8

Edit:Delete

Start: 1 Length:1

Edit:Cut Meas.

Meter: 4/4

Start: 1 Length:1

Edit:Ins.Meas.

102 Song operating mode

Page 23 - Edit: Copy

PAGE 23 - EDIT: COPY

Here you can copy tracks or phrases.

After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to execute.

The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Note: If you copy too many events on the same “tick”, the “Too

many events!” message appears, and the copy operation is

aborted.

Mode

Use this parameter to select the Copy mode.

Merge Copied data are merged with the data at the

target position.

Overwrite Copied data replace all data at the target posi-

tion.

Warning: Deleted data cannot be recovered!

FromTrk (From Track)

ToTrk (To Track)

Use these parameters to select the source and target track to

copy.

All All tracks. The target track cannot be selected.

1…16 Selected source and target tracks.

S/E

The left “S/E” parameters are the starting and ending mea-

sure to copy. For example, if S=1 and E=4, the ﬁrst four mea-

sures are copied.

The right “S” parameter is the ﬁrst of the target measures.

Number of times the copy must be executed.

PAGE 24 - EVENT EDIT

Enter this page from the Menu of the Song mode. The Event

Edit page allows you to edit each event in a single track. See

“Event Edit procedure” on page 104 for more information on

the event editing procedure.

Trk (Track)

Track in edit. To select a different track, press one of the A

VOLUME/VALUE buttons to open the Go To Track window.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a track, and press

ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

1…16 One of the ordinary tracks of the Song. These

tracks contains musical data, like notes and

controllers.

Master This is a special track, containing Tempo

changes, Meter changes, Scale and Transpose

data, and the effect parameters.

Position

Position of the event shown in the display, expressed in the

form ‘aaa.bb.ccc’:

• ‘aaa’ is the measure

• ‘bb’ is the beat

• ‘ccc’ is the tick (each quarter beat = 384 ticks)

You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different

position.

Ev (Event)

Type and values of the event shown in the display. Depending

on the selected event, the value may change. This parameter

also shows the (non-editable) “End Of Track” marking, when

the end of the track is reached.

Here are the events contained in ordinary tracks (1-16).

Mode:Merge

FromTrk:All ToTrk:All

S:1 E:1 S:1 T1

Edit:Copy

Event First value Second value

Note Note name Velocity

Prog Program Change number –

Ctrl Control Change number Control Change value

Bend Bending value –

Aftt Mono (Channel) After-

touch value

–

PAft Note to which the After-

touch is applied

Poly Aftertouch value

Trk: 1

Position: 001.01.000 |

Ev: Note G1 94

Lenght:000.00.110 |

Event Edit

Event Type First value Second value

Go to Track: 1

Enter=Ok Exit=Cancel

103

Song operating mode

Page 25 - Event Filter

And here are the events contained in the Master track.

To change the event type, use the C VOLUME/VALUE but-

tons to select the Event line, then use the same buttons or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a different event type.

To select and edit the event’s value, use the F3 and F4 func-

tion keys, and use the G/VOLUME/VALUE buttons or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls.

Length

Length of the selected Note event. The value format is the

same as the Position value.

Note: If you change a length of “000.00.000” to a different

value, you can’t go back to the original value. This rather

uncommon zero-length value may be found in the drum and

percussion tracks of Songs made in Backing Sequence mode.

Transport, navigation and editing controls

E/F and H VOLUME/VALUE buttons

These buttons are the “Scroll to previous event” and “Scroll to

next event” controls. They corresponds to the scroll arrows

shown on the screen.

G VOLUME/VALUE buttons

Use these buttons to select the corresponding parameter

value area.

F3 and F4 buttons

After selecting the parameter value area with the G VOL-

UME/VALUE buttons, use these buttons to select, respec-

tively, the ﬁrst and second value of the event in edit.

SEQ1 PLAY/STOP button

Press PLAY/STOP to listen to the Song in edit. Press PLAY/

STOP again to stop it.

SHIFT + << or >>

Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the << or >> but-

ton to open the Go to Measure window.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a measure, and

press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

SHIFT + PAUSE

While the sequencer is running, keep the SHIFT button

pressed, and press the PAUSE button to display the event that

is currently playing. This is called the Catch Locator function.

INSERT

Press the INSERT button to insert a new event at the current

shown Position. The default values are Type = Note, Pitch =

C4, Velocity = 100, Length = 192.

Note: You can’t insert new events in an empty, non-recorded

Song. To insert an event, you must ﬁrst insert some empty mea-

sures. To use the Insert function, press MENU and one of the F

VOLUME/VALUE buttons, then press the PAGE+ button twice.

DELETE

Press the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the

display.

PAGE 25 - EVENT FILTER

This page is where you can select the event types to be shown

in the Event Edit page. You can access this page by pressing

the PAGE+ button while in the Event Edit page.

Turn On the ﬁlter for all event types you do not wish to see in

the Event Edit page.

Note Notes.

Prog Program Change values.

Ctrl Control Change events.

T/Meter Tempo and Meter changes (Master Track

only).

Aftt Mono (Channel) Aftertouch events.

PAft Poly Aftertouch events.

Bend Pitch Bend events.

PaCtl Controls exclusive of the Pa50SD, like the FX

and Scale settings. These controls are recorded

to the Master Track, and saved as System

Exclusive data.

Event First value Second value

Tempo Tempo change –

Volume Master Volume value –

Meter Meter change(a)

(a) Meter changes can’t be edited or inserted. To insert a Meter

change, use the Insert function in the Edit section and insert a

series of measures with the new meter. Existing data can then be

copied or entered to these measures

–

Scale One of the available pre-

set Scales

Root note for

the selected

Scale

UScale (User

Scale)

One of the available

User Scales

Root note for

the selected

Scale

QT (Quarter

Tone)

Altered note Note alter-

ation(b)

(b) To edit the Quarter Tone settings, select the ﬁrst value, then

select the scale’s degree to edit. Edit the second value to change

the tuning of the selected note of the scale.

QT Clear (Quar-

ter Tone Clear-

ing)

Reset of all Scale

changes

–

FXType One of the four avail-

able FX processors Effect number(c)

default settings will be assigned to this event.

FXSend Feedback Send (B>A or

D>C)

Feedback send

level

Go to Measure: 1

Enter=Ok Exit=Cancel

Note: Off MTch: Off

Prog: Off PTch: Off

Ctrl: Off Bend: Off

T/Meter: Off PaCtl: Off

Edit:Ev.Filter

104 Song operating mode

Event Edit procedure

EVENT EDIT PROCEDURE

The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single

MIDI event of the selected track. You can, for example,

replace a note with a different one, or change its playing

strength. Here is the general event editing procedure.

1. While in the Main page of the Song mode, load the Song

to edit (see “Main page” on page 88). If a Song is already

loaded or just recorded, this step is not needed.

2. Press MENU, and use one of the H VOLUME/VALUE

buttons to select the Event Edit section. The Event Edit

page appears (see “Page 24 - Event Edit” on page 102 for

more information).

3. Press SEQ1 PLAY/STOP to listen to the Song. Press

SEQ1 PLAY/STOP again to stop it.

4. Press PAGE+ to go to the Event Filter page, and turn

“Off” the ﬁlter for the event types you wish to see in the

display (see “Page 25 - Event Filter” on page 103 for

more information).

5. Press PAGE- to go back to the Event Edit page.

6. Press the A VOLUME/VALUE button (Trk), to select the

track to edit. The Go To Track window appears.

Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a track, and

press ENTER to conﬁrm (or EXIT to abort).

7. The list of events contained in the selected track will

appear in the display.

For more information on the event types and their val-

ues, see “Page 24 - Event Edit” below.

8. Use the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the Posi-

tion line. Use these buttons or the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols to change the event’s position.

9. Use the C VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the Event

line. You may use the C VOLUME/VALUE buttons or

the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the event type.

Use the G VOLUME/VALUE buttons, and the F3 and F4

function keys to respectively select the ﬁrst and second

value of the parameter. Use the G VOLUME/VALUE

buttons or the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the

selected value.

10. In the case of a Note event, use the D VOLUME/VALUE

buttons to select the Length line, and use the same but-

tons, or the TEMPO/VALUE controls, to change the

event’s length.

• After having modiﬁed the shown event, you may scroll

to the next event with the H VOLUME/VALUE buttons

(Scroll to next), or to the previous event with the E/F

VOLUME/VALUE buttons (Scroll to previous).

• You may use the SHIFT + << or >> shortcut to go to a

different measure (see “SHIFT + << or >>” on

page 103)

• While the sequencer is running, you may use the

SHIFT + PAUSE shortcut to move the current event in

the display (see “SHIFT + PAUSE” on page 103).

• As described in step 3, you may press SEQ1 PLAY/

STOP to listen to the Song, and press SEQ1 PLAY/STOP

again to stop the sequencer.

11.Use the INSERT button to insert an event at the Position

shown in the display (a Note event with default values

will be inserted). Use the DELETE button to delete the

event shown in the display.

12. When the editing is complete, you may select a different

track (go to step 6).

13. When ﬁnished editing the whole Song, press EXIT to go

back to the Main page of the Song mode, and select the

Save Song command to save the Song the card. See “Save

Song page” on page 90 for more information on saving a

Song.

Trk: 1

Position: 001.01.000 |

Ev: Note G1 94

Lenght:000.00.110 |

Event Edit

Note: Off MTch: Off

Prog: Off PTch: Off

Ctrl: Off Bend: Off

T/Meter: Off PaCtl: Off

Edit:Ev.Filter

Go to Track: 1

Enter=Ok Exit=Cancel

Trk: 1

Position: 001.01.000 |

Ev: Note G1 94

Lenght:000.00.110 |

Event Edit

Position: 001.01.001

Measure Beat Tick

Event Type First value Second value

Ev: Note G1 94

Lenght:000.00.000

Measure Beat Tick

105

Program operating mode

Main page

14. PROGRAM OPERATING MODE

The Program operating mode is where you can listen to

individual Programs, and edit them.

To select a Program, see the “Basic operations” chapter.

In this mode, the selected Program can always be played

across the full keyboard range.

To automatically select the Program to be assigned to the

last selected track, keep the SHIFT button pressed, and

press the PROGRAM button.

Hint: This is useful to see the Bank Select/Program Change

numbers when programming a Song on an external sequencer.

Note: The Program uses the same Scale of the latest selected Per-

formance or STS.

MAIN PAGE

Here is the main page of the Program operating mode.

Program icon

When turned on, this icon shows that the instrument is in

Program mode.

Page header

This line shows the selected Program name. Use the TEMPO/

VALUE controls, or the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE sec-

tion to select a Program. (See “Selecting a Program” on

page 26 for more information).

Tempo

This is the tempo of Sequencer 1. The Tempo is one of the

AMSs (see “AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) list” on

page 123). Use the SHIFT + DIAL combination to change it.

A (Group)

This non-editable parameter shows which group the Pro-

gram is included into. A group is the equivalent of a PRO-

GRAM/PERFORMANCE button.

B (CC00)

This non-editable parameter shows the value of the Control

Change (CC) 00 message (or Bank Select MSB) for the

selected Program.

C (CC32)

This non-editable parameter shows the value of the Control

Change (CC) 32 message (a.k.a. Bank Select LSB) for the

selected Program.

D (PC)

This non-editable parameter shows the value of the Program

Change (PC) message for the selected Program. Values are in

the standard 0-127 MIDI numbering format.

Note: Some manufacturers could use the 1-128 numbering sys-

tem; when connecting your Pa50SD to an instrument of this

kind, increment the PC value by 1 unit.

Effects

In Program mode, the Program uses its own effects instead of

relying on A-D effects. Two effect processors (FX1 and FX2)

are available.

The MIDI channel

In Program mode, Pa50SD receives and transmits on the

same channel of the Upper 1 track. If the Global channel is

assigned, notes can be received also on this channel. See

“Page 6 - MIDI IN Channels” on page 127 and “Page 10 -

MIDI OUT Channels” on page 129 for more information.

SOUND PROGRAMS AND DRUM PROGRAMS

Pa50SD features two different kinds of Programs:

• Sound Programs. These are normal instrument Pro-

grams, like pianos, strings, basses.

• Drum Programs. These are drum and percussion kits,

where each note of the keyboard is a different percussive

instrument. You can ﬁnd Drum Programs in the DRUM

KIT and USER DK banks.

Before pressing MENU to enter the edit environment, you

should select a Program of the type you wish to edit or create.

Notes pointing to special Drum Program features are marked

by the icon.

While in any other page of the Program operative mode,

press MENU to open the Program edit menu. This menu

gives access to the various Program edit sections.

When in the menu, select an edit section using the VOLUME/

VALUE (A-G) buttons, select an edit page using PAGE +, or

press EXIT to exit the menu.

When in an edit page, press EXIT to go back to the main page

of the Program operating mode.

Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section. Each

edit section groups various edit pages.

EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE

Select an edit section from the Menu, and/or use the PAGE

buttons to reach the desired page.

Group:Piano

MIDI CC00:121

CC32:3

PC: 0

GrandPiano

Program icon Page header

Tempo



Basic Amp

Samples LFOs

Pitch Effects

Filter

Prog Edit MENU

106 Program operating mode

The Compare function

Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Program

mode.

All edit pages share the same structure.

Program icon

When switched on, this icon shows that the instrument is in

Program mode.

Page header

The header shows the name of the current edit page.

Oscillator in edit

When in an edit page where selecting an oscillator is

required, this area shows the selected oscillator. Use the F1-F4

buttons to select one of the four available oscillators.

Page number

This area shows the current page number.

Parameters

Select an edit parameter using the A-D VOLUME/VALUE

buttons. You can scroll the parameter list using the E-F

(Scroll Up) and G-H (Scroll Down) VOLUME/VALUE but-

tons.

Parameter value

Use the A-D VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the TEMPO/

VALUE controls, to change the parameter value.

THE COMPARE FUNCTION

While in edit, you can compare the current Program with its

original values. You cannot edit the Program while you are in

Compare mode.

• Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press ENTER to

enter the Compare function. The PROGRAM LED

begins ﬂashing. Play on the keyboard to listen to the

original Program.

• Press SHITF + ENTER again to exit the Compare mode

and return to the edited Program.

HOW TO SELECT OSCILLATORS

While in an edit page requiring an oscillator to be selected for

editing, use the F1-F4 buttons to select one of the available

oscillators.

ERASE PROGRAM/OSCILLATOR

You can initialize any parameter value, by using one of the

following shortcuts:

• While in the Basic page, keep the SHIFT button pressed,

and press the DELETE button to initialize the whole

Program to a default status.

• While in an edit page where the “Osc” abbreviation

appears in the upper right area of the display, keep the

SHIFT button pressed, and press the DELETE button to

initialize the currently selected oscillator to a default sta-

tus

After you press the shortcut, the “Init osc?” message appears.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

THE ‘WRITE’ WINDOW

This page appears when you press the WRITE button. Here

you can save the Program into a User Program location in

memory.

1. Select a name and a location, then press ENTER to save

the Program.

2. The “Are you sure?” message appears. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Warning: If you write over an existing User Program, the

Program will be deleted and replaced by the one you are

saving (“overwrite”). Please save to card any Program you

don’t want to lose.

Name

Use this parameter to change the Program’s name. Press the

right A VOLUME/VALUE button to enter editing. Modify the

name using the UP/DOWN buttons to move the cursor, and

the DIAL to select a character. Press INSERT to insert a char-

acter at the cursor position, or DELETE to delete it

To (Location number)

Use the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select a different User

Program location in memory. Otherwise, select this parame-

ter and use the VOLUME/VALUE controls to select the loca-

tion.

Note: You can’t save over a Factory Program location.

PAGE 1 - BASIC

Here you can make basic settings for the Program, such as

basic oscillator settings, the oscillator count, and the poly-

phonic mode.

Selected: Osc1

MS Hi Bank/Num: ROM

L>AcousticPiano 0

[H] Reverse: No

Samples |Osc1

Program icon Page header Page number

Parameters

Oscillator in edit

Parameters value

Name: GrandPiano

To: U1-01 <empty>

WRITE to:

Oascillators: 2

Mode: Poly

Single Trigger: No

Legato: No

Basic

107

Program operating mode

Page 2 - Sample (Sound Programs)

Oscillators

Use this parameter to specify the basic Program type;

whether it will use one or more oscillators (up to four).

Drum Programs use only one oscillator.

1…4 Number of oscillators the Program will use.

The total amount of polyphony varies depend-

ing on the number of oscillators used by the

Program (a maximum of 62 with only 1 oscil-

lator, or a maximum of 15 with 4 oscillators).

Mode

This is the polyphonic mode of the Program.

Poly The Program will play polyphonically, allow-

ing you play chords.

Mono The Program will play monophonically, pro-

ducing only one note at a time.

Single Trigger

This parameter is available when the “Mode” parameter is set

to Poly.

Yes When the same note is played repeatedly, the

previous note will be silenced before the next

note is sounded, so that the notes do not over-

lap.

No When the same note is played repeatedly, the

previous note will not be silenced before the

next note is sounded.

Legato

This parameter is available when the “Mode” parameter is set

to Mono.

Yes Legato is on. When multiple note-on’s occur,

the ﬁrst note-on will retrigger the sound, and

the second and subsequent note-on’s will not

retrigger.

When legato is on, multiple note-on’s will not

retrigger the voice. If one note is already on

and another note is turned on, the ﬁrst voice

will continue sounding. The oscillator sound,

envelope, and LFO will not be reset, and only

the pitch of the oscillator will be updated. This

setting is effective for wind instrument sounds

and analog synth-type sounds.

No Legato is off. Notes will always be retriggered

when note-on occurs.

When legato is off, multiple note-on’s will

retrigger the voice at each note-on. The oscilla-

tor sound, envelope, and LFO will be reset

(and retriggered) according to the settings of

the Program.

Note: If “Legato” is On, certain multisamples or keyboard loca-

tions may produce an incorrect pitch.

Priority

This parameter is available when the “Mode” parameter is set

to Mono. It speciﬁes which note will be given priority to play

when two or more notes are played simultaneously.

Low Lowest note will take priority.

High Highest note will take priority.

Last Last note will take priority.

PAGE 2 - SAMPLE (SOUND PROGRAMS)

The multisample(s) (waveform) on which the Program will

be based can be selected here for each of the four oscillators.

Each oscillator can use 1 or 2 multisamples, each one

assigned to the High or Low layer.

The internal Flash-ROM contains 340 different multisamples

(preset multisamples).

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

MS Hi/Lo Bank/Num

Use these parameters to select a different multisample for

each of the High and Low layers. You can use velocity to

switch between the two multisamples. Reverse, Offset and

Level can be adjusted independently for the High and Low

multisamples.

The ﬁrst line shows the bank (ROM), while the second line is

for selecting the multisample. The Program number appears

at the end of the second line.

The multisample you select for the High layer will be trig-

gered by velocities higher than the value of the “Velocity

Switch” parameter (see page 14-108). If you do not wish to

use velocity switching, set the switch to a value of 001, and

select only the High multisample.

Note: Each multisample has an upper limit, and may not pro-

duce sound when played above that limit.

[H/L] Reverse

The multisample will be played in reverse. In the case of

Flash-ROM multisamples that were originally speciﬁed to

loop, the multisample will be played back in “one-shot”

reverse mode. If the multisample was originally set to reverse,

it will playback without change.

Yes The multisample will playback in reverse.

No The multisample will play back normally.

[H/L] Use Offset

These parameters specify the point where the multisample(s)

will begin to play. For some multisamples this parameter will

not be available.

Yes The sound will begin from the offset location

pre-determined for each multisample.

No The sound will start from the beginning of the

multisample waveform.

[H/L] Level

These parameters specify the level of each multisample.

0…127 Multisample level.

Note: Depending on the multisample, high settings of this

parameter may cause the sound to distort when a chord is

played. If this occurs, lower the level.



Selected: Osc1

MS Hi Bank/Num: ROM

L>AcousticPiano 0

[H] Reverse: No

Samples |Osc1

108 Program operating mode

Page 2 - DK Samples (Drum Programs)

Velocity Switch

This is the velocity value dividing the High and Low layers for

the selected oscillator. Notes struck harder than this value

will be played by the High multisample.

V-Zone Top/Bottom (Velocity Zone)

Here you can specify the velocity range for the selected oscil-

lator.

Note: You cannot set the Bottom Velocity higher than the Top

Velocity, nor the Top Velocity lower than the Bottom Velocity.

0…127 Assigned velocity.

Octave

Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the selected oscilla-

tor in octave units. The normal octave of the multisample is

“0”.

-2…+1 Octave transposition.

Transpose

Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the selected oscilla-

tor in semitone steps over a range of ±1 octave.

-12…+12 Transposition in semitones.

Tune

Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the sample in one-

cent steps (a semitone is 100 cents) over a range of ±1 octave.

-1200…+1200

Fine-tune value in cents.

Delay (ms)

This parameter sets a delay time from the note-on to the real

beginning of the sound. With a setting of KeyOff, the sound

will begin when note-off occurs. This is useful to create

sounds such as the “click” that is heard when a harpsichord

note is released. In this case, set the “Sustain Level” parame-

ter to 0 (see page 14-115).

Key Off The sound will begin when the note is released.

0…5000 Delay time in milliseconds.

PAGE 2 - DK SAMPLES (DRUM PROGRAMS)

This page appears when you edit a Drum Program. Here you

can select a different percussive sample for each layer (High

and Low) on each key.

Key

Key in edit. You can press a key on the keyboard to select a

key.

Assigned

Use this parameter to turn the sample on/off.

Yes The sample is assigned to the selected key.

No The sample is not assigned. The sample

assigned to the next highest assigned key is

used instead.

MS Hi/Lo Bank/Num

Use these parameters to select a different multisample (drum

kit) for each of the High and Low layers. For more informa-

tion, see “MS Hi/Lo Bank/Num” on page 107.

[H/L] Level

These parameters specify the level of each multisample. For

more information, see “[H/L] Level” on page 107.

[H/L] Transpose

These parameters transpose the selected multisample. Use

them to change the pitch of the selected key.

0 No transposition applied.

-64…+63 Transpose value in semitones.

[H/L] Tune

Use these parameters to ﬁne-tune the assigned sample.

0 No ﬁne-tuning.

-99…+99 Fine-tuning value in cents (1/100 of a semi-

tone).

[H/L] Reverse

The multisample will be played in reverse. For more informa-

tion see “[H/L] Reverse” on page 107.

[H/L] Use Offset

These parameters specify the point where the multisample(s)

will begin to play. For more information see “[H/L] Use Off-

set” on page 107.

[H/L] Cutoff

These parameters set the cutoff frequency for the ﬁlter

applied to the selected sample.

[H/L] Resonance

These parameters set the resonance for the ﬁlter applied to

the selected sample.

[H/L] Attack

These parameters are an offset to the selected sample’s EG

Attack.

[H/L] Decay

These parameters are an offset to the selected sample’s EG

Decay.

Velocity Switch

This is the velocity value dividing the High and Low layers for

the selected sample/key. Notes stricken harder than this value

will be played by the High multisample.

Single Trigger

Use this parameter to set the sample as a single-triggered one.

Yes When the same key (note) is played repeatedly,

the previous note will be stopped before the

new note is triggered, so that they will not

overlap.

No When the same key (note) is played repeatedly,

the previous note will not be stopped before

the new note is triggered.

Receive Note On

Use this parameter to enable/disable the reception of the

Note On (Key On) message.

Yes The Note On message is normally received.

No The Note On message is not received. There-

fore, the corresponding key is muted.

Key: C 2

Assigned: Yes

MS Hi Bank/Num: ROM

BD-SoftRoom 4

DK Samples

109

Program operating mode

Page 3 - Pitch

Receive Note Off

Use this parameter to enable/disable the reception of the

Note Off (Key Off) message.

Yes The sound will stop as soon as you release the

key.

No The sound will continue playing up to the end

of the sample. The Note Off message is

ignored.

Warning: If the “Single Trigger” parameter is set

to No, and the sound is looped, the sound will

play endlessly. In an “emergency” situation, use

the Panic command (see “START/STOP” on

page 15).

Exclusive Group

Exclusive Groups are sets of mutually exclusive keys, stopping

each other. For example, if the Open Hi-Hat and Closed Hi-

Hat are assigned the same Exclusive Group, playing an Open

Hi-Hat will stop the Closed Hi-Hat playing.

None No Exclusive Group assigned. The selected key

will not be stopped by any other key.

1…127 Exclusive Groups assigned to the selected key.

When you play this key, all other keys assigned

to the same Exclusive Group will be stopped,

and this key will be stopped by other keys

assigned to the same Exclusive Group.

Pan

This parameter sets the position in the stereo panorama of

the selected key.

Send FX1

This parameter sets the FX1 send level for of the selected key.

Send FX2

This parameter sets the FX2 send level for of the selected key.

PAGE 3 - PITCH

Here you can make pitch settings for each oscillator. These

settings specify how keyboard location will affect the pitch of

each oscillator, and select the controllers that will affect the

oscillator pitch and specify the depth of control. You can also

specify the amount of pitch change produced by the Pitch EG

and by LFO1 and LFO2, switch portamento on/off and spec-

ify how it will apply.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Slope

Normally you will leave this parameter at +1.0. Positive (+)

values will cause the pitch to rise as you play higher notes,

and negative (–) values will cause the pitch to fall as you play

higher notes.

With a value of 0, there will be no change in pitch, and the C4

pitch will sound regardless of the keyboard location you play.

The diagram shows how the Pitch Slope and pitch are related:

-1.0…+2.0 Pitch slope value.

JS (+X)

This parameter speciﬁes how the pitch will change when the

joystick is moved all the way to the right. A setting of 12 pro-

duces 1 octave of change.

For example if you set this to +12 and move the joystick all

the way to the right, the pitch will rise one octave above the

original pitch.

-60…+12 Maximum pitch change in semitones.

JS (–X)

This parameter speciﬁes how the pitch will change when the

joystick is moved all the way to the left. A setting of 12 pro-

duces 1 octave of change.

For example, if you set this to -60 and move the joystick all

the way to the left, the pitch will fall ﬁve octaves below the

original pitch. This can be used to simulate the downward

swoops that a guitarist produces using the tremolo arm.

-60…+12 Maximum pitch change in semitones.

Pitch modulation

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

This parameter selects the source that will modulate the pitch

of the selected oscillator. See “AMS (Alternate Modulation

Source) list” on page 123.

Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

produced by “AMS”. With a setting of 0, no modulation will

be applied. With a setting of 12.00, the pitch will change up to

one octave.

For example, if you set “AMS” to Joystick +Y and push the

joystick, the pitch will rise if this parameter is set to a positive

(+) value, or fall if this parameter is set to a negative (–)

value. The range is a maximum of one octave.

-12.00…+12.00

Parameter value.

Pitch EG modulation

EG Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the mod-

ulation that the pitch EG speciﬁed on “Page 6 - Pitch EG” will

apply to the pitch. With a setting of 12.00, the pitch will

change a maximum of ±1 octave.

-12.00…+12.00

Parameter value.

Selected: Osc1

Slope: +1.0

Joystick +X: +2

Joystick -X: -2

Pitch |Osc1

Pitch

Key

2oct 1oct

1oct

C4 C5

–1

110 Program operating mode

Page 4 - Pitch LFO1

EG AMS (EG Alternate Modulation Source)

This parameter selects the source that will modulate the pitch

EG of the selected oscillator. See “AMS (Alternate Modula-

tion Source) list” on page 123).

Intensity (AMS Intensity)

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS” will have. For example, if you set “AMS” to Veloc-

ity and set this value to +12.00, the velocity will control the

range of pitch change produced by the pitch EG in a range of

±1 octave. As you play more softly, the pitch change will draw

closer to the pitch EG levels.

Note: “Intensity” (Pitch EG) and AMS will be added to deter-

mine the depth and direction of the pitch modulation applied by

the pitch EG.

Portamento

This parameter turns the portamento effect (smooth change

in pitch from one note to the next) on/off, and speciﬁes how

it will be applied.

Note: Portamento will also be switched when CC#65 (Porta-

mento SW) is received.

On Portamento will be applied.

Off Portamento will not be applied.

Portamento Time

This parameter sets the portamento time. Increasing the

value will produce a slower change in pitch.

000…127 Portamento time in MIDI value.

PAGE 4 - PITCH LFO1

In this page you can set the LFO1 modulation parameters for

the selected oscillator.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the pitch

modulation applied by the LFO1 settings you made on “Page

17 - LFO1”. With a setting of 12.00, a maximum of ±1 octave

of pitch modulation will be applied. Negative (–) values will

invert the LFO waveform.

-12.00…+12.00

Intensity depth and direction.

JS+Y (JoyStick +Y)

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that joystick movement in the +Y direction (away from your-

self) will have on the pitch modulation applied by the LFO1.

As this value is increased, moving the joystick in the +Y

direction will cause the LFO1 to produce deeper pitch modu-

lation. With a setting of 12.00 a maximum of ±1 octave of

pitch modulation will be applied. Negative (–) values will

invert the LFO waveform.

-12.00…+12.00

Joystick action depth.

Pitch LFO1 ‘Level’ modulation

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

This parameter selects the source that will control the depth

of pitch modulation produced by the LFO1. See “AMS (Alter-

nate Modulation Source) list” on page 123.

Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS” will have. With a setting of 0, modulation will not

be applied. With a setting of 12.00, the LFO1 will apply a

maximum of ±1 octave of pitch modulation. Negative (–)

settings will invert the LFO waveform.

For example if “AMS” is set to Joystick +Y and push the joy-

stick, a positive (+) setting of this parameter will cause the

pitch modulation created by LFO1 to be applied with the

normal phase, and a negative (–) setting will cause the LFO

to be applied with inverted phase.

The “LFO1 Intensity”, “JS+Y” and “AMS” settings will be

added to determine the depth and direction of the pitch

modulation applied by LFO1.

-12.00…+12.00

Parameter value.

PAGE 5 - PITCH LFO2

In this page you can set the LFO2 modulation parameters for

the selected oscillator. See “Page 4 - Pitch LFO1” for informa-

tion on the various parameters.

PAGE 6 - PITCH EG

Here you can make settings for the pitch EG, which creates

time-variant changes in the pitch of the oscillators. The depth

of pitch change produced by these EG settings on the oscilla-

Pitch change (level)

Softly played

(Intensity (Pitch EG) setting)

Strongly played with a

negative (–) value

Strongly played with

a positive (+) value

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Selected: Osc1

Intensity: 0.00

Joystick +Y: +0.07

AMS ChannelAT

Pitch LF01 |Osc1

Selected: Osc1

Intensity: 0.00

Joystick +Y: +0.07

AMS ChannelAT

Pitch LF02 |Osc1

111

Program operating mode

Page 6 - Pitch EG

tors is adjusted by the “Intensity (AMS1/2 Intensity)” param-

eter (see page 14-111).

Pitch envelope

Start/Attack/Decay/Release Level

These parameters specify the amount of pitch change. The

actual amount of pitch change will depend on the “Intensity

(AMS1/2 Intensity)” parameter (see below). For example,

with an “Intensity” setting of +12.00, a “Level” setting of +99

would raise the pitch one octave, and a “Level” setting of –99

would lower the pitch one octave.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

Start Level

Speciﬁes the amount of pitch change at note-on.

Attack Level

Speciﬁes the amount of pitch change when the attack time

has elapsed.

Release Level

Speciﬁes the amount of pitch change when the release time

has elapsed.

Attack/Decay/Release Time

These parameters specify the time over which the pitch

change will occur.

0…99 Parameter value.

Attack Time

Speciﬁes the time over which the pitch will change from

note-on until it reaches the pitch speciﬁed as the attack level.

Decay Time

Speciﬁes the time over which the pitch will change after

reaching the attack level until it reaches the normal pitch.

Release Time

Speciﬁes the time over which the pitch will change from

note-off until it reaches the pitch speciﬁed as the release level.

Pitch EG ‘Level’ modulation

AMS1/2 (L) (Alternate Modulation Source 1/2)

These parameters select the source that will control the pitch

EG “Level” parameters (“AMS (Alternate Modulation

Source) list” on page 123).

Intensity (AMS1/2 Intensity)

These parameters specify the depth and direction of the effect

applied by “AMS1”. With a setting of 0, the levels speciﬁed by

“Start/Attack/Decay/Release Level” will be used.

For example if “AMS1” is Joystick +Y, pushing the joystick to

turn it on will change the “Level” parameters of the Pitch EG.

As the absolute value of “Intensity” is increased, the pitch EG

levels will change more greatly when the joystick is released.

The direction of the change is speciﬁed by “Start Level

Swing” and “Attack Level Swing”. When the key pressure is

released, the pitch EG levels will return to their own settings.

If “AMS1” is set to Velocity, increasing the absolute value of

“Intensity” will produce increasingly wider change in pitch

EG levels for strongly-played notes. The direction of the

change is speciﬁed by “Start Level Swing” and “Attack Level

Swing”. As you play more softly, the pitch change will draw

closer to the pitch EG levels.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

Start Level Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction of change in “Start

Level” caused by “AMS1/2”. If “Intensity” is a positive (+)

value, a setting of + will raise the EG level, and a setting of –

will decrease it. With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Attack Level Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction of change in “Attack

Level” caused by “AMS1/2”. If “Intensity” is a positive (+)

value, a setting of + will raise the EG level, and a setting of –

will decrease it. With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Pitch EG ‘Time’ modulation

AMS(T) (Alternate Modulation Source)

This parameter selects the source that will control the “Time”

parameters of the pitch EG (see “AMS (Alternate Modulation

Source) list” on page 123).

Intensity (AMS(T) Intensity)

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS” will have on the “Time” parameters. With a set-

Start Level: +0

Attack Time: 39

Attack Level: +0

Decay Time: 0

Pitch EG

Note-on Note-off

Attack

Time

Decay

Time

Start Level Release Level

Release Time

Attack Level

+99 = approximately 1 octave

–99 = approximately 1 octave

0 = pitch when

key is held

(sustained)

Time

Time-varying pitch settings (when Pitch EG Intensity = +12.00)

Pitch EG change (level) (AMS=JS-Y/Velocity, Intensity= positive (+) value

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

A note played softly with

Start Level Swing set at 0,

Attack Level Swing set to +,

the Joystick pulled on

A note played strongly with

Start Level Swing set to 0,

Attack Level Swing set to +,

the Joystick pulled on

A note played strongly with

Start Level Swing set to 0,

Attack Level Swing set to –,

the Joystick pulled on

Pitch EG changes (Time) (AMS = Velocity, Intensity = positive (+) value)

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

A note played softly with Attack

Time Swing set to + and

Decay Time Swing set to +

A note played strongly with

Attack Time Swing set to + and

Decay Time Swing set to +

A note played strongly with

Attack Time Swing set to – and

Decay Time Swing set to –

112 Program operating mode

Page 7 - Filter

ting of 0, the pitch EG times will be just as speciﬁed by the

“Attack/Decay/Release Time” settings.

The alternate modulation value at the moment that the EG

reaches each point will determine the actual value of the EG

time that comes next.

For example, the decay time will be determined by the alter-

nate modulation value at the moment that the attack level is

reached.

When this parameter is set to values of 16, 33, 49, 66, 82, or

99, the speciﬁed EG times will speed up as much as 2, 4, 8, 16,

32, or 64 times respectively (or slowed down to 1/2, 1/4, 1/8,

1/16, 1/32, or 1/64 of the original time).

For example if “AMS” is set to Velocity, increasing the abso-

lute value of “Intensity” will allow strongly-played notes to

increase the changes in pitch EG “Time” values. The direc-

tion of the change is speciﬁed by “Attack Time Swing” and

“Decay Time Swing”. As you play more softly, the pitch EG

times will more closely approach the actual settings of the

pitch EG.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

Attack Time Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS” will

affect the “Attack Time” parameter. With positive (+) values

of “Intensity”, a setting of + will cause the time to be length-

ened, and a setting of – will cause the time to be shortened.

With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Decay Time Swing

Specify the direction in which “AMS” will affect the “Decay

Time”. With positive (+) values of “Intensity”, a setting of +

will cause the time to be lengthened, and a setting of – will

cause the time to be shortened. With a setting of 0 there will

be no change.

PAGE 7 - FILTER

Here you can make settings for the ﬁlters that will be used by

the oscillators. You can select either a 24 dB/octave low pass

ﬁlter with resonance, or a series connection of a 12 dB/octave

low pass ﬁlter and a 12 dB/octave high pass ﬁlter.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Filter Type

This parameter selects the type of ﬁlter (Low Pass Resonant,

Low Pass & High Pass) for the selected oscillator. When the

Low Pass & High Pass ﬁlter type is selected, the ﬁlter B will be

activated.

Trim

Use this parameter to adjust the level at which the audio sig-

nal output from the selected oscillator is input to ﬁlter A.

Note: If this value is raised, the sound may distort if Resonance

is set to a high value or when you play a chord.

00…99 Trim level.

Frequency A (Cutoff Frequency A)

This parameter speciﬁes the cutoff frequency of ﬁlter A.

00…99 Cutoff frequency value.

Resonance A

The resonance emphasizes the overtone components that lie

in the region of the cutoff frequency speciﬁed by “Frequency”,

producing a more distinctive sound. Increasing this value will

produce a stronger effect.

00…99 Resonance value.

Selected: Osc1

Type: LPF Resonant

Trim: 99

Frequency A: 7

Filter |Osc1



Low Pass Resonance: 24 dB/octave low

pass filter with resonance

Low Pass & High Pass: 12 dB/octave

low pass filter and 12 dB/octave high pass

filter in series

Frequency

Level

Low Pass

12dB/oct

24dB/oct

This is a filter that cuts the high-

frequency region above the cutoff

frequency.

This is the most common type of filter,

and is used to cut part of the overtone

components, making an originally bright

timbre sound more mellow (darker).

When the “Filter Type” is Low Pass

Resonance, the cutoff will have a

steeper slope.

113

Program operating mode

Page 8 - Filter Modulation

Resonance modulation

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

Selects the source that will control the “Resonance” level. See

“AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) list” on page 123.

Intensity (AMS Intensity)

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)” will have on the

resonance level speciﬁed by “Resonance A”.

For example if Velocity has been selected, changes in key-

board velocity will affect the resonance.

With positive (+) values, the resonance will increase as you

play more strongly, and as you play more softly the resonance

will approach the level speciﬁed by the “Resonance” setting.

With negative (–) values, the resonance will decrease as you

play more strongly, and as you play more softly the resonance

will approach the level speciﬁed by the “Resonance” setting.

The resonance level is determined by adding the “Resonance”

and “Intensity (AMS Intensity)” values.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

Filter B

Frequency B (Cutoff Frequency B)

This parameter speciﬁes the cutoff frequency of ﬁlter B. This

parameter will be displayed when “Filter Type” is set to Low

Pass & High Pass.

00…99 Cutoff frequency value.

PAGE 8 - FILTER MODULATION

These settings let you apply modulation to the cutoff fre-

quency (“Frequency”) of the ﬁlter for the selected oscillator

to modify the tone.

When “Filter Type” is Low Pass Resonance, parameters for

ﬁlter B will not be editable (greyed out).

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Filter keyboard tracking

Tracking Low/High

These settings specify keyboard tracking for the cutoff fre-

quency of the ﬁlter for the selected oscillator. The way in

which the cutoff frequency is affected by the keyboard loca-

tion you play can be speciﬁed by the “Tracking Low”, “Track-

ing High”, “Ramp Low” and “Ramp High” parameters.

C–1…G9 Lowest/Highest note in the range.

Tracking Low

Keyboard tracking will apply to the range below the speciﬁed

note number.

Tracking High

Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the speciﬁed

note number.

Ramp

This parameter speciﬁes the angle of keyboard tracking.

-99…+99 Angle value.

Here is how cutoff frequency is affected by keyboard location

and the Ramp setting (“Intensity to A” and “Intensity to B” =

+50):

Ramp Low

Ramp High

If “Intensity to A” and “Intensity to B” are set to +50, “Ramp

Low” is set to –62 and “Ramp High” is set to +62, the angle of

the change in cutoff frequency will correspond to the key-

board location (pitch). This means that the oscillation that

occurs when you increase the “Resonance A” will correspond

to the keyboard location.

If you set “Ramp Low” to +43 and “Ramp High” to –43, the

cutoff frequency will not be affected by keyboard location.

Use this setting when you do not want the cutoff frequency to

change for each note.

Tracking to A/B

These parameters specify the note numbers at which key-

board tracking will begin to apply, and set the “Intensity to A”

and “Intensity to B” parameters to specify the depth and

direction of the change applied to ﬁlters A and B.

For the range of notes between “Key Low” and “Key High”,

the cutoff frequency will change according to the keyboard

location (pitch).

-99…+99 Parameter value.

The effect of resonance

Low Pass

Level

Low resonance value High resonance value

Level

Frequency

High Pass

This filter cuts the low-frequency range that

lies below the cutoff frequency. By cutting

the lower overtones, it lightens the tone.

12dB/oct

Selected: Osc1

Tracking Low: B 3

Tracking High: F 5

Ramp Low: +48

Filter Mod |Osc1

Cutoff frequency

Key

Low Ramp=+99

Low Ramp=+43

Low Ramp=0

Low Ramp=–62

Low Ramp=–99

High Ramp=+99

High Ramp=+62

High Ramp=0

High Ramp=–43

High Ramp=–99

Low Key High Key

114 Program operating mode

Page 9 - Filter LFO1

Filter EG modulation

Velocity to A

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that velocity will have on the time-varying changes created by

the ﬁlter EG (as set on “Page 11 - Filter EG”) to control the

ﬁlter A cutoff frequency.

With positive (+) values, playing more strongly will cause the

ﬁlter EG to produce greater changes in cutoff frequency. With

negative (–) values, playing more strongly will also cause the

ﬁlter EG to produce greater changes in cutoff frequency, but

with the polarity of the EG inverted.

99…+99 Value of the Velocity to A parameter.

Velocity to B

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that velocity will have on the time-varying changes created by

the ﬁlter EG to control the ﬁlter B cutoff frequency (see

“Velocity to A”).

99…+99 Value of the Velocity to B parameter.

EG Intensity to A

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect that the time-

varying changes created by the ﬁlter 1 EG will have on the ﬁl-

ter A cutoff frequency.

With positive (+) settings, the sound will become brighter

when the EG levels set by Filter EG “Level” and “Time”

parameters are in the “+” area, and darker when they are in

the “–” area.

With negative (–) settings, the sound will become darker

when the EG levels set by Filter EG “Level” and “Time”

parameters are in the “+” area, and brighter when they are in

the “–” area.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

EG Intensity to B

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect that the time-

varying changes created by the ﬁlter EG will have on the ﬁlter

B cutoff frequency (see “EG Intensity to A”).

-99…+99 Parameter value.

EG AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

Selects the source that will control the depth and direction of

the effect that the time-varying changes produced by the ﬁl-

ter EG will have on the cutoff frequency of ﬁlters A and B. See

“AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) list” on page 123.

Intensity to A

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect that “AMS” will

have on ﬁlter A. For details on how this will apply, refer to

“EG Intensity to A”.

Intensity to B

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect that “AMS” will

have on ﬁlter B. For details on how this will apply, refer to

“EG Intensity to A”.

Note: The sum of the settings for “Velocity to A/B”, “Intensity to

A/B”, and “(AMS) Intensity to A/B” will determine the depth

and direction of the effect produced by the ﬁlter EG.

Filter A/B modulation

AMS1(fA/B) (Alternate Modulation Source1 for ﬁlter A/B)

Selects the source that will control modulation of the ﬁlter A

cutoff frequency. See “AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

list” on page 123.

Note: The ﬁlter B parameters will be displayed when “Filter

Type” on page 112 is Low Pass & High Pass.

Intensity

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect that “AMS1”

will have.

When “AMS1” is JS X, a positive (+) value for this parameter

will cause the cutoff frequency to rise when the joystick is

moved toward the right, and fall when the joystick is moved

toward the left. With a negative (–) value for this parameter,

the opposite will occur.

This value is added to the setting of the Filter A “Frequency”.

AMS2 (Alternate Modulation Source2)

Selects the source that will control modulation of the ﬁlter A

cutoff frequency (see “AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

list” on page 123).

Intensity

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect that the

selected source will have (see “Intensity” on page 114).

PAGE 9 - FILTER LFO1

Here you can use the ﬁlter LFO to apply cyclic modulation to

the cutoff frequency of the ﬁlter (for the selected oscillator)

to create cyclical changes in tone.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Intensity to A

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the modulation that

LFO1 (set on “Page 17 - LFO1”) will have on the cutoff fre-

quency of ﬁlter A. Negative (–) settings will invert the phase.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

Changes in cutoff frequency

Softly played Strongly played

Setting to –

Strongly played

Setting to +

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Selected: Osc1

Intensity to A: +0

Intensity to B: +0

Joystick -Y to A: +5

Filter LFO1|Osc1

115

Program operating mode

Page 10 - Filter LFO2

Intensity to B

Specify the depth and direction of the modulation that LFO1

will have on the cutoff frequency of ﬁlter B (see “Intensity to

A”).

-99…+99 Parameter value.

Joystick –Y to A

By moving the joystick in the Y direction (toward yourself),

you can control the depth at which LFO1 modulates the cut-

off frequency of ﬁlter A. This parameter speciﬁes the depth

and direction of the control.

Higher settings of this parameter will produce greater

increases in the effect of LFO1 on the ﬁlter when the joystick

is moved toward yourself.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

Joystick –Y to B

By moving the joystick in the Y direction (toward yourself),

you can control the depth at which LFO1 modulates the cut-

off frequency of ﬁlter B. This parameter speciﬁes the depth

and direction of the control (see “Joystick –Y to A”).

Filter LFO1 modulation

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

Select a source that will control the depth and direction of

cutoff frequency change for both ﬁlters A and B. See “AMS

(Alternate Modulation Source) list”.

Intensity to A

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect that “AMS” will

have on ﬁlter A.

For example if “AMS” is Joystick +Y, higher settings of this

parameter will allow greater change to be applied to LFO1

when you push the joystick.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

Intensity to B

Speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect that “AMS” will

have on ﬁlter B (see “Intensity to A”).

PAGE 10 - FILTER LFO2

Adjusts the depth of the cyclic modulation applied by LFO2

(set on “Page 18 - LFO2”) to the cutoff frequency of ﬁlters A

and B. For more information on the parameters see “Page 9 -

Filter LFO1” on page 114.

PAGE 11 - FILTER EG

Here you can make settings for the EG that will produce

time-varying changes in the cutoff frequency of ﬁlters A and

B for the selected oscillator. The depth of the effect that these

settings will have on the ﬁlter cutoff frequency is determined

by the “Velocity” and “Intensity” parameters.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Filter envelope

Start/Attack/Break/Sustain/Release Level

These are the envelope segment levels. The result will depend

on the ﬁlter that was selected in “Filter Type”. For example,

with the Low Pass Resonance ﬁlter, positive (+) values of EG

Intensity will cause the tone to be brightened by positive (+)

levels, and darkened by negative (–) levels.

-99…+99 Level value.

Start Level

This parameter speciﬁes the change in cutoff frequency at the

time of note-on.

Attack Level

This parameter speciﬁes the change in cutoff frequency after

the attack time has elapsed.

Break Point Level

This parameter speciﬁes the change in cutoff frequency after

the decay time has elapsed.

Sustain Level

This parameter speciﬁes the change in cutoff frequency that

will be maintained from after the slope time has elapsed until

note-off occurs.

Release Level

This parameter speciﬁes the change in cutoff frequency that

will occur when the release time has elapsed.

Attack/Decay/Slope/Release Time

These parameters specify the time over which the ﬁlter

change will occur.

0…99 Time value.

Attack Time

This parameter speciﬁes the time over which the level will

change from note-on until the attack level is reached.

Change in cutoff

Low setting High setting

Selected: Osc1

Intensity to A: +0

Intensity to B: +0

Joystick -Y to A: +5

Filter LFO2|Osc1

Selected: Osc1

Start Level: +99

Attack Time: 73

Attack Level: +95

FilterEG |Osc1

Note-on

Note-off

Attack

Time

Start

Level Decay

Time

Release

Time

Release

Level

Attack Level

The specified

cutoff 

frequency

Sustain Level

Time

Break

Point

Level

Slope

Time

116 Program operating mode

Page 11 - Filter EG

Decay Time

This parameter speciﬁes the time over which the level will

change from the attack level to the break point level.

Slope Time

This parameter speciﬁes the time over which the level will

change after the decay time has elapsed until the sustain level

is reached.

Release Time

This parameter speciﬁes the time over which the level will

change after note-on occurs until the release level is reached.

Filter EG ‘Level’ modulation

AMS(L) (Alternate Modulation Source)

This parameter selects the source that will control the “Level”

parameters of the ﬁlter EG (“AMS (Alternate Modulation

Source) list” on page 123).

Intensity (AMS Intensity)

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

applied by “AMS”. With a setting of 0, the levels speciﬁed by

“Frequency A (Cutoff Frequency A)” will be used.

For example, if “AMS” is Velocity, and you set “Start Level

Swing”, “Attack Level Swing” and “Break Level Swing” to +

and set “Intensity” to a positive (+) value, the EG levels will

rise as you play more strongly. If “Intensity” is set to a nega-

tive (–) values, the EG levels will fall as you play more

strongly.

-99…+99 Intensity value.

Start Level Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS” will

affect “Start Level”. When “Intensity” has a positive (+)

value, a setting of + for this parameter will allow “AMS” to

raise the EG level, and a setting of – will allow “AMS” to lower

the EG level. With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Attack Level Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS” will

affect “Attack Level”. When “Intensity” has a positive (+)

value, a setting of + for this parameter will allow “AMS” to

raise the EG level, and a setting of – will allow “AMS” to lower

the EG level. With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Break Level Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS” will

affect “Break Point Level”. When “Intensity” has a positive

(+) value, a setting of + for this parameter will allow “AMS”

to raise the EG level, and a setting of – will allow “AMS” to

lower the EG level. With a setting of 0 there will be no

change.

Filter EG ‘Time’ modulation

AMS1/2(T)

Use this parameter to select the source that will control the

“Time” parameters of the ﬁlter EG. See “AMS (Alternate

Modulation Source) list” on page 123.

Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS1/2(T)” will have.

For example, if “AMS1/2(T)” is set to FltKTr +/+, the EG

“Time” parameters will be controlled by the Keyboard Track-

ing settings. With positive (+) values of this parameter, posi-

tive (+) values of “Ramp” will lengthen the EG times, and

negative (–) values of “Ramp” will shorten the EG times. The

direction of change is speciﬁed by “Attack Time Swing”,

“Decay Time Swing”, “Slope Time Swing”, and “Release

Time Swing”.

With a setting of 0, the times speciﬁed by “Frequency A (Cut-

off Frequency A)” will be used.

If “AMS1/2(T)” is set to Velocity, positive (+) values of this

parameter will cause EG times to lengthen as you play more

strongly, and negative (–) values will cause EG times to

shorten as you play more strongly.

-99…+99 Intensity value.

Attack Time Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS1/2(T)”

will affect the attack time. With positive (+) values of “Inten-

sity”, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS to lengthen

the time, and setting this parameter to – will allow AMS to

shorten the time. With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Decay Time Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS1/2(T)”

will affect the decay time. With positive (+) values of “Inten-

sity”, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS to lengthen

the time, and setting this parameter to – will allow AMS to

shorten the time. With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Slope Time Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS1/2(T)”

will affect the slope time. With positive (+) values of “Inten-

sity”, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS to lengthen

the time, and setting this parameter to – will allow AMS to

shorten the time. With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Release Time Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS1/2(T)”

will affect the release time. With positive (+) values of “Inten-

sity”, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS to lengthen

the time, and setting this parameter to – will allow AMS to

shorten the time. With a setting of 0 there will be no change.

Filter 1 EG changes (level) (AMS = Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value)

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Softly played note with Start Level

Swing, Attack Level Swing, and

Break Level Swing set to +

Strongly played note with Start

Level Swing, Attack Level Swing,

and Break Level Swing set to +

Strongly played note with Start

Level Swing, Attack Level Swing,

and Break Level Swing set to –

Filter 1 EG changes (Time) (AMS = Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value)

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Softly played note with Attack,

Decay, Slope and Release

Level Swings set to +

Strongly played note with

Attack, Decay, Slope and

Release Level Swings set to +

Strongly played note with

Attack, Decay, Slope and

Release Level Swings set to –

117

Program operating mode

Page 12 - Amp

PAGE 12 - AMP

These parameters control the volume and pan of the selected

oscillator.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Level

Volume of the selected oscillator.

Note: The volume of a Program can be controlled by CC#7 (vol-

ume) and #11 (expression). The resulting level is determined by

multiplying the values of CC#7 and #11. The Global MIDI

channel is used for control.

0…127 Volume level.

Pan

Pan (stereo position) of the selected oscillator.

This parameter is not available when editing a Drum Pro-

gram. Use the individual Pan control for each key (see

“Pan” on page 109).

Random The sound will be heard from a different loca-

tion at each note-on.

L001 Places the sound at far left.

C064 Places the sound in the center.

R127 Places the sound to far right.

Note: This can be controlled by CC#10 (panpot). A CC#10

value of 0 or 1 will place the sound at the far left, a value of 64

will place the sound at the location speciﬁed by the “Pan” setting

for each oscillator, and a value of 127 will place the sound at the

far right. This is controlled on the global MIDI channel.

Pan modulation

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

Selects the source that will modify pan (see “AMS (Alternate

Modulation Source) list” on page 123). This change will be

relative to the “Pan” setting.

Intensity

Speciﬁes the depth of the effect produced by “AMS”. For

example, if “Pan” is set to C064 and “AMS” is Note Number,

positive (+) values of this parameter will cause the sound to

move toward the right as the note numbers increase beyond

the C4 note (i.e., as you play higher), and toward the left as

the note numbers decrease (i.e., as you play lower). Negative

(–) values of this parameter will have the opposite effect.

-99…+99 Parameter value.

PAGE 13 - AMP MODULATION

These settings allow you to apply modulation to amp (for

each oscillator) to modulate the volume.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Ampliﬁer keyboard tracking

These parameters let you use keyboard tracking to adjust the

volume of the selected oscillator. Use the “Key” and “Ramp”

parameters to specify how the volume will be affected by the

keyboard location that you play.

Tracking Low/High

These settings specify the note number at which keyboard

tracking will begin to apply. The volume will not change

between “Tracking Low” and “Tracking High”.

C–1…G9 Lowest/Highest note in the range.

Tracking Low

Keyboard tracking will apply to the range below the speciﬁed

note number.

Tracking High

Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the speciﬁed

note number.

Ramp

These parameters specify the angle of keyboard tracking.

-99…+99 Angle value.

Here is an example of volume changes produced by keyboard

location and “Ramp” settings:

Ramp Low

With positive (+) values of this parameter, the volume will

increase as you play notes below the “Tracking Low” note

number. With negative (–) values, the volume will decrease.

Ramp High

With positive (+) values of this parameter, the volume will

increase as you play notes above the “Key High” note number.

With negative (–) values, the volume will decrease.

Selected: Osc1

Level: 120

Pan: L001

AMS: Note Number

Amp |Osc1



Selected: Osc1

Tracking Low: C 3

Tracking High: A#4

Ramp Low: +48

Amp Mod |Osc1

Volume

Key

Ramp Low=+99

Ramp Low=0

Ramp Low=–99

Ramp High=+99

Ramp High=0

Ramp High=–99

Key Low Key High

118 Program operating mode

Page 14 - Amp LFO1

Ampliﬁer Modulation

These parameters specify how the volume of the selected

oscillator will be affected by velocity.

Velocity Intensity

With positive (+) values, the volume will increase as you play

more strongly. With negative (–) values, the volume will

decrease as you play more strongly.

-99…+99 Intensity value.

EG AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

Selects the source that will control the volume of the amp for

the selected oscillator (See “AMS (Alternate Modulation

Source) list” on page 123). “Velocity” cannot be selected.

Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS” will have. The actual volume will be determined

by multiplying the value of the changes produced by the amp

EG with the values of Alternate Modulation etc., and if the

levels of the amp EG are low, the modulation applied by

Alternate Modulation will also be less.

For example, if “AMS” is set to Joystick +Y, positive (+) values

of this parameter will cause the volume to increase when you

push the joystick. However if the EG settings etc. have already

raised the volume to its maximum level, the volume cannot

be increased further.

With negative (–) values of this parameter, the volume will

decrease when the joystick is pushed.

-99…+99 Intensity value.

PAGE 14 - AMP LFO1

These parameters let you use “LFO1” (see “Page 17 - LFO1”

on page 120) and “LFO 2” (see “Page 18 - LFO2” on

page 121) to control the volume of the selected oscillator.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “LFO1” will have on the volume of the selected oscilla-

tor. Negative (–) values will invert the LFO waveform.

-99…+99 Intensity value.

Ampliﬁer LFO1 modulation

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

Use this parameter to select a source that will control the

depth by which “LFO1” will modulate the volume of the

selected oscillator. See “AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)

list” on page 123.

Intensity

As the absolute value of this setting is increased, the effect of

“AMS” on “LFO1” will increase. Negative (–) values will

invert the LFO waveform.

-99…+99 Intensity value.

PAGE 15 - AMP LFO2

These parameters let you use “LFO1” (see “Page 17 - LFO1”

on page 120) and “LFO 2” (see “Page 18 - LFO2” on

page 121) to control the selected oscillator volume. See “Page

14 - Amp LFO1” for more information on parameter’s edit-

ing.

PAGE 16 - AMP EG

These parameters let you create time-varying changes in the

volume of the selected oscillator.

Selected

Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit. Alter-

natively, you can select oscillators using the F1-F4 buttons.

Amp envelope

Start/Attack/Break/Sustain/Release Level

These parameters are the level of the envelope segment.

0…99 Level value.

Volume change (with positive (+) values of this parameter)

Softly played Strongly played

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Selected: Osc1

Intensity: +0

AMS: Joystick -Y

Intensity: +0

Amp LFO1 |Osc1

Selected: Osc1

Intensity: +0

AMS: Joystick -Y

Intensity: +0

Amp LFO2 |Osc1

Selected: Osc1

Start Level: +99

Attack Time: 73

Attack Level: +95

Amp EG |Osc1

Note-on

Note-off

Attack

Time

Decay

Time

Release Time

Attack Level

Sustain

Level

Time

Break Point

Start

Level

Slope

Time

Amplifier EG

Volume

119

Program operating mode

Page 16 - Amp EG

Start Level

This parameter speciﬁes the volume level at note-on. If you

want the note to begin at a loud level, set this to a high value.

Attack Level

This parameter speciﬁes the volume level that will be reached

after the attack time has elapsed.

Break Level

This parameter speciﬁes the volume level that will be reached

after the decay time has elapsed.

Sustain Level

This parameter speciﬁes the volume level that will be main-

tained from after the slope time has elapsed until note-off

occurs.

Attack/Decay/Slope/Release Time

These parameters specify the time over which the volume

change will occur.

0…99 Time value.

Attack Time

This parameter speciﬁes the time over which the volume will

change after note-on until it reaches the attack level. If the

start level is 0, this will be the rise time of the sound.

Decay Time

This parameter speciﬁes the time over which the volume will

change from when it reaches the attack level until it reaches

the break point level.

Slope Time

This parameter speciﬁes the time over which the volume will

change from when it reaches the break point level until it

reaches the sustain level.

Release Time

This parameter speciﬁes the time over which the volume will

change after note-off until it reaches 0.

Amp EG ‘Level’ modulation

AMS(L) (Alternate Modulation Source)

This parameter speciﬁes the source that will control the

“Level” parameters of the amp EG. See “AMS (Alternate

Modulation Source) list” on page 123.

Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS” will have. For example, if “AMS” is Velocity, set-

ting “Start Level Swing”, “Attack Level Swing” and “Break

Point Level Swing” to + and setting “Intensity” to a positive

(+) value will cause the amp EG volume levels to increase as

you play more strongly. Setting “Intensity” to a negative (–)

values will cause the amp EG volume levels to decrease as you

play more strongly. With a setting of 0, the levels will be as

speciﬁed on “Page 16 - Amp EG”.

-99…+99 Intensity value.

Start Level Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS” will

change “Start Level”. If “Intensity” is set to a positive (+)

value, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS to increase

the EG level, and setting this parameter to – will allow AMS

to decrease the EG level. With a setting of 0, no change will

occur.

Attack Level Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS” will

change “Attack Level”. If “Intensity” is set to a positive (+)

value, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS to increase

the EG level, and setting this parameter to – will allow AMS

to decrease the EG level. With a setting of 0, no change will

occur.

Break Point Level Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction in which “AMS” will

change “Break Level”. If “Intensity” is set to a positive (+)

value, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS to increase

the EG level, and setting this parameter to – will allow AMS

to decrease the EG level. With a setting of 0, no change will

occur.

Amp EG ‘Time’ modulation

These parameters let you use an alternate modulation source

to modify the amp EG times that were speciﬁed in “Attack/

Decay/Slope/Release Time” on page 119.

AMS1(T) (Alternate Modulation Source 1 - Time)

This parameter speciﬁes the source that will control the

“Time” parameters of the amp EG (see “AMS (Alternate

Modulation Source) list” on page 123). With a setting of Off,

there will be no modulation.

Intensity

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS1” will have. For example, if “AMS1(T)” is Amp

KTrk +/+, the (Amp) Keyboard Track settings (see “Ampliﬁer

keyboard tracking” on page 117) will control the EG “Time”

parameters. With positive (+) values of this parameter, posi-

tive (+) values of “Ramp (Ramp Setting) will cause EG times

to be lengthened, and negative (–) values of “Ramp (Ramp

Setting)” will cause EG times to be shortened. The direction

of the change is speciﬁed by “Attack Time Swing”, “Decay

Time Swing”, “Slope Time Swing”, and “Release Time”.

When “AMS1(T)” is Velocity, positive (+) values will cause

EG times to lengthen as you play more strongly, and negative

Amp 1 EG changes (Level) (AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value)

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Softly played note when Start Level

Swing=0 and Attack Level Swing

and Breack Level Swing are set to +

Strongly played note when Start Level

Swing=0 and Attack Level Swing and

Breack Level Swing are set to +

Strongly played note when Start Level

Swing=0 and Attack Level Swing and

Breack Level Swing are set to +

Amp 1 EG changes (Time) (AMS=Velocity, Intensity= a positive (+) value)



Amp 1 EG changes (Time)

(AMS=Amp KTrk +/+, Intensity = a positive (+) value)

(When Amp Keyboard Track “Low Ramp”= a positive (+) value, and 

“High Ramp” = a positive (+) value)

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Note-on

Note-off

Low-pitched note played with

Attack, Decay, Slope, and

Release Time Swing at +

Softly played note with

Attack, Decay, Slope and

Release Time Swing at +

High -pitched note played with

Attack, Decay, Slope, and

Release Time Swing at –

Strongly played note with

Attack, Decay, Slope and

Release Time Swing at +

Strongly played note with

Attack, Decay, Slope and

Release Time Swing at –

120 Program operating mode

Page 17 - LFO1

(–) values will cause EG times to shorten as you play more

strongly. With a setting of 0, the EG times will be as speciﬁed

by the “Amp envelope” parameters (see page 14-118).

Attack Time Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction of the effect that

“AMS1” will have on “Attack Time”. With positive (+) values

of “Intensity”, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS1 to

lengthen the time, and setting it to – will allow AMS1 to

shorten the time. With a setting of 0 there will be no effect.

Decay Time Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction of the effect that

“AMS1” will have on “Decay Time”. With positive (+) values

of “Intensity”, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS1 to

lengthen the time, and setting it to – will allow AMS1 to

shorten the time. With a setting of 0 there will be no effect.

Slope Time Swing

This parameter speciﬁes the direction of the effect that

“AMS1” will have on “Slope Time”. With positive (+) values

of “Intensity”, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS1 to

lengthen the time, and setting it to – will allow AMS1 to

shorten the time. With a setting of 0 there will be no effect.

Release Time

This parameter speciﬁes the direction of the effect that

“AMS1” will have on “Release Time”. With positive (+) val-

ues of “Intensity”, setting this parameter to + will allow AMS1

to lengthen the time, and setting it to – will allow AMS1 to

shorten the time. With a setting of 0 there will be no effect.

AMS2 (Alternate Modulation Source 2)

This is another alternate modulation source for the Amp EG.

See above “AMS1” parameters.

PAGE 17 - LFO1

In this and the next page you can make settings for the LFO

that can be used to cyclically modulate the Pitch, Filter, and

Amp of each oscillator. There are two LFO units for each

oscillator. By setting the LFO1 or LFO2 Intensity to a negative

(–) value for Pitch, Filter, or Amp, you can invert the LFO

waveform.

Wave

This parameter selects the LFO waveform. The numbers that

appear at the right of some of the LFO waveforms indicate

the phase at which the waveform will begin.

Frequency

Set the LFO frequency. A setting of 99 is the fastest.

00…99 Frequency rate.

Key Sync

This parameter speciﬁes if the LFO is synchronized to key

strokes.

On The LFO will start each time you play a note,

and an independent LFO will operate for each

note.

Off The LFO effect that was started by the ﬁrst-

played note will continue to be applied to each

newly-played note. (In this case, Delay and

Fade will be applied only to the LFO when it is

ﬁrst started).

Offset

This parameter speciﬁes the central value of the LFO wave-

form. For example, with a setting of 0 as shown in the follow-

ing diagram, the vibrato that is applied will be centered on

the note-on pitch. With a setting of +99, the vibrato will only

raise the pitch above the note-on pitch, in the way in which

vibrato is applied on a guitar.

When “Wave” is set to Guitar, the modulation will occur only

in the positive (+) direction even if you set “Offset” to 0.

Here are offset settings and pitch change produced by vibrato

-99…+99 Offset value.

Delay

This parameter speciﬁes the time from note-on until the LFO

effect begins to apply. When “Key Sync” is Off, the delay will

apply only when the LFO is ﬁrst started.

0…99 Delay time.

Fade In

This parameter speciﬁes the time from when the LFO begins

to apply until it reaches the maximum amplitude. When “Key

Sync.” is Off, the fade will apply only when the LFO is ﬁrst

started.

Selected: Osc1

Wave: Triangle Rand

Frequency: 31

Key Sync: On

LFO1 |Osc1

Triangle wave

Phase will change

randomly at each key-in

Sawtooth down

↓

Square wave

Sine wave

Guitar vibrato

Triangle 0

Triangle 90

Triangle

Random

Saw 0

Saw 180

Square

Sine

Guitar

Exponential

Triangle

Exponential

Saw Down

Exponential

Saw Up

Step Triangle – 4

Step Triangle – 6

Step Saw – 4

Step Saw – 6

Random1 (S/H):



Conventional sample & hold (S/H) in which the

level changes randomly at fixed intervals of

time

Random2 (S/H):

Both the levels and the time intervals will

change randomly.

Random3 (S/H):

The maximum level and minimum level will

alternate at random intervals of time (i.e., a

square wave with random period).



Random4 (Vector)

Random5 (Vector)

Random6 (Vector)

These types cause Random 1–3 to change

smoothly. They can be used to simulate the

instability of acoustic instruments etc.

offset = –99 offset = 0 offset = +99Pitch

Pitch at note-on

121

Program operating mode

Page 18 - LFO2

Here is how “Fade In” affects the LFO (when “Key Sync” is

On):

00…99 Fade rate.

Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync

MIDI/Tempo Sync

This parameter enables/disables the LFO synchronization

with Sequencer 1 Tempo.

On The LFO frequency will synchronize to the

tempo (MIDI Clock) of Sequencer 1. In this

case, the values you speciﬁed for “Frequency”

(see page 14-120) and “Frequency modula-

tion” (see page 14-121) will be ignored.

Base Note/Times

When “MIDI/Tempo Sync” is On, these parameters set a note

length relative to “ (Tempo)” and the multiple (“Times”)

that will be applied to it. These parameters will determine the

frequency of the LFO1. For example if “Base Note” is  (quar-

ter note) and “Times” is 04, the LFO will perform one cycle

every four beats.

Even if you change the “ (Tempo)” setting of Sequencer 1,

the LFO will always perform one cycle every four beats.

Base Note

This parameter is not available when editing a Drum Pro-

gram.

 ,   ,  ,   ,  ,   ,  , 

Note value.

Times

This parameter is not available when editing a Drum Pro-

gram.

01...16 Beats before restarting the cycle.

Frequency modulation

You can use two alternate modulation sources to adjust the

speed of the LFO1 for the selected oscillator.

AMS1(F) (Alternate Modulation Source1)

Selects the source that will adjust the frequency of the

selected oscillator LFO1 (see “AMS (Alternate Modulation

Source) list” on page 123). LFO1 can be modulated by LFO2.

Intensity (AMS1 Intensity)

This parameter speciﬁes the depth and direction of the effect

that “AMS1(F)” will have. When this parameter is set to a

value of 16, 33, 49, 66, 82, or 99, the LFO frequency being can

be increased by a maximum of 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 times

respectively (or decreased by 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, or 1/64

respectively).

For example, if “AMS1(F)” is Note Number, positive (+) val-

ues of this parameter will cause the oscillator LFO to speed

up as you play higher notes. Negative (–) values will cause the

oscillator LFO to slow down as you play higher notes. This

change will be centered on the C4 note.

If “AMS1(F)” is set to JS +Y, raising the value of this parame-

ter will cause the oscillator LFO1 speed to increase as the joy-

stick is moved away from yourself. With a setting of +99,

moving the joystick all the way away from yourself will

increase the LFO speed by approximately 64 times.

-99…+99 Intensity value.

AMS2(F) (Alternate Modulation Source2)

Intensity (AMS2 Intensity)

Make settings for a second alternate modulation source that

will adjust the frequency of the oscillator LFO1 (see above

“AMS1(F) (Alternate Modulation Source1)” and “Intensity

(AMS1 Intensity)”).

PAGE 18 - LFO2

Here you can make settings for the LFO2, which is the second

LFO that can be applied to the selected oscillator. See “Page

17 - LFO1” for more information on the parameters value.

However in “Frequency modulation”, the LFO cannot be

selected as a modulation source in “AMS1” or “AMS2.”

PAGE 19 - EFFECTS

Here you can select two effects for the whole Program, switch

them on/off, and specify chaining.

Note: For details on the effects, refer to the “Effects” chapter.

FX1/2

Use these parameters to select the effect type for effect 1/2.

See the “Effects” chapter for more information.

Note: If 000: No Effect is selected, the output from the master

effect will be muted.

Send

Send level for each effect.

Drum samples have their own send level settings (see

“Send FX1” and “Send FX2” on page 14-109). Use this

parameter to adjust the general offset of the Drum Pro-

gram.

000…127 Effect level.

Chain 2>1

Use this parameter to send the output of effect 2 to the input

of effect 1.

000…127 Level of the signal exiting the effect 2 going

back to the effect 1.

Send to Master

This parameters allows you to decide if the direct + effected

signal must go to the Master, or just the effected signal.

Yes Only the effected signal will be sent to the

Audio Outputs. The direct (non-effected) sig-

nal will not be sent.

Note-on Note-off

Fade

Delay



FX1: 53 RecSmthHall

Send: 56

FX2: 16 Chorus

Send: 0

Effects



122 Program operating mode

Page 20 - FX1 editing

No Both the effected signal and direct signals will

be sent to the Audio Outputs.

PAGE 20 - FX1 EDITING

In this page you can edit the effected assigned to the FX1 (A

or C) effect processor (usually reverb). See the “Effects” chap-

ter for more information.

PAGE 21 - FX2 EDITING

In this page you can edit the effected assigned to the FX2 (B

or D) effect processor (usually modulating effect). See the

“Effects” chapter for more information.

123

Program operating mode

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) list

AMS (ALTERNATE MODULATION SOURCE) LIST

Flt KTrk +/+ (Filter Keyboard Track +/+)

Flt KTrk +/– (Filter Keyboard Track +/–)

Flt KTrk 0/+ (Filter Keyboard Track 0/+)

Flt KTrk +/0 (Filter Keyboard Track +/0)

Amp KTrk +/+ (Amp Keyboard Track +/+)

Amp KTrk +/– (Amp Keyboard Track +/–)

Amp KTrk 0/+ (Amp Keyboard Track 0/+)

Amp KTrk +/0 (Amp Keyboard Track +/0)

+/+ The direction of the effect will be determined

by the sign (positive or negative) of the “Ramp

Low” or “Ramp High” setting.

+/– The direction of the effect will be determined

by the sign of the “Ramp Low” setting, and by

the opposite sign of the “Ramp High” setting

(–50 for a setting of +50, and +50 for a setting

of –50).

0/+ “Ramp Low” will have no AMS effect. The sign

of the “Ramp High” setting will determine the

direction of its effect.

Off Do not use Alternate Modulation

Pitch EG Pitch EG

Filter EG Filter EG within the same oscillator

Amp EG Amp EG within the same oscillator

LFO1 LFO1 within the same oscillator

LFO2 LFO2 within the same oscillator

Flt KTrk +/+ (Filter Keyboard Track +/+) Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator

Flt KTrk +/– (Filter Keyboard Track +/–) Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator

Flt KTrk 0/+ (Filter Keyboard Track 0/+) Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator

Flt KTrk +/0 (Filter Keyboard Track +/0) Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator

Amp KTrk +/+ (Amp Keyboard Track +/+) Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator

Amp KTrk +/– (Amp Keyboard Track +/–) Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator

Amp KTrk 0/+ (Amp Keyboard Track 0/+) Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator

Amp KTrk +/0 (Amp Keyboard Track +/0) Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator

Note Number Note number

Velocity Velocity

Poly AT (Poly After Touch)(a)

(a) After Touch data can only be received via MIDI, or create as a MIDI event in Song Record-Step Recording mode.

Polyphonic After Touch (transmitted from the Pa50SD only as sequence data)

Channel AT (Channel After Touch)(a) After Touch (Channel After Touch)

Joystick X Joystick X (horizontal) axis

Joystick +Y Joystick +Y (vertical upward) direction (CC#01)

Joystick –Y Joystick –Y (vertical downward) direction (CC#02)

JS+Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick +Y & After Touch/2)(a) Joystick +Y (vertical upward) direction and After Touch

JS–Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick –Y & After Touch/2)(a) Joystick –Y (vertical downward) direction and After Touch

Ass.Pedal Assignable foot pedal (CC#04)

CC#18 CC#18

CC#17 CC#17

CC#19 CC#19

CC#20 CC#20

CC#21 CC#21

Damper Ddamper pedal (CC#64)

CC#65 Portamento switch (CC#65)

Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal (CC#66)

CC#80 CC#80

CC#81 CC#81

CC#82 CC#82

CC#83 CC#83

Tempo Tempo (tempo data from Sequencer 1 clock or external MIDI clock)

124 Program operating mode

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) list

+/0 The sign of the “Ramp Low” setting will deter-

mine the direction of its effect. “Ramp High”

will have no AMS effect.

JS +Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick +Y & After Touch/2)

The effect will be controlled by the joystick +Y (vertically

upward) and by after touch data (received via MIDI). In this

case, the effect of after touch will be only half of the speciﬁed

intensity.

JS –Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick –Y & After Touch/2)

The effect will be controlled by the joystick –Y (vertically

downward) and by after touch data (received via MIDI). In

this case, the effect of after touch will be only half of the spec-

iﬁed intensity.

Note Number

Amp

Key Low Key High

AMS = Amp KTrk +/+

AMS Intensity = positive (+) value

Ramp Low

= +50

Ramp High

= +50



Depth and direction of modulation

zero

+ max

- max

example of Amp 

Keyboard Track settings

AMS = Amp KTrk +/–

AMS Intensity = positive (+) value



Depth and direction of modulation

zero

+ max

- max

AMS = Amp KTrk 0/+

AMS Intensity = positive (+) value



Depth and direction of modulation

zero

+ max

- max

AMS = Amp KTrk +/0

AMS Intensity = positive (+) value



Depth and direction of modulation

zero

+ max

- max



125

Global edit environment

The Write window

15. GLOBAL EDIT ENVIRONMENT

The Global edit environment is the place where you can set

most of the Pa50SD global functions, i.e. functions overrid-

ing any operating mode. This edit environment overlaps the

current operating mode (Style, Song Play, Song, Backing

Sequence).

THE WRITE WINDOW

Open this window by pressing the WRITE button while one

of the Global pages is in the display. Here, you can save vari-

ous global settings. Among the global settings saved with this

page are also the Preference parameters of the Style Play and

Song Play mode, plus the Global Protect parameter of the

Card mode. The Split Point is also saved here.

While this page is on the display, press ENTER twice. The

parameters are saved to the Flash-ROM, and will stay in

memory even when turning the instrument off.

From any page, press MENU to open the Global edit menu.

This menu gives access to the various Global edit pages.

When in this menu, select a section using the VOLUME/

VALUE buttons, press PAGE+ to select a page, or press EXIT

to exit the menu.

When in a page, press EXIT to go back to current operating

mode (Style Play, Song Play, Song, Backing Sequence).

PAGE 1 - GENERAL CONTROLS

This page contains various general parameters, setting the

status of the keyboard, the speakers and the metronome.

Vel.Curve (Velocity Curve)

This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboard to your

touch.

1 No dynamic control available. Dynamic values

are ﬁxed, as in a classic organ.

2…9 Curves, from the lightest one to the hardest

one.

M.Tune (Master Tune)

This is the master tuning of the instrument. Use it to adapt

your keyboard tuning to an acoustic instrument, for example

an acoustic piano.

-50 Lowest pitch.

00 Standard pitch (A4=440Hz).

+50 Highest pitch.

Scale

This parameter sets the main scale (or temperament) for the

whole instrument, apart for tracks where a different scale is

selected by a Performance or STS (see “Scale” on page 44).

See “Scales” on page 227 for a list of available scales.

Note: You cannot select a User scale in Global mode.

Key

This parameter is needed by some scales to set the preferred

key (see “Scale” on page 44).

Speakers

This parameter turns the internal speakers on or off.

Note: Speakers are always turned on again each time you turn

the instrument on.

Met.Vol (Metronome Volume)

Volume of the metronome.

40…127 Relative volume, from minimum to maximum.

Press 'Enter'

to store

the Global

Write Global:

General Ctl Midi Out

Pdl/Fw/Sld

MidiSet/Ctl

Midi In

Global Menu

Vel.Curve:3 M.Tune:+00

Scale:Equal

Met.Vol:110 Key:C

Spkrs:On

Gbl:Gen.Controls

126 Global edit environment

Page 2 - Master Transpose

PAGE 2 - MASTER TRANSPOSE

This page is where you can turn the Master Transpose on or

off.

Style/Realtime

This is a ﬂag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the

Style and Realtime (Keyboard) tracks.

Off No Master Transpose is applied to the Style

and Realtime tracks.

Sync Sync mode. When you press either the

TRANSPOSE [] or [] buttons, the new trans-

pose setting will not take effect until the ﬁrst

beat of the next measure is reached. The Real-

time tracks sounding at the time of the trans-

pose will be stopped.

RTime Realtime mode. When you press either the

TRANSPOSE [] or [] buttons, the new trans-

pose setting will occur when the next note is

played for both the Style and Realtime tracks

individually. (Note that any notes sounding

from the Realtime tracks will be stopped when

you press the TRANSPOSE button) The next

key or chord you press will sound with the new

transpose setting. (Note that if you play a Real-

time track prior to a new chord, the Realtime

track will play in the new key as the Style will

continue to play in the old key until a new

chord is entered).

Seq 1/2

This is a ﬂag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the

two onboard Sequencers’ tracks.

Midi In

This is a ﬂag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the

received MIDI messages.

Scales

The Scale Transpose Position allows you to decide the rela-

tion between the Scale and the Master Transpose.

Post-KB When this option is selected, notes will be

transposed immediately after they leave the

keyboard. The Scale will be applied to the

transposed notes. For example, if you altered

an E, and then set the Master Transpose to +1,

the E key will play F, and the altered key will be

E (that will play an altered E).

Pre-OSC When this option is selected, all notes are

transposed immediately before they enter the

internal tone generator. Therefore, the Scale

will be applied before transposition. For exam-

ple, if you altered an E, and then set the Master

Transpose to +1, the altered key will still be E

(that will play an altered F).

PAGE 3 - ASSIGNABLE PEDAL/FOOTSWITCH,

ASSIGNABLE SLIDER

This page lets you program the Assignable Pedal/Footswitch,

and the Assignable Slider.

See page 225 for a list of the assignable functions. The ﬁrst

functions are switch-type functions, while the remaining

(starting from Master Volume) are continuous-like func-

tions.

P/S (Pedal/Switch)

Continuous pedal, or footswitch, connected to the ASSIGN-

ABLE PDL/SW connector.

Sld (Slider)

Function assigned to the ASSIGNABLE SLIDER on the front

panel.

Damper Pol. (Damper Polarity)

Polarity of the Damper pedal.

Pedal/Sw.Pol. (Pedal/Footswitch Polarity)

Polarity of the Assignable pedal or footswitch.

PAGE 4 - MIDI SETUP

MIDI channels can be automatically conﬁgured by selecting a

MIDI Setup. Each of them assigns the best values to various

MIDI parameters, to allow an easier connection with a par-

ticular MIDI controller.

Note: After selecting a MIDI Setup, you can apply any changes

to each channel’s settings. To store the changes in memory, press

WRITE and save the Global in memory.

See “MIDI” on page 35 for more information on using the

MIDI Setups.

Style/Realtime:Sync

Sequsencer1/2 :On

Midi In :Off

Scales :Post-KB

Gbl:M.Transpose

Scale Tone

generator

Transpose

Scale Tone

generator

Transpose

P/S:Soft

Sld:M.Volume

Damper Pol.:-(Korg)

Pedal/Sw. Pol.:-(Korg)

Gbl:P/Sw-Sld

Default Accordion1

Master Kbd Accordion2

Sequencer1 Accordion3

Sequencer2 Ext.Seq

Gbl:Midi Setup

127

Global edit environment

Page 5 - MIDI Controls

Default This a default setting. It is suitable both for

programming on an external sequencer, and

for playing Pa50SD with a master keyboard.

Master Kbd Select this setting when you are connecting a

mute master keyboard.

Sequencer 1 This setting is for playing a Song (Sequencer 1)

with an external instrument sounds, or for lis-

tening to a Song performed by an external

sequencer using Pa50SD as a sound generator.

Each track (S1 Tr1-16) corresponds to a MIDI

channel with the same number (1-16).

Sequencer 2 As above, but with Sequencer 2.

Accordion 1…3

Select one of these settings when connecting a

MIDI Accordion.

Ext.Seq This setting is for programming a Song on an

external sequencer.

PAGE 5 - MIDI CONTROLS

This page lets you program general MIDI parameters.

Local

The Local parameter turns the keyboard on or off.

Note: The Local parameter is always turned on again each time

you turn the instrument on.

On When you play on the keyboard, MIDI data is

sent to the internal sound generator and to the

MIDI OUT port.

Off The keyboard is connected to the MIDI OUT,

but cannot play the internal sound generator.

This is very useful when working with an

external sequencer, to send notes and control-

lers from the keyboard to the external

sequencer, and then let the sequencer send

them back to the sound generator, without

overlapping. See the MIDI chapter.

Clock

This parameter selects the MIDI Clock source.

Note: The Clock parameter is always set to “Int” each time you

turn the instrument on.

Internal Internal, i.e. the clock generated by the Pa50SD

Sequencer 1 internal metronome.

MIDI External from MIDI. The Pa50SD is slaved to

an external instrument or sequencer, con-

nected to its MIDI IN port. The Start/Stop and

Play/Stop commands, and the metronome

Tempo, cannot be selected from the control

panel of the Pa50SD. Use the external instru-

ment to set the Tempo, and start or stop the

sequencers (Song, Song Play, Backing

Sequence modes) and the arranger (Style and

Backing Sequence modes).

Clock Send

This parameter turns the clock information on the MIDI

OUT on or off.

Off The Pa50SD cannot send the MIDI Clock sig-

nal. You cannot slave another instrument to

the Pa50SD, even when connected to the MIDI

OUT.

MIDI The Pa50SD can send the MIDI Clock signal.

You can slave another instrument to the

Pa50SD Tempo, Start/Stop and Play/Stop com-

mands. Connect the other instrument to the

Pa50SD MIDI OUT port.

PAGE 6 - MIDI IN CHANNELS

In this page, you can assign the Pa50SD tracks to any of the

MIDI IN channels. Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch

from channels 1-8 to channels 9-16.

Channel

You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks:

(Off) No track assigned.

Lower Lower track.

Upper1…3 One of the Upper tracks.

Drum Drum track.

Perc Percussion track.

Bass Bass track.

Acc1…5 One of the Auto-accompaniment tracks.

S1 T1…16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks.

S2 T1…16 One of Sequencer 2 tracks.

Global Special channel to simulate the Pa50SD’s inte-

grated controls (keyboard, pedals, joystick)

with an external keyboard or controller. MIDI

messages coming on this channel are consid-

ered as being generated by Pa50SD’s integrated

controllers.

Control On this special channel, the Pa50SD receives

MIDI messages to remotely select Styles, Per-

formances, STS and Style Elements. See tables

on page 144 and following for more informa-

tion on the received data

Local:On

Clock:Internal

Clock Send:Off

Gbl:MIDI Ctl

Ch01:Upper1 Ch05:Upper3

Ch02:Lower Ch06:Global

Ch03:Bass Ch07:Pad1

Ch04:Upper2 Ch08:Pad2

Gbl:Midi In Chnl

128 Global edit environment

Page 7 - MIDI IN Controls (1)

PAGE 7 - MIDI IN CONTROLS (1)

This page is where you can program the Chord Recognition

channels for the internal arranger, and a ﬁxed velocity value

for all notes appearing at the input.

There are two separate Chord channels. This is very useful

when you must send chords to Pa50SD on two channels (like

with some MIDI Accordions).

Chord1 channel

Notes entering this channel are sent to the Chord Recogni-

tion engine.

Chord2 channel

Notes entering this channel are sent to the Chord Recogni-

tion engine.

Velocity Input

Use this parameter to set a ﬁxed velocity (dynamics) value for

all MIDI notes entering. This is useful when playing the

Pa50SD with an organ or a MIDI Accordion.

Normal Normal velocity values are received.

40…127 All received velocity values are converted to the

selected value.

PAGE 8 - MIDI IN CONTROLS (2)

This is another page containing various MIDI IN settings,

like note transposition for the Realtime tracks. The transpose

parameters are useful to many MIDI accordion players,

whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected

octave.

UppOct (Upper Octave)

Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN for the

Upper tracks. For example, if you select the +1 value, a

received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa50SD.

LowOct (Lower Octave)

Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN for the

Lower track. For example, if you select the +1 value, a

received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa50SD.

OctIn (Octave In)

Enables/disables the octave transposition of data received via

MIDI.

On Data received via MIDI can be transposed,

according to the selected Octave Transposition.

For example, if the Octave Transposition is +1,

a received C4 will actually play a C5.

Off Data received via MIDI can’t be transposed by

the Octave Transposition applied to the track.

For example, if the Octave Transposition is +1,

a received C4 will still play a C4.

Mute In

Use this parameter to determine if a muted track can still play

data received via MIDI.

On No data received via MIDI on a muted track

can be played by Pa50SD.

Off Data received via MIDI on a muted track can

still play on the Pa50SD.

Chord1 channel:Off

Chord2 channel:Off

Velocity In:Normal

Gbl:MidiIn Ctl 1

UppOct:+1 OctIn:Off

LowOct:+0 MuteIn:Off

Gbl:MidiIn Ctl 2

129

Global edit environment

Page 9 - MIDI IN Filters

PAGE 9 - MIDI IN FILTERS

Use this page to set up to 8 ﬁlters for the MIDI data received

by the Pa50SD.

Filters

Selected MIDI IN ﬁlters.

Off No ﬁlter.

Pitch Bend Pitch Bend.

MonoTouch Mono (or Channel) After Touch.

PolyTouch Poly After Touch.

PrgChange Program Change.

SysExcl System Exclusive.

All CC All Control Change messages.

0…127 Control Change message #0…127. See “MIDI

Controllers” on page 228 for a list of available

Control Change messages.

PAGE 10 - MIDI OUT CHANNELS

In this page, you can assign to any MIDI OUT channel one of

Pa50SD’s tracks. Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch

from channels 1-8 to channels 9-16.

Channel

You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks:

(Off) No track assigned.

Lower Lower track.

Upper1…3 One of the Upper tracks.

Drum Drum track.

Perc Percussion track.

Bass Bass track.

Acc1…5 One of the Auto-accompaniment tracks.

S1 T1…16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks.

S2 T1…16 One of Sequencer 2 tracks.

SQ Tr01…16 Use these channels to send data generated by a

track with the same name on either or both

onboard sequencers at the same time.

Chord Use this channel to send notes recognized by

the Chord Recognition engine to the MIDI

OUT. This is useful, for example, to control an

external Harmonizer from the Pa50SD, using

the Lower track to play chords, even if the

track is in mute.

PAGE 11 - MIDI OUT FILTERS

Use this page to set up to 8 ﬁlters for the MIDI data sent by

the Pa50SD.

Filters

Selected MIDI OUT ﬁlters.

Off No ﬁlter.

Pitch Bend Pitch Bend.

MonoTouch Mono (or Channel) After Touch.

PolyTouch Poly After Touch.

PrgChange Program Change.

SysExcl System Exclusive.

All CC All Control Change messages.

0…127 Control Change message #0…127. See “MIDI

Controllers” on page 228 for a list of available

Control Change messages.

SysEx PitchBend

MonoTouch Off

0 Bank Sel. Off

1 Mod1 (Y+) Off

Gbl:MidiIn Filt.

Ch01:Upper1 Ch05:Upper3

Ch02:Lower Ch06:Acc1

Ch03:Bass Ch07:Acc2

Ch04:Upper2 Ch08:Acc3

Gbl:Midi Out Chnl

SysEx PitchBend

MonoTouch Off

0 Bank Sel. Off

1 Mod1 (Y+) Off

Gbl:MidiOut Flt.

130 Card Edit environment

The WRITE/CARD IN USE LED

16. CARD EDIT ENVIRONMENT

The Card Edit environment is the place where you can man-

age ﬁles. This edit environment overlaps the current operat-

ing mode (Style Play, Song Play, Backing Sequence, Song,

Program).

THE WRITE/CARD IN USE LED

When the drive is reading or writing data on a card, the

WRITE/CARD IN USE indicator lights up. While in a Card

page, the “Wait” message appears in the display; in this situa-

tion, you can’t select a different Card page (you can, however,

select a different operative mode).

Warning! Never remove a card when the WRITE/CARD IN

USE LED is turned on!

SUPPORTED CARDS

You can use the following types of cards to save or load data

to and from the Pa50SD’s internal memory:

• SD (High Speed, Ultra II, SDHC)

• MMC

• MicroSD with an SD adapter

• MiniSD with an SD adapter

Note: Before you can use the SD/MMC card, you must format it on

the Pa50SD. Don’t use your computer or digital camera to format

(initialize) a card you plan to use with the Pa50SD. If the card was

formatted on a different device, it may not work correctly with the

Pa50SD

Note: The SD/MMC card is not included. It must be purchased

separately.

Note: The Pa50SD supports SD cards with a power supply voltage

of 2.7–3.6V.

SD and MMC card handling

• Do not remove the card from the drive while the Pa50SD is

reading or saving data.

• The SD/MMC card may be hot immediately following use.

Power-off the Pa50SD and wait for the card to cool before

removing it.

• SD/MMC cards are precision parts. Do not bend them,

drop them, or subject them to physical shock.

• Avoid using or storing SD/MMC cards in locations of

extremely high or low temperature such as in direct sunlight,

a closed automobile, or near a heater, or in locations of high

humidity or excessive dust.

• Avoid using or storing SD/MMC cards in locations where

they may be subject to strong static electricity or electrical

noise.

• Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to adhere to the contacts

of an SD/MMC card. If the contacts should become soiled,

gently wipe them off using a dry cloth.

• When you are not using an SD/MMC card, keep it in the

protective case that was included with the card to prevent it

from being damaged by static electricity.

• Do not leave an SD/MMC card where it is accessible by

infants or children who might place it in their mouth and

swallow it.

• Carefully read and observe the owner’s manual included

with your SD/MMC card.

Write protecting an SD card

SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the data

from being overwritten accidentally and lost. If you set the

card’s switch to the protected setting, it will be impossible to

write or erase data on the card, or to format it. If you need to

save edited data on the card, move the switch back to its orig-

inal unprotected setting.

Inserting/exchanging cards

Inserting a card

Insert the card, making sure that it is oriented correctly. The

gold contacts should be facing down, and the angled corner

to your right.

Removing a card

Press the card inward and release it, and the card will pop

out.

Note: Before you can use an SD card, you must format it on the

Pa50SD. The card may not work if it was formatted on another

device.

Organizing your data into separate folders

We suggest to organize your data into separate folders,

instead of saving many ﬁles into the root (i.e., the main level)

of the card. This allows for faster accesses to the card, thus a

quicker response of the Pa50SD to your CARD commands.

ALL |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save |Wait

Write-protect

switch

Protected

SD card slot

SD card

Card-ENG.fm Page 130 Thursday, March 19, 2009 5:24 PM

131

Card Edit environment

Loading data created with the Pa80/Pa60

LOADING DATA CREATED WITH THE PA80/PA60

Pa50SD data is perfectly interchangeable with its Pa80 and

Pa60 counterparts. The only data Pa50SD can’t load from

Pa80/Pa60 is the following:

• Digital Drawbar Programs

• Input 1/2 settings

• VHG1 Vocal/Guitar Processor Board settings

• EC5 settings

• TO HOST port setting

• Audio Output routing

At the same time, Pa80 and Pa60 can read any data created

with the Pa50SD.

CARD STRUCTURE

Each card (and the internal memory) can contain ﬁles and

folders. The data structure in Pa50SD is slightly more rigor-

ously determined than in a computer, due to the pre-conﬁg-

ured data structure inside the instrument’s memory. The

diagram on the right shows the global structure of a Pa50SD

card.

Note: Style banks from 1 to 16 (Factory Styles) can be seen in

Card mode only when the “Factory Style Protect” parameter is

set to Off (see page 141), and only when loading or saving a sin-

gle Style bank.

FILE TYPES

The following tables describe all the ﬁle and folder types the

Pa50SD can manage. Here are the ﬁles you can read or write

on the Pa50SD.

The Pa50SD can also read the following common types of

data.

Extension File/folder type

SET All the User data. (This is a folder containing

other folders).

GBL Global, Seq1+Seq2 Setup

PRF Performance

PCG User Program

STY User Style

Extension File type

MID Midi ﬁle (Standard MIDI File, SMF)

KAR Karaoke ﬁle

JBX Jukebox

MYDIR.SET

GLOBAL

PERFORM

BANK01.GBL

BANK01.PRF

1-1 Grand Piano

…

1-8 Full Strings

BANK02.PRF

2-1 Jazz Brass

…

2-8 Jazz Strings

BANK….PRF

BANK10.PRF

2-1 Rock Brass

…

2-8 Rock Strings

PROGRAM

USER01.PCG

USERDK.PCG

STYLE

BANK01.STY

1-1 8 Beat 1

…

1-16 8 Beat 16

BANK….STY

USER01.STY

U1-1 User 1

…

U1-16 User 16

USER02.STY

U2-1 User 1

…

U2-16 User 16

USER03.STY

U3-1 User 1

…

U3-16 User 16

BANK16.STY

16-1 Traditional 1

…

16-8 Traditional 16

1 Piano 1

…

64 SynBrass22

1 Standard Kit

…

64 Orchestral Kit

USER02.PCG

1 SopranoSax

…

64 Noise

132 Card Edit environment

File and folder size display

FILE AND FOLDER SIZE DISPLAY

The size of any ﬁle and folder in the card can be seen in the

display.

The single ﬁle size is always shown on the right of the ﬁle:

To see a folder size, ﬁrst move it to the ﬁrst line of the display,

then keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press the F3 (Open)

function key under the display. A dialog box will appear,

showing the size of the folder:

Press EXIT to exit this dialog.

PAGE STRUCTURE

Here is the typical structure of a Card page.

Operating mode icon

When in the Card Edit environment, one of the operating

modes is still active in the background. The operating mode

icon shows which mode is currently active. Press EXIT to go

back to the current operating mode from any of the Card

pages.

Page header

This line shows the Card page you are in.

Card content

These lines show the content of the current folder. Move the

item to select to the ﬁrst line, using the E-F (Scroll Up) and

G-H (Scroll Down) VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls.

Use the Page commands (F1-F4) on the last line to execute an

operation on the selected ﬁle or folder.

The “ ” symbol before a name identiﬁes a folder (i.e., a

“folder” containing other ﬁles).

Page commands

You can use these commands to browse through ﬁles and

folders, and to execute data transfer commands (load,

save…). Commands may be different in any Card page. Use

the F1-F4 buttons to select the corresponding command.

NAVIGATION TOOLS

When in a Card page, you can use any of the following com-

mands to browse through the ﬁles and folders, or through the

list of commands.

E-F (Scroll Up)

Scroll the list up. Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these

buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical section.

G-H (Scroll Down)

Scroll the list down. Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of

these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical section.

TEMPO/VALUE section

These controls scroll the list up or down.

F1 (SD)

Press this button after replacing a card in the card drive. After

pressing this button, the new card will be scanned, and the

ﬁle list shown on the display will be updated.

F2 (Data transfer command)

Executes the shown operation.

F3 (Open)

Opens the selected folder or bank (ﬁles whose name begins

with the “ ” icon.

F4 (Close)

Closes the current folder, returning to the parent (“upper”)

folder.

From any page, press MENU to open the Card Edit menu.

This menu gives access to the various Card Edit pages.

When in this menu, select a section using the VOLUME/

VALUE buttons, press PAGE+ to select a page, or press EXIT

to exit the menu.

When in any page, press EXIT to go back to the current oper-

ating mode.

ETNICA.MID 11K|

MYFUNNY 23K

WWALTZ 12K|

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

Directory size:

384 Kb

NEWNAME.SET |

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

Operating mode icon Page header

Page commands

Card content

Load Format

Save New Dir

Copy Rename

Erase Utilities

Card Menu

133

Card Edit environment

Page 1 - Load

PAGE 1 - LOAD

In this page you can load ﬁles from a card to the internal

memory.

Press SD CARD and use the MENU button to reach this

page.

Loading all the User data

You can load all the User data (Performances, User Programs,

User Styles, Global) with a single operation.

1. Insert the source card into the card drive.

2. Press F1 to scan the card and show the ﬁle list.

3. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to select the “.SET” folder containing the data

you wish to load.

Move the folder to the ﬁrst line of the display. If the

folder you are looking for is in another folder, use the F3

(Open) button to open it. Use the F4 (Close) button to

go back to the parent folder.

4. Press F2 (Load) to conﬁrm the selection. The “Are you

sure?” message appears. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or

EXIT to abort.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), the source page comes back in the display,

and you may perform further loading operations.

Note: Data loaded from card, and data already in memory

is merged. For example, if there is data in all three USER

Style banks in memory (USER01, USER02, USER03), and

there is only the USER01 Style bank on the card, the

USER01 bank is overwritten, while USER02 and USER03

banks are left unchanged.

As a result, you will have a STYLE folder in memory con-

taining the USER01 bank you just loaded, and the old

USER02 and USER03 banks.

Loading all data of a speciﬁed type

You can load all User data of a speciﬁed type (User Programs,

User Styles, Performances) with a single operation.

1. Insert the source card into the card drive.

2. Press F1 to scan the card and show the ﬁle list.

3. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to select the “.SET” folder containing the data

you wish to load.

Move the folder to the ﬁrst line of the display. If the

folder you are looking for is in another folder, use the F3

(Open) button to open it. Use the F4 (Close) button to

go back to the parent folder.

4. Press F3 (Open) to open the “.SET” folder. A list of User

data appears (Performance, Program, Style, Global).

5. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the data type you are looking for to

the ﬁrst line of the display.

6. Press F2 (Load) to conﬁrm your selection. The “Are you

sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or

EXIT to abort.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), the source page comes back in the display,

and you may perform further loading operations.

Note: Data loaded from card, and data already in memory

are merged. For example, if there is data in all three USER

Style banks in memory (USER01, USER02, USER03), and

there is only the USER01 Style bank on the card, the

USER01 bank is overwritten, while USER02 and USER03

banks are left unchanged.

As a result, you will have a STYLE folder in memory con-

taining the USER01 bank you just loaded, and the old

USER02 and USER03 banks.

Loading a single bank

You can load a single bank of User data (User Programs, User

Styles, Performances) with a single operation. A bank corre-

sponds to a STYLE or PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE button.

1. Insert the source card into the card drive.

2. Press F1 to scan the card and show the ﬁle list.

3. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to select the “.SET” folder containing the data

you wish to load.

Move the folder to the ﬁrst line of the display. If the

folder you are looking for is in another folder, use the F3

(Open) button to open it. Use the F4 (Close) button to

go back to the parent folder.

4. Press F3 (Open) to open the “.SET” folder. A list of User

data appears (Global, Performance, Program, Style).

5. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the data type you are looking for to

the ﬁrst line of the display.

NEWNAME.SET |

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

PERFORM |

PROGRAM

STYLE |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

PERFORM |

PROGRAM

STYLE |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

134 Card Edit environment

Page 1 - Load

6. Press F3 (Open) to open the selected folder. A list of

User banks appears.

7. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the desired bank to the ﬁrst line of the

display.

8. Press F2 (Load) to conﬁrm the ﬁle selection. The list of

User banks in memory appears.

In the page above, the previously selected Style bank will

be loaded into the bank 1 (USER1 button) in memory.

The existing Styles in memory will be deleted and over-

written.

9. Scroll the available locations in memory, using the E-H

(Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE controls).

10. When the target bank is selected (i.e., it is in the ﬁrst line

of the display), press F2 (Load) to load the bank. The

“Are you sure message” will appear. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Warning: After conﬁrming, all User data contained in the

bank in memory is deleted.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), the source page comes back in the display,

and you may perform further loading operations.

Loading a single item

You can load a single User item (i.e., a single User Program, a

single User Style, or a single Performance) with a single oper-

ation.

1. Insert the source card into the card drive.

2. Press F1 to scan the card and show the ﬁle list.

3. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to select the “.SET” folder containing the item

you wish to load.

Move the folder to the ﬁrst line of the display. If the

folder you are looking for is in another folder, use the F3

(Open) button to open it. Use the F4 (Close) button to

go back to the parent folder.

4. Press F3 (Open) to open the “.SET” folder. A list of User

data appears (Global, Performance, Program, Style).

5. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the data type you are looking for to

the ﬁrst line of the display.

6. Press F3 (Open) to open the selected folder. A list of

User banks appears.

7. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the desired bank to the ﬁrst line of the

display.

8. Press F3 (Open) to open the selected bank. A list of User

items appears.

9. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the desired item to the ﬁrst line of the

display.

10. Press F2 (Load) to conﬁrm the ﬁle selection. The inter-

nal memory ﬁle list appears. If you are loading a single

ﬁle or bank of Styles, Programs or Performances, you

are prompted to choose a destination in memory. For

example, when loading a single Style, after selecting the

Load command, a page similar to the following appears

in the display:

In the page above, the previously selected Style will be

loaded into the location U1:1 (USER1 button, Style 01)

USER01.STY |

USER02.STY

USER03.STY |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

User01 |

User02

User03 |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

PERFORM |

PROGRAM

STYLE |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

USER01.STY |

USER02.STY

USER03.STY |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

U1: 1 16BeatNew

U1: 2 8Beat

U1: 3 WalzerMarch |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

to U1: 1 16BeatNew

to U1: 2 _ _ _ _ _ _

to U1: 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ |

SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE

Card:Load

135

Card Edit environment

Page 2 - Save

in memory. The existing Style in memory will be deleted

and overwritten.

11.Scroll the available locations in memory, using the E-H

(Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE controls).

When the target location is selected (i.e., it is in the ﬁrst

line of the display), press F2 (Load) to load the ﬁle.

Locations marked with a row of underscores (“_ _ _”)

are empty locations.

12. Once the target location is selected, press F2 (Load) to

load the ﬁle. The “Are you sure?” message will appear.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Warning: After conﬁrming, the item you are overwriting

in memory will be deleted.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), the source page comes back in the display,

and you may perform further loading operations.

PAGE 2 - SAVE

In this page, you can save User data from the internal mem-

ory to a card. You can save ﬁles, banks, or all the User ﬁles of

the internal memory.

Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to

reach this page.

Here are the various types of ﬁles contained in memory:

Saving the whole memory content

You can save the whole content of the memory with a single

operation.

1. Insert the target card into the card drive.

2. The whole content (“All”) of the internal memory is

already selected. Press F2 (Save) to conﬁrm the selec-

tion.

3. The content of the target card appears.

At this point, you can:

• Create a new “.SET” folder (see “Creating a new “.SET”

folder” on page 137).

• Save onto an existing “.SET” folder.

4. If you are saving into an existing folder, move the

desired “.SET” folder to the ﬁrst line of the display, using

the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols).

5. Once the target folder is selected, press F2 (Save) to save

the ﬁles. The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press

ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Warning: After conﬁrming, all data in the target folder is

deleted.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), the source page comes back in the display,

and you may perform further saving operations.

Saving all data of a speciﬁc type

You can save all data of a speciﬁc type with a single operation.

1. Insert the target card into the card drive.

2. The whole content (“All”) of the internal memory is

already selected. Press F3 (Open) to open the “All”

folder. A list of User data types appear (each type is a

separate folder).

3. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the data type you are looking for to

the ﬁrst line of the display.

4. Once you have selected the type of data required, press

F2 (Save) to conﬁrm the selection.

5. The content of the target card appears.

At this point, you can:

The ﬁle/folder

type… …contains… …and will create on

the card…

ALL All the User data in

memory

A .SET folder

Style The USER 01-03 Styles A STYLE folder inside

a .SET folder

Program The USER Programs

and Drum Kits

A PROGRAM folder

inside a .SET folder

Perform (Per-

formances)

The Performances A PERFORM folder

inside a .SET folder

.GBL ﬁle The Global. All

parameters marked

with within the

Style Play, Song Play,

Song and Global

chapters are saved in

the Global.

A GLOBAL folder

inside a .SET folder

ALL

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

NEW_NAME.SET

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

GLOBAL |

PERFORM

PROGRAM |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

NEW_NAME.SET

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

136 Card Edit environment

Page 2 - Save

• Create a new “.SET” folder (see “Creating a new “.SET”

folder” on page 137).

• Save onto an existing “.SET” folder.

6. If you are saving into an existing folder, move the

desired “.SET” folder to the ﬁrst line of the display, using

the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols).

7. Once the target folder is selected, press F2 (Save) to save

the ﬁles. The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press

ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Warning: After conﬁrming, all data in the target folder is

deleted.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), the source page comes back in the display,

and you may perform further saving operations.

Saving a single bank

You can save a single User bank with a single operation. A

bank corresponds to a button on the control panel of the

instrument (i.e. a button of the STYLE section).

1. Insert the target card into the card drive.

2. The whole content (“All”) of the internal memory is

already selected. Press F3 (Open) to open the “All”

folder. A list of User data types appear (each type is a

separate folder).

3. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the data type you are looking for to

the ﬁrst line of the display.

4. Once the data type is selected, press F3 (Open) to open

the folder and gain access to the separate banks.

5. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the bank to save to the ﬁrst line of the

display.

6. Once you have selected the bank that you want to save,

press F2 (Save) to conﬁrm the selection.

7. The content of the target card appears.

At this point, you can:

• Create a new “.SET” folder (see “Creating a new “.SET”

folder” on page 137).

• Save onto an existing “.SET” folder.

8. If you are saving into an existing folder, move the

desired “.SET” folder to the ﬁrst line of the display, using

the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols).

9. Press F2 (Save) to conﬁrm. A list of banks on the target

card appears. Only banks of the selected type are shown.

10. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the target bank to the ﬁrst line of the

display.

11.Once the target bank is selected, press F2 (Save) to save

the ﬁles. The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Press

ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Warning: If you conﬁrm, any data in the target bank will

be deleted.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), the source page comes back in the display,

and you may perform further saving operations.

Saving a single item

You can save a single User item with a single operation.

1. Insert the target card into the card drive.

2. The whole content (“All”) of the internal memory is

already selected. Press F3 (Open) to open the “All”

folder. A list of User data types appear (each type is a

separate folder).

3. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the data type you are looking for to

the ﬁrst line of the display.

GLOBAL |

PERFORM

PROGRAM |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

USER01.STY |

USER02.STY

USER03.STY |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

NEW_NAME.SET

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

GLOBAL |

PERFORM

PROGRAM |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

137

Card Edit environment

Page 2 - Save

4. Once the data type is selected, press F3 (Open) to open

the folder and gain access to the separate banks.

5. Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the bank containing the ﬁle to save to

the ﬁrst line of the display.

6. Once you have selected the bank, press F3 (Open) to

gain access to the single ﬁles.

7. Once you have selected the ﬁle that you want to save,

press F2 (Save) to conﬁrm the selection.

8. The content of the target card appears in the display.

At this point, you can:

• Create a new “.SET” folder (see “Creating a new “.SET”

folder” on page 137).

• Save onto an existing “.SET” folder (saved data is

merged with the existing data on the card).

9. If you are saving into an existing folder, move the

desired “.SET” folder to the ﬁrst line of the display, using

the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols).

10. Press F2 (Save) to conﬁrm. A list of ﬁles on the target

device appears. Only ﬁles of the selected type are shown.

Locations marked with a row of underscores (“___”) are

empty locations.

11.Use the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE

controls) to move the target location to the ﬁrst line of

the display.

12. Once the target location is selected, press F2 (Save) to

save the ﬁle. The “Are you sure?” message will appear.

Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT to abort.

Warning: If you conﬁrm, any data at the target location

will be deleted.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), the source page comes back in the display,

and you may perform further saving operations.

Creating a new “.SET” folder

When saving data (Save operations), you can save onto exist-

ing folders, or you can create a new “.SET” folder. Here is how

to do it.

1. When the ﬁle list of the target card is in the display, use

the E-H (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE con-

trols) to move the “NEW_NAME.SET” item to the ﬁrst

line of the display.

Note: A “NEW_NAME.SET” item is always the ﬁrst item

in any directory.

2. When the “NEW_NAME.SET” item is selected, press

one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons. You are

prompted to assign a name to the new folder:

3. Move the cursor using the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons.

Select a character using the DIAL. Insert a character at

the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button.

Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the

DELETE button.

4. When you have ﬁnished writing a name for the new

folder, press F2 (Save) to conﬁrm. The “Are you sure?”

message will appear. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or EXIT

to abort.

USER01.STY |

USER02.STY

USER03.STY |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

U1: 1 8B-Groove1

U1: 2 8B-Groove2

U1: 3 8B-Groove3 |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

NEW_NAME.SET

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

to U1: 1 16BeatNew

to U1: 2 8Beat

to U1: 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ |

SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE

Card:Save

NEW_NAME.SET

138 Card Edit environment

Page 3 - Copy

PAGE 3 - COPY

In this page you can copy single ﬁles (i.e., midiﬁles of Jukebox

ﬁles), whole folders (generic or “.SET” folders), or a generic

folder’s content. Note that you can copy data only inside the

same card.

To preserve the data structure integrity, during Copy opera-

tions you can’t open a “.SET” folder, and copy one of its ﬁles.

You can only open generic folders.

Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to

reach this page.

Copying a whole folder or folder’s content

You can copy a folder (generic or “.SET”) into a different

folder. If selecting the <current dir> item, you can copy the

current folder’s content, without copying the folder itself. If

copying a whole folder, a new folder with the same name is

created at the target location.

Note: During the Copy procedure, you can’t open a “.SET”

folder. You can, anyway, open any generic folder.

1. Insert the card into the card drive.

2. Press F1 to scan the card and show the ﬁle list.

3. Move the folder that you want to copy to the ﬁrst line of

the display. If it is contained in another folder, use the F3

(Open) button to open it. Press F4 (Close) to go back to

the previous hierarchic level.

To copy just the current folder’s content, move the <cur-

rent dir> item to the ﬁrst line of the display.

4. Once the item to copy is on the ﬁrst line, press F2

(Copy) to conﬁrm the item selection. The window’s

header changes from “Copy from” to “Copy to”.

5. Move the target folder to the ﬁrst line in the display.

• To copy into an existing generic folder (not a “.SET”

folder), select that folder.

• To copy into the current folder, select the <current dir>

item.

6. Once the target is selected, press F2 (Copy). The “Over-

write?” message appears:

Press ENTER to conﬁrm overwriting, EXIT to avoid it.

When you decide to overwrite, the data you are copying

will replace the existing data on the target. For example,

if the same midiﬁle exists on the target folder, it will be

overwritten. If a USER bank exists, it will be overwrit-

ten.

Data that doesn’t exist on the source folder is left

unchanged. For example, if the USER03 Style bank

exists on the target folder, but not in the source folder, it

is left untouched after copying the other banks.

When you decide not to overwrite, data existing on the

target folder is left unchanged, therefore are not copied.

7. The “Are you sure?” message appears. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort the copy.

Copying a single ﬁle

You can copy a single ﬁle from a generic folder to a different

folder. The ﬁle must reside on the root (the main/highest

folder in the card hierarchy) or into a generic folder. You can’t

copy single ﬁles from a “.SET” folder.

1. Insert the card into the card drive.

2. Press F1 to scan the card and show the ﬁle list.

3. Move the folder, containing the ﬁle you wish to copy, to

the ﬁrst line of the display. If it is contained in another

folder, use the F3 (Open) button to open it. Press F4

(Close) to go back to the previous hierarchic level.

4. Press F3 (Open) to open the folder containing the ﬁle to

copy.

5. Move the ﬁle to copy to the ﬁrst line of the display.

6. Once the ﬁle is on the ﬁrst line, press F2 (Copy) to con-

ﬁrm its selection. The window’s header changes from

“Copy from” to “Copy to”.

7. Move the target folder to the ﬁrst line in the display.

Press F3 (Open) to open a folder, F4 (Close) to close it.

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD COPY OPEN CLOSE

Card:Copy from

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD COPY OPEN CLOSE

Card:Copy to

Overwrite on Copy?

Enter/Yes - Exit/No

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD COPY OPEN CLOSE

Card:Copy to

139

Card Edit environment

Page 4 - Erase

8. Once the target is selected, press F2 (Copy). The “Over-

write?” message appears:

Press ENTER to conﬁrm overwriting, EXIT to avoid it.

When you decide to overwrite, the data you are copying

will replace the existing data on the target. For example,

if the same midiﬁle exists on the target folder, it will be

overwritten.

Data that doesn’t exist on the source folder is left

unchanged. For example, if the MYSONG01.MID midi-

ﬁle exists on the target folder, but not in the source

folder, it is left untouched after copying the other data.

When you decide not to overwrite, data existing on the

target folder is left unchanged, therefore are not copied.

9. The “Are you sure?” message appears. Press ENTER to

conﬁrm, EXIT to abort the copy.

PAGE 4 - ERASE

The Erase function lets you erase ﬁles and folders from cards.

Erase procedure

1. If the ﬁle to be deleted is contained in a card, insert the

card into the card drive.

2. Press F1 to select a device. Devices are selected in this

order: SD ➛ SSD ➛ SD…

3. Move the ﬁle or folder that you want to erase to the ﬁrst

line of the display. If the ﬁle or folder you are looking for

is in another folder, use the F3 (Open) button to open it.

Press F4 (Close) to go back to the previous hierarchic

level.

4. Press F2 (Erase) to delete the selected item. The “Are you

sure?” message will appear. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, or

EXIT to abort.

When the operation is completed (the “Wait” indicator

disappears), you are kept on the Erase page, and you

may perform further erase operations.

PAGE 5 - FORMAT

The Format function lets you initialize a card.

Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to

reach this page.

Warning: When formatting a card, all data it contains is lost.

SD Card

This is a very fast format command. This command rewrites

just the FAT (File Allocation Table) of the card, without

actual reformatting of all sectors.

1. Insert a card into the card drive.

2. Press F2 (Format) to select the formatting command.

3. The “Delete all data?” message appears in the display;

press ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

4. The “Press F4 to continue” message appears in the dis-

play; press F4 to conﬁrm formatting, or EXIT to abort.

PAGE 6 - NEW DIR

The New Dir function lets you create a new folder in any of

the cards, or inside any generic folder. You can’t create or

open “.SET” folders, since these are reserved folders, to be

created with a Save operation.

Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to

reach this page.

New folder procedure

1. Insert a card into the card drive.

2. Press F1 to scan the card.

3. Press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons. You are

prompted to assign a name to the new folder:

Move the cursor using the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons.

Select a character using the DIAL. Insert a character at

the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button.

Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the

DELETE button.

4. Press F2 (Create) to conﬁrm. The “Are you sure?” mes-

sage appears. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

Device Type

SD SD (or MMC) Card

SSD Solid State Disk (internal memory)

Overwrite on Copy?

Enter/Yes - Exit/No

MYFILES.SET |

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD DEL OPEN CLOSE

Card:Erase

SD Card |

-- FORMAT -- --

Card:Format

SD CREATE OPEN CLOSE

Card:New Dir

NEW_NAME

140 Card Edit environment

Page 7 - Rename

PAGE 7 - RENAME

Use the Rename function to change the name of a folder or a

ﬁle. To preserve data structure consistence, you can’t rename

single ﬁles inside a “.SET” folder, or the “.SET” folder name

extension.

Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to

reach this page.

Rename procedure

1. Insert the card that contains the ﬁle to be renamed into

the card drive.

2. Press F1 to scan the card.

3. Move the item to rename to the ﬁrst line. Then press one

of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons. You are prompted

to change the name:

Move the cursor using the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons.

Select a character using the DIAL. Insert a character at

the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button.

Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the

DELETE button.

4. Press F2 (Rename) to conﬁrm. The “Are you sure?” mes-

sage appears. Press ENTER to conﬁrm, EXIT to abort.

PAGE 8 - UTILITIES 1

This page includes a set of card utilities.

Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to

reach this page.

SD info

Select this command to see the name of the inserted card,

and the free space on it.

If pressed without a card inserted, the “No card / Unformat-

ted Press Exit” warning appears. Please, insert a card and

press ENTER (or EXIT to abort).

SSD info

Select this command to see the free space on the Solid State

Disk (SSD), used as the system’s internal memory.

Save OS

This command starts an Operating System backup, to save a

copy of the instrument’s Operating System on a card.

Note: Should you not do a back-up and your internal data is

changed, you can download the data from www.korgpa.com, or

ask your local KORG dealer.

1. Select the Save OS command.

2. Insert a card and press ENTER. The following ﬁles are

created on the card:

• BPa50SD.SYS

• NBPa50SD.SYS

• OSPa50SD.LZX

If the card is not formatted, Pa50SD asks if you want to

format it:

Keep SHIFT pressed, and press ENTER to format the

card.

DJSET.SET |

LIVE.SET

ETHNICA.SET |

SD RENAME OPEN CLOSE

Card:Rename

Ethnic.set

SD CardInfo

SSD Info

Save O.S. Backup Data

RestoreData

Card:Util 1

No Card/Unformatted

Sh+Enter to format

141

Card Edit environment

Page 9 - Utilities 2

Backup Data

This command starts a backup of all internal factory data

(Styles, Programs, Performances…) excluding the Operating

System itself.

Note: Should you not do a back-up and your internal data is

changed, you can download the data from www.korgpa.com, or

ask your local KORG dealer.

1. Select the Backup Data command.

2. The “Are you sure?” message appears. Press ENTER to

continue, EXIT to abort.

If the card is not formatted, Pa50SD asks if you want to

format it:

Keep SHIFT pressed, and press ENTER to format the

card.

Restore Data

This command restores the backup of the internal factory

data, executed with the “Backup Data” command.

Note: Should your Factory Data card become corrupt, you can

download the data from www.korgpa.com, or ask your local

KORG dealer.

Warning: Don’t play on the keyboard while restoring data, and

stay in the Card mode. Wait until the “Wait” message disap-

pears, and the WRITE/CARD IN USE LED turns off.

1. Prepare a card containing the Backup folder and insert it

into the drive.

2. Select this command.

3. The “Are you sure?” message appears. Press ENTER to

continue, EXIT to abort.

4. Wait until the backup card has been read.

5. When the Wait message has disappeared, and the

WRITE/CARD IN USE LED has turned off, turn the

instrument off, then on again.

Note: At the end of a Restore Data operation, the “Some ﬁles

missing” error message may appear. This is due to the lack of

Performance banks 11-20 on older versions of the operating sys-

tem of Pa80, whose data you are probably reading. However,

this is not a problem. Press EXIT to close the message window.

PAGE 9 - UTILITIES 2

This page includes the Protect functions.

Global Protect

When loading a “.SET” ﬁle, this parameter (if On) protects

the Global from being reprogrammed by the loaded data. All

Global parameters are therefore left unchanged.

When loading a single “.GLB” ﬁle, this parameter is ignored,

and the Global is overwritten by the loaded data.

Note: This parameter is automatically set to Off when turning

the instrument off.

Factory Style Protect

When On, this parameter protects the Factory Styles (from

the “8 BEAT/16 BEAT 1” to the “TRADITIONAL” bank)

from being overwritten when loading data from card. Fur-

thermore, you can’t access these banks when saving data.

When Off, you can load or save User Styles even into the Fac-

tory Styles banks (from “8 BEAT/16 BEAT 1” to “TRADI-

TIONAL”). This way, you can personalize your Factory Style

banks.

Please note that the Save All procedure always saves only the

USER Style banks.

Note: This parameter is automatically set to On when turning

the instrument off.

Note: Should your accidentally delete some Factory Data,

reload the Backup data, contact your KORG dealer or service

center, or download the data from www.korgpa.com.

No Card/Unformatted

Sh+Enter to format

Global Protect:Off

Fact.Style Protect:On

Card:Util 2

Card-ENG.fm Page 141 Thursday, March 19, 2009 5:24 PM

142 Card Edit environment

Page 9 - Utilities 2

APPENDIX

144 Factory Data

Styles

17. FACTORY DATA

STYLES

Note: You can remotely select Styles on the Pa50SD, by sending it Bank Select MSB (CC#0), Bank Select LSB (CC#32) and Program

Change messages on the Control channel (see page 127).

# CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: 8/16 Beat 1CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: 8/16 Beat 2 CC#0 CC#32 PC Ballad

1 0 0 0 Soft Beat 0 1 0 Guitar Bld1 0 2 0 Groove Bld

2 1 Pop Beat 1 Guitar Bld2 1 Diva

3 2 Stndrd8Beat 2 8Bt Analog1 2 Rock Ballad

4 3 Unplug8Bt 1 3 Analogyst 3 Folk Ballad

5 4 Love 8 Beat 4 8Bt Analog2 4 PopBallad 2

6 5 Half Beat 5 Trendy Beat 5 HalfTimeBld

7 6 UK 8 Beat 6 Slow Ballad 6 Country Bld

8 7 8BeatGroove 7 6Strings Bt 7 4/4 Ballad

9 8 UK RnB 8 Std16Beat 1 8 Love Ballad

10 9 PopBallad 1 9 Std16Beat 2 9 NaturalBeat

11 10 HipHop Beat 10 Unpl.16Beat 10 Celtic Bld

12 11 LightRock 1 11 Pop 16Beat1 11 16BtAnalog1

13 12 LightRock 2 12 Pop 16Beat2 12 Color Beat

14 13 Miami Beat 13 Cinema Bld 13 PopBallad 3

15 14 ClassicBeat 14 Windy Beat 14 8Bt Analog3

16 15 Unplug8Bt 2 15 Home Beat 15 16BtAnalog2

# CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Ballroom CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Dance CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Rock

1 0 3 0 Slow Pop 0 4 0 HouseGarage 0 5 0 Open Rock 1

2 1 Slow Rock 1 1 House 1 Open Rock 2

3 2 Slow Rock 2 2 Dream 2 Pop Rock

4 3 Unpl.SlRock 3 Techno 3 Fire Rock

5 4 BigBnd Fox1 4 Underground 4 Hard Rock

6 5 Slow Waltz1 5 Progressive 5 Heavy Rock

7 6 Slow Waltz2 6 Jungle 6 RockShufﬂe

8 7 Foxtrot 1 7 Rap 7 Rock Ballad

9 8 BigBnd Fox2 8 Hip Hop 8 Half Time

10 9 Slow Fox 9 Disco 70 9 Rock 6/8

11 10 Foxtrot 2 10 80's Dance 10 Abbey Road

12 11 Operetta 11 Love Disco 11 Surf Rock

13 12 BigBnd Fox3 12 Disco Party 12 Pop Shufﬂe

14 13 Charleston 13 Disco Funky 13 BluesShufﬂ

15 14 Quick Step 14 Disco Gully 14 60's Rock

16 15 New Jive 15 Twist 15 Rock & Roll

# CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Soul & Funk CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: World 1CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: World 2

1 0 6 0 Rubber Funk 0 7 0 OberkrWaltz 0 8 0 Bluegrass

2 1 Groove Funk 1 OberkrPolka 1 Country 8Bt

3 2 Acid Jazz 2 Bavar.Pop1 2 Country16Bt

4 3 Double Beat 3 Bavar.Pop 2 3 CountryBeat

5 4 Groove 4 Party Polka 4 Mod.Country

6 5 Jazz Funk 5 Pop Polka 5 CntryBoogie

7 6 Al Swing 6 Flipper 6/8 6 CountryShf1

8 7 HipHop Funk 7 Flipper 4/4 7 CountryShf2

9 8 HipHop Soul 8 Schlager 1 8 Country Bld

10 9 MotownShuﬂ 9 Schlager 2 9 Country 3/4

11 10 PopBallad 4 10 Schlager 3 10 Orleans

12 11 RhythmBlues 11 Schlager 4 11 Jig

13 12 Soul 12 PopSchlager 12 CelticDream

14 13 Memphis 13 Trucker 13 Norteno

15 14 Motown 14 Cajun 14 Quebradita

16 15 Gospel 15 Zydeco 15 Tejano

145

Factory Data

Styles

# CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: World 3 CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Latin 1CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Latin 2

1 0 9 0 Hora 0 10 0 UnplugBossa 0 11 0 EnglishTango

2 1 Sevillana 1 1 Basic Bossa 1 Orch. Tango

3 2 Sevillana 2 2 L.A. Bossa 2 Tango.it

4 3 Jota 3 New Bossa 3 Habanera 1

5 4 Copla 4 Miss Bossa 4 Habanera 2

6 5 Classic 3/4 5 Lite Bossa 5 Mambo 1

7 6 Bolero 6 GrooveBossa 6 Mambo 2

8 7 Minuetto 7 DiscoChaCha 7 Salsa 1

9 8 Baroque 8 Cha Cha Cha 8 Salsa 2

10 9 New Age 9 Sabor 9 Mariachi

11 10 Tarantella 10 ChaCha Funk 10 Reggae 1

12 11 Raspa 11 Latin Rock 11 Reggae 2

13 12 Vahde 12 UnplugLatin 12 Reggae 3

14 13 Oriental 13 Beguine 1 13 Pasodoble 1

15 14 Roman 14 Beguine 2 14 PasDobBanda

16 15 Ciftetelli 15 Slow Bolero 15 Pasodoble 2

# CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Latin Dance CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Jazz 1CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Jazz 2

1 0 12 0 Samba 0 13 0 Jazz Brush 0 14 0 Big Band 3

2 1 Sambalegre 1 Med. Swing 1 Sw. Shufﬂe

3 2 Disco Samba 2 Slow Swing 2 FastBigBand

4 3 Samba Funk 3 SwingBallad 3 Latin Big Band

5 4 Merengue 1 4 JazzWaltz 1 4 BigBnd Fox4

6 5 Merengue 2 5 JazzWaltz 2 5 Dixieland

7 6 Cumbia 6 5/4 Swing 6 Hollywood

8 7 Latin Dance 7 Mood Swing 7 Broadway

9 8 Batucada 8 Be Bop 8 Acid Jazz

10 9 Rumba 9 Unpl.Swing1 9 New Jazz

11 10 Gipsy 10 Unpl.Swing2 10 Latin Jazz

12 11 Rumba Pop 11 B.BndBallad 11 Fusion

13 12 Calypso 12 BigBandMed. 12 Ragtime Pno

14 13 Lambada 13 Big Band 1 13 Shufﬂe Pno

15 14 Meneito 14 BigBand40's 14 Boogie Pno

16 15 Macarena 15 Big Band 2 15 Bossa Pno

# CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Traditional CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: User 1-3

1 0 15 0 Ital. Valzer 0 17-19 0-15

2 1 Valzer

3 2 GermWaltz 1

4 3 GermWaltz 2

5 4 Laendler

6 5 WalzMusette

7 6 ViennaWaltz

8 7 Viennese

9 8 Mazurka 1

10 9 Mazurka 2

11 10 Polka 1

12 11 Polka 2

13 12 Germ. Polka

14 13 Trad. Polka

15 14 Marsch

16 15 FrenchMarsc

146 Factory Data

Style Elements

STYLE ELEMENTS

Note: You can remotely select the various Style Elements on the Pa50SD, by sending it Program Change messages on the Control chan-

nel (see page 127).

SINGLE TOUCH SETTINGS (STS)

Note: You can remotely select Single Touch Settings (STS) on the Pa50SD, by sending it Bank Select MSB (CC#0), Bank Select LSB

(CC#32) and Program Change messages on the Control channel (see page 127). If a Style is already selected, just send the Program

Change message.

# CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Direct SD

Page 1-2 CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Direct SD

Page 3-4 CC#0 CC#32 PC Bank: Direct SD

Page 5-6

1 0 29 0-15 *.SET 0 30 0-15 *.SET 0 31 0-15 *.SET

PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element

80 Var.1 81 Var.2 82 Var.3 83 Var.4 84 Intro 1

85 Intro 2 86 Fill 1 87 Fill 2 88 Ending 1 89 Ending 2

90 Break/Count IN 91 Fade IN/OUT 92 Memory 93 Bass Inversion 94 Manual Bass

95 Tempo Lock 96 Single Touch 97 Style Change

CC#0 CC#32 PC STSPC STSPC STSPC STS

The same as the Style to which the STS pertains 64 STS 1 65 STS 2 66 STS 3 66 STS 4

147

Factory Data

Programs (bank order)

PROGRAMS (BANK ORDER)

The following table enlists all Pa50SD Factory Programs in

the same order as they appear by pressing the PROGRAM/

PERFORMANCE bank buttons.

Legend: The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely

select the Programs. CC00: Control Change 0, or Bank Select

MSB. CC32: Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC: Pro-

gram Change.

Name CC00 CC32 PC

Bank: Piano

Grand Piano 121 3 0

Class.Piano 121 4 0

L/R Piano 121 5 0

AcPianoWide 121 1 0

Ac. Piano 121 0 0

BrightPian 121 0 1

ElGranPian 121 0 2

ElGrandWide 121 1 2

AcPianoDark 121 2 0

BrPianoWide 121 1 1

90's Piano 121 3 2

M1 Piano 121 2 2

2000'sPiano 121 4 2

ChorusPiano 121 5 2

Honky-Tonk 121 0 3

Honky-Wide 121 1 3

Piano Pad 121 2 1

Piano Pad 2 121 3 1

PnoStrngPad 121 4 1

Pno&Strings 121 7 0

PianoLayers 121 6 2

Piano&Vibes 121 6 0

Harpsichord 121 0 6

Harpsi Oct. 121 1 6

Harpsi Wide 121 2 6

HarpsiK.Off 121 3 6

Harpsi Korg 121 4 6

Clav 121 0 7

Pulse Clav 121 1 7

Clav Wah 121 2 7

Clav Snap 121 3 7

Sticky Clav 121 4 7

Bank: E. Piano

ClubElPiano 121 11 4

DynoTine EP 121 10 4

Vintage EP 121 4 4

Pro-Dyno EP 121 5 4

ProStage EP 121 6 4

Studio EP 121 7 4

StereoDigEP 121 6 5

ClassDigiEP 121 7 5

EP Phase 121 4 5

Hybrid EP 121 8 5

Class.Tines 121 9 5

PhantomTine 121 10 5

Sweeping EP 121 12 5

WhitePad EP 121 13 5

ThinElPiano 121 9 4

DW8000 EP 121 11 5

E.Piano 1 121 0 4

E.Piano 2 121 0 5

DetunedEP 1 121 1 4

EP1Veloc.sw 121 2 4

60'sElPiano 121 3 4

DetunedEP 2 121 1 5

EP2Veloc.sw 121 2 5

EP Legend 121 3 5

R&B E.Piano 121 8 4

SynPiano X 121 5 5

Bank: Mallet & Bell

Vibraphone 121 0 11

Vibraphone2 121 2 11

Vibrap.Wide 121 1 11

Marimba 121 0 12

MarimbaWide 121 1 12

RimbaKeyOff 121 2 12

MonkeySkuls 121 3 12

Xylophone 121 0 13

Balaphon 121 6 12

Celesta 121 0 8

Glocken 121 0 9

Music Box 121 0 10

Sistro 121 1 9

Orgel 121 1 10

Digi Bell 121 4 98

Vs Bell Boy 121 2 98

Steel Drum 121 0 114

Warm Steel 121 1 114

TubularBell 121 0 14

Church Bell 121 1 14

Carillon 121 2 14

KrystalBell 121 3 98

ChurchBell2 121 3 14

Tinkle Bell 121 0 112

Dulcimer 121 0 15

Santur 121 1 15

Kalimba 121 0 108

VeloKalimba 121 1 108

MalletClock 121 5 12

Gamelan 121 1 112

BaliGamelan 121 2 112

GarbageMall 121 3 112

Bank: Accordion

Sweet Harm. 121 1 22

Harmonica 121 0 22

Harmonica 2 121 2 22

Cassotto 121 9 21

Fisa Master 121 8 21

Fisa 16+8 121 6 21

Fisa 16+4 121 7 21

MusetteClar 121 5 21

Musette 1 121 3 21

Musette 2 121 4 21

Accordion 121 0 21

TangoAccord 121 0 23

Fisa Tango! 121 1 23

Akordeon 121 2 21

Name CC00 CC32 PC

148 Factory Data

Programs (bank order)

Accordion 2 121 1 21

Arab.Accord 121 10 21

Bank: Organ 1

Jimmy Organ 121 10 18

BX3 Velo Sw 121 1 18

ClassiClick 121 4 18

M1 Organ 121 5 17

Jazz Organ 121 8 16

Dist. Organ 121 5 18

RotaryOrgan 121 8 17

DarkJazzOrg 121 4 16

Bx3ShortDec 121 7 17

SuperBXPerc 121 6 18

Percuss.BX3 121 4 17

Killer B 121 2 18

Drawb.Organ 121 0 16

DetDrawbOrg 121 1 16

It60'sOrgan 121 2 16

DrawbOrgan2 121 3 16

Old Wheels 121 3 17

Perc. Organ 121 0 17

Det.PercOrg 121 1 17

Perc.Organ2 121 2 17

Rock Organ 121 0 18

Good Old B 121 10 16

Dirty B 121 3 18

IperDarkOrg 121 5 16

FullDrawbar 121 6 16

DWGS Organ 121 7 16

GospelOrgan 121 9 16

PercShorDec 121 8 18

Perc.Wheels 121 9 18

DirtyJazOrg 121 7 18

VOX Legend 121 11 16

TeknoOrgBas 121 6 17

ArabianOrg. 121 12 16

Bank: Organ 2

PipeMixture 121 3 19

FlautoPipes 121 3 20

Pipe Tutti 121 6 19

PositiveOrg 121 7 19

ChurchOrg.1 121 0 19

ChurchOcMix 121 1 19

DetunChurch 121 2 19

ChurchPipes 121 4 19

Full Pipes 121 5 19

Reed Organ 121 0 20

Puff Organ 121 1 20

Small Pipe 121 2 20

Bank: Guitar

NylonGuitar 121 0 24

Spanish Gtr 121 6 24

SteelGuitar 121 0 25

12StringGtr 121 1 25

Club J.Gtr1 121 2 26

CleanGuitar 121 0 27

MutedGuitar 121 0 28

DistortionG 121 0 30

Nylon Bossa 121 4 24

Name CC00 CC32 PC

NylonKeyOff 121 2 24

Steel Gtr 2 121 4 25

AcGtrKeyOff 121 5 24

Club J.Gtr2 121 3 26

Vintage S. 121 4 27

CleanMutGtr 121 6 28

Stereo Dist 121 8 30

Nylon Gtr 2 121 3 24

Gtr Strings 121 7 24

FingerK.Off 121 7 25

St12Strings 121 5 25

Jazz Guitar 121 0 26

SingleCoil 121 6 27

Clean Funk 121 8 28

JoystGtr Y- 121 3 30

Reso.Guitar 121 12 25

St.Folk Gtr 121 9 25

Steel&Body 121 3 25

Hackbrett 121 6 25

Jazz Man 121 3 28

DetCleanGtr 121 1 27

R&R Guitar 121 4 28

OverdriveG 121 0 29

Ukulele 121 1 24

Mandolin 121 2 25

Mandol.KOff 121 10 25

MandoTrem 121 11 25

Banjo 121 0 105

BanjoKeyOff 121 1 105

Bouzouki 121 5 104

Tambra 121 6 104

Finger Tips 121 8 25

MidToneGtr 121 2 27

Chorus Gtr 121 3 27

ProcesElGtr 121 5 27

NewStra.Gtr 121 7 27

DistRhytmGt 121 2 30

WetDistGtr 121 6 30

SoloDistGtr 121 7 30

L&R El.Gtr 121 9 27

L&R El.Gtr2 121 10 27

RhythmElGtr 121 7 28

Guitarish 121 8 27

Country Nu 121 11 27

Stra. Chime 121 5 28

MuteMonster 121 5 30

Disto Mute 121 9 28

FunkyCutGtr 121 1 28

MuteVeloGtr 121 2 28

FeedbackGtr 121 1 30

Guitar Pinc 121 1 29

Ped.Steel 2 121 4 26

PedSteelGtr 121 1 26

GtrFeedback 121 1 31

PowerChords 121 4 30

FunkyWhaSw 121 12 27

VoxWahChick 121 3 120

EGHarmonics 121 2 31

GtrHarmonic 121 0 31

Sitar 121 0 104

Name CC00 CC32 PC

149

Factory Data

Programs (bank order)

Sitar 2 121 1 104

SitarTambou 121 2 104

IndianStars 121 3 104

Oud 121 2 105

Kanun 121 2 107

Kanun Trem. 121 3 107

Kanun Mix 121 4 107

Shamisen 121 0 106

Koto 121 0 107

Taisho Koto 121 1 107

IndianFrets 121 4 104

Bank: Strings & Vocals

Solo Violin 121 2 40

StringQuart 121 9 48

Ens. & Solo 121 11 48

St. Strings 121 3 48

Analog Str 121 2 50

i3 Strings 121 5 48

Oh-AhVoices 121 9 52

Take Voices 121 4 52

Slow Violin 121 3 40

Camera Str. 121 12 48

ArcoStrings 121 7 48

LegatoStrng 121 4 48

MasterPad 121 2 89

N Strings 121 6 48

OhSlowVoice 121 3 52

TakeVoices2 121 5 52

SlowAttViol 121 1 40

PizzEnsembl 121 1 45

Fiddle 121 0 110

PizzSection 121 2 45

SweeperStr. 121 1 49

AnalogVelve 121 3 50

Aaah Choir 121 7 52

Oooh Voices 121 2 52

Violin 121 0 40

Viola 121 0 41

Cello 121 0 42

Contrabass 121 0 43

Tremolo Str 121 0 44

PizzicatoSt 121 0 45

Choir Aahs 121 0 52

Voice Oohs 121 0 53

StringsEns1 121 0 48

StringsEns2 121 0 49

Orches.Harp 121 0 46

60s Strings 121 2 48

Oct.Strings 121 8 48

SynStrings3 121 1 50

Oooh Choir 121 6 52

Choir Aahs2 121 1 52

String&Bras 121 1 48

Dbl Strings 121 3 45

ArabStrings 121 13 48

SynStrings1 121 0 50

SynStrings2 121 0 51

Odissey 121 4 50

Grand Choir 121 11 52

Name CC00 CC32 PC

Slow Choir 121 10 52

Symph. Bows 121 10 48

Cyber Choir 121 2 85

Choir Light 121 12 52

Vocalesque 121 2 54

Synth Voice 121 0 54

Voice Lead 121 0 85

Choir Pad 121 0 91

Halo Pad 121 0 94

FullVox Pad 121 9 91

FreshBreath 121 7 91

EtherVoices 121 1 85

DreamVoice 121 5 54

Humming 121 1 53

AnalogVoice 121 1 54

Mmmh Choir 121 8 52

StringChoir 121 13 52

ClassicVox 121 4 54

Doolally 121 2 53

Fresh Air 121 2 91

Vocalscape 121 3 54

Heaven 121 3 91

Airways 121 3 53

Yang Chin 121 1 46

Bank: Trumpet & Trombone

MonoTrumpet 121 3 56

Flugel Horn 121 7 56

TrumptPitch 121 5 56

TrumpetExpr 121 4 56

HardTrombon 121 3 57

SoftTrombon 121 4 57

Wha Trumpet 121 2 59

Muted Trp 121 0 59

Dual Trump 121 6 56

Warm Flugel 121 8 56

Trumpet 121 0 56

Trumpet 2 121 2 56

Trombone 121 0 57

Trombone 2 121 1 57

PitchTromb 121 5 57

BeBopCornet 121 9 56

DarkTrumpet 121 1 56

Tuba 121 0 58

Tuba Gold 121 2 58

Ob.Tuba 121 1 58

Dynabone 121 3 58

BrightTromb 121 2 57

Muted Trp 2 121 1 59

Bank: Brass

BigBandBrs 121 4 61

Tight Brass 121 2 61

Trp & Brass 121 7 61

Glen&Friend 121 3 61

MutEnsemble 121 3 59

Horns & Ens 121 4 60

Syn Brass 121 0 62

Orches. Hit 121 0 55

BrassSect. 121 0 61

Fat Brass 121 13 61

Name CC00 CC32 PC

150 Factory Data

Programs (bank order)

Trumpet Ens 121 9 61

Glen & Boys 121 6 61

MutEnsembl2 121 4 59

French Horn 121 0 60

Syn Brass 121 0 63

Brass Hit 121 25 61

AttackBrass 121 8 61

BrassSect.2 121 1 61

TromboneEns 121 10 61

Sax & Brass 121 5 61

Flute Muted 121 6 73

FrenchHorn2 121 1 60

Syn Brass 3 121 1 62

Euro Hit 121 3 55

TightBrass2 121 12 61

Dyna Brass 121 14 61

Trombones 121 11 61

Brass Band 121 16 61

Brass Pad 121 3 63

French Sect 121 2 60

Syn Brass 4 121 1 63

6th Hit 121 2 55

Power Brass 121 21 61

Brass Expr. 121 15 61

Dyna Brass2 121 22 61

Film Brass 121 17 61

Brass Slow 121 18 61

ClassicHorn 121 3 60

ElectrikBrs 121 4 62

BrassImpact 121 4 55

Fanfare 121 19 61

Movie Brass 121 20 61

Sfz Brass 121 23 61

Jump Brass 121 3 62

AnalogBras1 121 2 62

AnalogBras2 121 2 63

Syn Brass 5 121 5 62

Brass Fall 121 26 61

BassHitPlus 121 1 55

Dbl Brass 121 24 61

Bank: Sax

Tenor Noise 121 1 66

Alto Breath 121 1 65

Sweet Sprno 121 1 64

Barit Growl 121 1 67

BreathyBari 121 2 67

Soft Tenor 121 2 66

SaxEnsemble 121 2 65

Folk Sax 121 5 66

Tenor Sax 121 0 66

Alto Sax 121 0 65

Soprano Sax 121 0 64

BaritoneSax 121 0 67

TenorBreath 121 3 66

Tenor Growl 121 4 66

BreathyAlto 121 3 65

AltSaxGrowl 121 4 65

Name CC00 CC32 PC

Bank: Woodwind

Jazz Flute 121 1 73

Old Shaku 121 1 77

FluteSwitch 121 2 73

FluteDyn5th 121 3 73

Flute Frull 121 4 73

Pan Flute 121 0 75

Jazz Clarin 121 1 71

Flute 2 121 9 73

Double Reed 121 1 68

EnglisHorn2 121 1 69

Recorder 2 121 1 74

Nay 121 2 72

Orch. Flute 121 5 73

WoodenFlute 121 7 73

War Pipes 121 1 109

ClarinetEns 121 5 71

Woodwinds 121 6 71

Small Orch 121 1 72

Kawala 121 1 75

Shaku 2 121 2 77

Whistle 2 121 1 78

Sect Winds 121 3 71

Sect Winds2 121 4 71

Clarinet G 121 2 71

Folk Clarin 121 7 71

Oboe 121 0 68

EnglishHorn 121 0 69

Bassoon 121 0 70

Clarinet 121 0 71

Piccolo 121 0 72

Flute 121 0 73

Recorder 121 0 74

Bambu Flute 121 8 73

BlownBottle 121 0 76

Shakuhachi 121 0 77

Whistle 121 0 78

Ocarina 121 0 79

Bag Pipe 121 0 109

Zurna 121 1 111

Hichiriki 121 2 111

Shanai 121 0 111

Flute Click 121 1 121

Bank: Synth 1

The Pad 121 4 89

Future Pad 121 5 91

Air Clouds 121 1 97

Dark Pad 121 6 89

Tinklin Pad 121 3 97

Pods In Pad 121 4 97

Analog Pad 121 8 89

Analog Pad2 121 9 89

Money Pad 121 5 89

TsunamiWave 121 6 91

RavelianPad 121 8 91

AstralDream 121 1 95

Meditate 121 2 95

Reso Down 121 2 97

Sky Watcher 121 2 90

Name CC00 CC32 PC

151

Factory Data

Programs (bank order)

Super Sweep 121 4 90

Wave Sweep 121 5 90

Cross Sweep 121 6 90

Digi IcePad 121 2 101

Crimson5ths 121 1 86

Freedom Pad 121 7 89

Noble Pad 121 5 97

Mellow Pad 121 4 95

Lonely Spin 121 1 100

Cinema Pad 121 5 95

VirtualTrav 121 1 88

Syn Ghostly 121 2 100

MotionOcean 121 1 96

Moon Cycles 121 5 102

Farluce 121 11 90

Bell Pad 121 6 98

Bell Choir 121 7 98

Warm Pad 121 0 89

Sweep Pad 121 0 95

Soundtrack 121 0 97

Sine Pad 121 1 89

Itopia Pad 121 1 91

Big Panner 121 4 63

Dance ReMix 121 10 91

Rave 121 6 97

ElastickPad 121 7 97

Moving Bell 121 5 98

Bank: Synth 2

Old Portam 121 3 80

Power Saw 121 5 81

Octo Lead 121 6 81

ElectroLead 121 2 87

Rich Lead 121 3 87

ThinAnaLead 121 4 87

Dance Lead 121 4 80

Wave Lead 121 5 80

Sine Wave 121 6 80

Synchro Cit 121 2 84

Wild Arp 121 6 55

EspressLead 121 5 87

HipHop Lead 121 6 87

Analog Lead 121 7 80

Seq Lead 121 7 81

Old&Analog 121 8 80

PhatSawLead 121 8 81

Glide Lead 121 9 81

Gliding Sq. 121 9 80

Flip Blip 121 7 55

Power Synth 121 3 89

Sine Switch 121 10 80

Reso Sweep 121 1 90

Syn Sweeper 121 3 90

Cosmic 121 1 93

MotionRaver 121 1 101

Sync Kron 121 3 84

Fire Wave 121 10 81

Dig PolySix 121 7 90

Pop Syn Pad 121 4 91

Noisy Stabb 121 8 90

Name CC00 CC32 PC

Mega Synth 121 9 90

TecnoPhonic 121 10 90

DarkElement 121 3 95

Band Passed 121 3 102

Cat Lead 121 9 87

Pan Reso 121 4 102

Square Rez 121 11 80

Rezbo 121 11 81

Auto Pilot 121 14 38

MetallicRez 121 4 84

Square Bass 121 7 87

Syn Pianoid 121 12 81

Brian Sync 121 5 84

Arp Twins 121 6 84

Arp Angeles 121 2 88

Big & Raw 121 8 87

Caribbean 121 2 96

Lead Square 121 0 80

Lead Saw 121 0 81

Calliope 121 0 82

Chiff 121 0 83

Charang 121 0 84

Fifths Lead 121 0 86

Bass & Lead 121 0 87

New Age Pad 121 0 88

Polysynth 121 0 90

BowedGlass 121 0 92

MetallicPad 121 0 93

Crystal 121 0 98

Atmosphere 121 0 99

Brightness 121 0 100

LeadSquare2 121 1 80

Lead Sine 121 2 80

Lead Saw 2 121 1 81

LeadSawPuls 121 2 81

LeadDblSaw 121 3 81

Seq. Analog 121 4 81

Wire Lead 121 1 84

Soft Wrl 121 1 87

Bank: Bass

Acous. Bass 121 0 32

Finger Bass 121 0 33

Picked Bass 121 0 34

Fretl. Bass 121 0 35

Slap Bass 121 0 36

Slap Bass 121 0 37

SynthBass 121 0 38

SynthBass 121 0 39

AcBass Buzz 121 1 32

Fing ElBass 121 2 33

Pick ElBass 121 1 34

Fret. Bass2 121 1 35

SuperSwBass 121 1 36

SuperSwBas2 121 2 36

SynBassWarm 121 1 38

SynBassReso 121 2 38

Bass & Ride 121 2 32

FingElBass2 121 3 33

PickElBass2 121 2 34

Name CC00 CC32 PC

152 Factory Data

Programs (bank order)

Fretless Sw 121 2 35

Thumb Bass 121 1 37

Finger Slap 121 1 33

Attack Bass 121 1 39

Rubber Bass 121 2 39

FingElBass3 121 4 33

DarkR&BBass 121 4 35

Sweet Fret 121 3 35

Dyna Bass 121 2 37

Stick Bass 121 5 33

Gtr Bass 121 4 34

Bass Mute 121 5 34

Dr. Octave 121 16 38

Nasty Bass 121 6 39

30303 Bass 121 5 38

Stein Bass 121 3 34

Euro Bass 121 4 39

Jungle Rez 121 5 39

30303Square 121 6 38

Bass Square 121 7 38

Phat Bass 121 7 39

SynBass Res 121 8 38

Clav Bass 121 3 38

Hammer 121 4 38

AttackPulse 121 3 39

Digi Bass 1 121 9 38

BlindAsABat 121 12 38

PoinkerBass 121 8 39

Digi Bass 3 121 11 38

Jungle Bass 121 13 38

Hybrid Bass 121 15 38

Digi Bass 2 121 10 38

Bank: Drum & Perc

Std. Kit1 120 0 0

Std. Kit2 120 0 1

Std. Kit3 120 0 2

Std. Kit4 120 0 4

AcousticKit 120 0 3

Room Kit1 120 0 8

Room Kit2 120 0 12

Jungle Kit 120 0 10

HipHop Kit1 120 0 9

HipHop Kit2 120 0 13

Techno Kit1 120 0 11

Techno Kit2 120 0 14

Techno Kit3 120 0 15

Power Kit1 120 0 16

Power Kit2 120 0 17

Electro Kit 120 0 24

Analog Kit 120 0 25

House Kit1 120 0 26

House Kit2 120 0 27

House Kit3 120 0 28

House Kit4 120 0 29

Jazz Kit 120 0 32

Brush Kit1 120 0 40

Brush V.S.2 120 0 41

OrchestraK. 120 0 48

Bdrum&Sdrum 120 0 50

Name CC00 CC32 PC

SFX Kit 120 0 56

Percus.Kit1 120 0 64

Latin P.Kit 120 0 65

TRI-Per.KIT 120 0 66

ArabianKit1 120 0 116

ArabianKit2 120 0 117

Timpani 121 0 47

Agogo 121 0 113

Log Drum 121 4 12

Woodblock 121 0 115

Taiko Drum 121 0 116

Melodic Tom 121 0 117

Synth Drum 121 0 118

Reverse Cym 121 0 119

Dragon Gong 121 1 119

Castanets 121 1 115

Concert BD 121 1 116

MelodicTom2 121 1 117

Rhyt.BoxTom 121 1 118

Electr.Drum 121 2 118

Rev Tom 121 2 117

Rev Snare 121 3 118

i30Perc.Kit 120 0 67

Bank: SFX

Goblins 121 0 101

Echo Drops 121 0 102

Star Theme 121 0 103

GtFretNoise 121 0 120

BreathNoise 121 0 121

Seashore 121 0 122

Bird Tweet 121 0 123

AcBassStrng 121 2 120

Telephone 121 0 124

Helicopter 121 0 125

Applause 121 0 126

Gun Shot 121 0 127

SynthMallet 121 1 98

Echo Bell 121 1 102

Echo Pan 121 2 102

GtrCutNoise 121 1 120

Rain 121 1 122

Thunder 121 2 122

Wind 121 3 122

Stream 121 4 122

Bubble 121 5 122

Dog 121 1 123

HorseGallop 121 2 123

Bird Tweet2 121 3 123

Telephone 2 121 1 124

Door Creak 121 2 124

Door 121 3 124

Scratch 121 4 124

Wind Chime 121 5 124

Car Engine 121 1 125

Car Stop 121 2 125

Car Pass 121 3 125

Car Crash 121 4 125

Siren 121 5 125

Train 121 6 125

Name CC00 CC32 PC

153

Factory Data

Programs (bank order)

Jetplane 121 7 125

Starship 121 8 125

Burst Noise 121 9 125

Laughing 121 1 126

Screaming 121 2 126

Punch 121 3 126

Heart Beat 121 4 126

Footsteps 121 5 126

Machine Gun 121 1 127

Lasergun 121 2 127

Explosion 121 3 127

Ice Rain 121 0 96

Jaw Harp 121 3 105

HitInIndia 121 5 55

Stadium 121 6 126

Name CC00 CC32 PC

154 Factory Data

Programs (Program Change order)

PROGRAMS (PROGRAM CHANGE ORDER)

The following table enlists all Pa50SD Factory Programs in

order of Bank Select-Program Change number.

Legend: The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely

select the Programs. CC00: Control Change 0, or Bank Select

MSB. CC32: Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC: Pro-

gram Change.

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

121 0 0 Ac. Piano Piano √

121 1 0 AcPianoWide Piano √

121 2 0 AcPianoDark Piano √

121 3 0 Grand Piano Piano

121 4 0 Class.Piano Piano

121 5 0 L/R Piano Piano

121 6 0 Piano&Vibes Piano

121 7 0 Pno&Strings Piano

121 0 1 BrightPiano Piano √

121 1 1 BrPianoWide Piano √

121 2 1 Piano Pad Piano

121 3 1 Piano Pad 2 Piano

121 4 1 PnoStrngPad Piano

121 0 2 ElGranPiano Piano √

121 1 2 ElGrandWide Piano √

121 2 2 M1 Piano Piano

121 3 2 90's Piano Piano

121 4 2 2000'sPiano Piano

121 5 2 ChorusPiano Piano

121 6 2 PianoLayers Piano

121 0 3 Honky-Tonk Piano √

121 1 3 Honky-Wide Piano √

121 0 4 E.Piano 1 E.Piano √

121 1 4 DetunedEP 1 E.Piano √

121 2 4 EP1Veloc.sw E.Piano √

121 3 4 60'sElPiano E.Piano √

121 4 4 Vintage EP E.Piano

121 5 4 Pro-Dyno EP E.Piano

121 6 4 ProStage EP E.Piano

121 7 4 Studio EP E.Piano

121 8 4 R&B E.Piano E.Piano

121 9 4 ThinElPiano E.Piano

121 10 4 DynoTine EP E.Piano

121 11 4 ClubElPiano E.Piano

121 0 5 E.Piano 2 E.Piano √

121 1 5 DetunedEP 2 E.Piano √

121 2 5 EP2Veloc.sw E.Piano √

121 3 5 EP Legend E.Piano √

121 4 5 EP Phase E.Piano √

121 5 5 SynPiano X E.Piano

121 6 5 StereoDigEP E.Piano

121 7 5 ClassDigiEP E.Piano

121 8 5 Hybrid EP E.Piano

121 9 5 Class.Tines E.Piano

121 10 5 PhantomTine E.Piano

121 11 5 DW8000 EP E.Piano

121 12 5 Sweeping EP E.Piano

121 13 5 WhitePad EP E.Piano

121 0 6 Harpsichord Piano √

121 1 6 Harpsi Oct. Piano √

121 2 6 Harpsi Wide Piano √

121 3 6 HarpsiK.Off Piano √

121 4 6 Harpsi Korg Piano

121 0 7 Clav Piano √

121 1 7 Pulse Clav Piano √

121 2 7 Clav Wah Piano

121 3 7 Clav Snap Piano

121 4 7 Sticky Clav Piano

121 0 8 Celesta Mallet & Bell √

121 0 9 Glocken Mallet & Bell √

121 1 9 Sistro Mallet & Bell

121 0 10 Music Box Mallet & Bell √

121 1 10 Orgel Mallet & Bell

121 0 11 Vibraphone Mallet & Bell √

121 1 11 Vibrap.Wide Mallet & Bell √

121 2 11 Vibraphone2 Mallet & Bell

121 0 12 Marimba Mallet & Bell √

121 1 12 MarimbaWide Mallet & Bell √

121 2 12 RimbaKeyOff Mallet & Bell

121 3 12 MonkeySkuls Mallet & Bell

121 4 12 Log Drum Drum & Perc

121 5 12 MalletClock Mallet & Bell

121 6 12 Balaphon Mallet & Bell

121 0 13 Xylophone Mallet & Bell √

121 0 14 TubularBell Mallet & Bell √

121 1 14 Church Bell Mallet & Bell √

121 2 14 Carillon Mallet & Bell √

121 3 14 ChurchBell2 Mallet & Bell

121 0 15 Dulcimer Mallet & Bell √

121 1 15 Santur Mallet & Bell

121 0 16 Drawb.Organ Organ 1 √

121 1 16 DetDrawbOrg Organ 1 √

121 2 16 It60'sOrgan Organ 1 √

121 3 16 DrawbOrgan2 Organ 1 √

121 4 16 DarkJazzOrg Organ 1

121 5 16 IperDarkOrg Organ 1

121 6 16 FullDrawbar Organ 1

121 7 16 DWGS Organ Organ 1

121 8 16 Jazz Organ Organ 1

121 9 16 GospelOrgan Organ 1

121 10 16 Good Old B Organ 1

121 11 16 VOX Legend Organ 1

121 12 16 ArabianOrg. Organ 1

121 0 17 Perc. Organ Organ 1 √

121 1 17 Det.PercOrg Organ 1 √

121 2 17 Perc.Organ2 Organ 1 √

121 3 17 Old Wheels Organ 1

121 4 17 Percuss.BX3 Organ 1

121 5 17 M1 Organ Organ 1

121 6 17 TeknoOrgBas Organ 1

121 7 17 Bx3ShortDec Organ 1

121 8 17 RotaryOrgan Organ 1

121 0 18 Rock Organ Organ 1 √

121 1 18 BX3 Velo Sw Organ 1

121 2 18 Killer B Organ 1

121 3 18 Dirty B Organ 1

121 4 18 ClassiClick Organ 1

121 5 18 Dist. Organ Organ 1

121 6 18 SuperBXPerc Organ 1

121 7 18 DirtyJazOrg Organ 1

121 8 18 PercShorDec Organ 1

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

155

Factory Data

Programs (Program Change order)

121 9 18 Perc.Wheels Organ 1

121 10 18 Jimmy Organ Organ 1

121 0 19 ChurchOrg.1 Organ 2 √

121 1 19 ChurchOcMix Organ 2 √

121 2 19 DetunChurch Organ 2 √

121 3 19 PipeMixture Organ 2

121 4 19 ChurchPipes Organ 2

121 5 19 Full Pipes Organ 2

121 6 19 Pipe Tutti Organ 2

121 7 19 PositiveOrg Organ 2

121 0 20 Reed Organ Organ 2 √

121 1 20 Puff Organ Organ 2 √

121 2 20 Small Pipe Organ 2

121 3 20 FlautoPipes Organ 2

121 0 21 Accordion Accordion √

121 1 21 Accordion 2 Accordion √

121 2 21 Akordeon Accordion

121 3 21 Musette 1 Accordion

121 4 21 Musette 2 Accordion

121 5 21 MusetteClar Accordion

121 6 21 Fisa 16+8 Accordion

121 7 21 Fisa 16+4 Accordion

121 8 21 Fisa Master Accordion

121 9 21 Cassotto Accordion

121 10 21 Arab.Accord Accordion

121 0 22 Harmonica Accordion √

121 1 22 Sweet Harm. Accordion

121 2 22 Harmonica 2 Accordion

121 0 23 TangoAccord Accordion √

121 1 23 Fisa Tango! Accordion

121 0 24 NylonGuitar Guitar √

121 1 24 Ukulele Guitar √

121 2 24 NylonKeyOff Guitar √

121 3 24 Nylon Gtr 2 Guitar √

121 4 24 Nylon Bossa Guitar

121 5 24 AcGtrKeyOff Guitar

121 6 24 Spanish Gtr Guitar

121 7 24 Gtr Strings Guitar

121 0 25 SteelGuitar Guitar √

121 1 25 12StringGtr Guitar √

121 2 25 Mandolin Guitar √

121 3 25 Steel&Body Guitar √

121 4 25 Steel Gtr 2 Guitar

121 5 25 St12Strings Guitar

121 6 25 Hackbrett Guitar

121 7 25 FingerK.Off Guitar

121 8 25 Finger Tips Guitar

121 9 25 St.Folk Gtr Guitar

121 10 25 Mandol.KOff Guitar

121 11 25 MandoTrem Guitar

121 12 25 Reso.Guitar Guitar

121 0 26 Jazz Guitar Guitar √

121 1 26 PedSteelGtr Guitar √

121 2 26 Club J.Gtr1 Guitar

121 3 26 Club J.Gtr2 Guitar

121 4 26 Ped.Steel 2 Guitar

121 0 27 CleanGuitar Guitar √

121 1 27 DetCleanGtr Guitar √

121 2 27 MidToneGtr Guitar √

121 3 27 Chorus Gtr Guitar

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

121 4 27 Vintage S. Guitar

121 5 27 ProcesElGtr Guitar

121 6 27 SingleCoil Guitar

121 7 27 NewStra.Gtr Guitar

121 8 27 Guitarish Guitar

121 9 27 L&R El.Gtr Guitar

121 10 27 L&R El.Gtr2 Guitar

121 11 27 Country Nu Guitar

121 12 27 FunkyWhaSw Guitar

121 0 28 MutedGuitar Guitar √

121 1 28 FunkyCutGtr Guitar √

121 2 28 MuteVeloGtr Guitar √

121 3 28 Jazz Man Guitar √

121 4 28 R&R Guitar Guitar

121 5 28 Stra.Chime Guitar

121 6 28 CleanMutGtr Guitar

121 7 28 RhythmElGtr Guitar

121 8 28 Clean Funk Guitar

121 9 28 Disto Mute Guitar

121 0 29 OverdriveGt Guitar √

121 1 29 Guitar Pinch Guitar √

121 0 30 DistortionG Guitar √

121 1 30 FeedbackGtr Guitar √

121 2 30 DistRhytmGt Guitar √

121 3 30 JoystGtr Y- Guitar

121 4 30 PowerChords Guitar

121 5 30 MuteMonster Guitar

121 6 30 WetDistGtr Guitar

121 7 30 SoloDistGtr Guitar

121 8 30 Stereo Dist Guitar

121 0 31 GtrHarmonic Guitar √

121 1 31 GtrFeedback Guitar √

121 2 31 EGHarmonics Guitar

121 0 32 Acous. Bass Bass √

121 1 32 AcBass Buzz Bass

121 2 32 Bass & Ride Bass

121 0 33 Finger Bass Bass √

121 1 33 Finger Slap Bass √

121 2 33 Fing ElBass Bass

121 3 33 FingElBass2 Bass

121 4 33 FingElBass3 Bass

121 5 33 Stick Bass Bass

121 0 34 Picked Bass Bass √

121 1 34 Pick ElBass Bass

121 2 34 PickElBass2 Bass

121 3 34 Stein Bass Bass

121 4 34 Gtr Bass Bass

121 5 34 Bass Mute Bass

121 0 35 Fretl. Bass Bass √

121 1 35 Fret. Bass2 Bass

121 2 35 Fretless Sw Bass

121 3 35 Sweet Fret Bass

121 4 35 DarkR&BBass Bass

121 0 36 Slap Bass 1 Bass √

121 1 36 SuperSwBass Bass

121 2 36 SuperSwBas2 Bass

121 0 37 Slap Bass 2 Bass √

121 1 37 Thumb Bass Bass

121 2 37 Dyna Bass Bass

121 0 38 SynthBass 1 Bass √

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

156 Factory Data

Programs (Program Change order)

121 1 38 SynBassWarm Bass √

121 2 38 SynBassReso Bass √

121 3 38 Clav Bass Bass √

121 4 38 Hammer Bass √

121 5 38 30303 Bass Bass

121 6 38 30303Square Bass

121 7 38 Bass Square Bass

121 8 38 SynBass Res Bass

121 9 38 Digi Bass 1 Bass

121 10 38 Digi Bass 2 Bass

121 11 38 Digi Bass 3 Bass

121 12 38 BlindAsABat Bass

121 13 38 Jungle Bass Bass

121 14 38 Auto Pilot Synth 2

121 15 38 Hybrid Bass Bass

121 16 38 Dr. Octave Bass

121 0 39 SynthBass 2 Bass √

121 1 39 Attack Bass Bass √

121 2 39 Rubber Bass Bass √

121 3 39 AttackPulse Bass √

121 4 39 Euro Bass Bass

121 5 39 Jungle Rez Bass

121 6 39 Nasty Bass Bass

121 7 39 Phat Bass Bass

121 8 39 PoinkerBass Bass

121 0 40 Violin Strings & Vocals √

121 1 40 SlowAttViol Strings & Vocals √

121 2 40 Solo Violin Strings & Vocals

121 3 40 Slow Violin Strings & Vocals

121 0 41 Viola Strings & Vocals √

121 0 42 Cello Strings & Vocals √

121 0 43 Contrabass Strings & Vocals √

121 0 44 Tremolo Str Strings & Vocals √

121 0 45 PizzicatoSt Strings & Vocals √

121 1 45 PizzEnsembl Strings & Vocals

121 2 45 PizzSection Strings & Vocals

121 3 45 Dbl Strings Strings & Vocals

121 0 46 Orches.Harp Strings & Vocals √

121 1 46 Yang Chin Strings & Vocals √

121 0 47 Timpani Drum & Perc √

121 0 48 StringsEns1 Strings & Vocals √

121 1 48 String&Bras Strings & Vocals √

121 2 48 60s Strings Strings & Vocals √

121 3 48 St. Strings Strings & Vocals

121 4 48 LegatoStrng Strings & Vocals

121 5 48 i3 Strings Strings & Vocals

121 6 48 N Strings Strings & Vocals

121 7 48 ArcoStrings Strings & Vocals

121 8 48 Oct.Strings Strings & Vocals

121 9 48 StringQuart Strings & Vocals

121 10 48 Symph. Bows Strings & Vocals

121 11 48 Ens. & Solo Strings & Vocals

121 12 48 Camera Str. Strings & Vocals

121 13 48 ArabStrings Strings & Vocals

121 0 49 StringsEns2 Strings & Vocals √

121 1 49 SweeperStr. Strings & Vocals

121 0 50 SynStrings1 Strings & Vocals √

121 1 50 SynStrings3 Strings & Vocals √

121 2 50 Analog Str Strings & Vocals

121 3 50 AnalogVelve Strings & Vocals

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

121 4 50 Odissey Strings & Vocals

121 0 51 SynStrings2 Strings & Vocals √

121 0 52 Choir Aahs Strings & Vocals √

121 1 52 Choir Aahs2 Strings & Vocals √

121 2 52 Oooh Voices Strings & Vocals

121 3 52 OhSlowVoice Strings & Vocals

121 4 52 Take Voices Strings & Vocals

121 5 52 TakeVoices2 Strings & Vocals

121 6 52 Oooh Choir Strings & Vocals

121 7 52 Aaah Choir Strings & Vocals

121 8 52 Mmmh Choir Strings & Vocals

121 9 52 Oh-AhVoices Strings & Vocals

121 10 52 Slow Choir Strings & Vocals

121 11 52 Grand Choir Strings & Vocals

121 12 52 Choir Light Strings & Vocals

121 13 52 StringChoir Strings & Vocals

121 0 53 Voice Oohs Strings & Vocals √

121 1 53 Humming Strings & Vocals √

121 2 53 Doolally Strings & Vocals

121 3 53 Airways Strings & Vocals

121 0 54 Synth Voice Strings & Vocals √

121 1 54 AnalogVoice Strings & Vocals √

121 2 54 Vocalesque Strings & Vocals

121 3 54 Vocalscape Strings & Vocals

121 4 54 ClassicVox Strings & Vocals

121 5 54 DreamVoice Strings & Vocals

121 0 55 Orches. Hit Brass √

121 1 55 BassHitPlus Brass √

121 2 55 6th Hit Brass √

121 3 55 Euro Hit Brass √

121 4 55 BrassImpact Brass

121 5 55 HitInIndia SFX

121 6 55 Wild Arp Synth 2

121 7 55 Flip Blip Synth 2

121 0 56 Trumpet Trp & Trbn √

121 1 56 DarkTrumpet Trp & Trbn √

121 2 56 Trumpet 2 Trp & Trbn

121 3 56 MonoTrumpet Trp & Trbn

121 4 56 TrumpetExpr Trp & Trbn

121 5 56 TrumptPitch Trp & Trbn

121 6 56 Dual Trump Trp & Trbn

121 7 56 Flugel Horn Trp & Trbn

121 8 56 Warm Flugel Trp & Trbn

121 9 56 BeBopCornet Trp & Trbn

121 0 57 Trombone Trp & Trbn √

121 1 57 Trombone 2 Trp & Trbn √

121 2 57 BrightTromb Trp & Trbn √

121 3 57 HardTrombon Trp & Trbn

121 4 57 SoftTrombon Trp & Trbn

121 5 57 PitchTromb Trp & Trbn

121 0 58 Tuba Trp & Trbn √

121 1 58 Ob.Tuba Trp & Trbn

121 2 58 Tuba Gold Trp & Trbn

121 3 58 Dynabone Trp & Trbn

121 0 59 Muted Trp Trp & Trbn √

121 1 59 Muted Trp 2 Trp & Trbn √

121 2 59 Wha Trumpet Trp & Trbn

121 3 59 MutEnsemble Trp & Trbn

121 4 59 MutEnsembl2 Trp & Trbn

121 0 60 French Horn Brass √

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

157

Factory Data

Programs (Program Change order)

121 1 60 FrenchHorn2 Brass √

121 2 60 French Sect Brass

121 3 60 ClassicHorn Brass

121 4 60 Horns & Ens Brass

121 0 61 BrassSect.1 Brass √

121 1 61 BrassSect.2 Brass √

121 2 61 Tight Brass Brass

121 3 61 Glen&Friend Brass

121 4 61 BigBandBrs Brass

121 5 61 Sax & Brass Brass

121 6 61 Glen & Boys Brass

121 7 61 Trp & Brass Brass

121 8 61 AttackBrass Brass

121 9 61 Trumpet Ens Brass

121 10 61 TromboneEns Brass

121 11 61 Trombones Brass

121 12 61 TightBrass2 Brass

121 13 61 Fat Brass Brass

121 14 61 Dyna Brass Brass

121 15 61 Brass Expr. Brass

121 16 61 Brass Band Brass

121 17 61 Film Brass Brass

121 18 61 Brass Slow Brass

121 19 61 Fanfare Brass

121 20 61 Movie Brass Brass

121 21 61 Power Brass Brass

121 22 61 Dyna Brass2 Brass

121 23 61 Sfz Brass Brass

121 24 61 Dbl Brass Brass

121 25 61 Brass Hit Brass

121 26 61 Brass Fall Brass

121 0 62 Syn Brass 1 Brass √

121 1 62 Syn Brass 3 Brass √

121 2 62 AnalogBras1 Brass √

121 3 62 Jump Brass Brass √

121 4 62 ElectrikBrs Brass

121 5 62 Syn Brass 5 Brass

121 0 63 Syn Brass 2 Brass √

121 1 63 Syn Brass 4 Brass √

121 2 63 AnalogBras2 Brass √

121 3 63 Brass Pad Brass

121 4 63 Big Panner Synth 1

121 0 64 Soprano Sax Sax √

121 1 64 Sweet Sprno Sax

121 0 65 Alto Sax Sax √

121 1 65 Alto Breath Sax

121 2 65 SaxEnsemble Sax

121 3 65 BreathyAlto Sax

121 4 65 AltSaxGrowl Sax

121 0 66 Tenor Sax Sax √

121 1 66 Tenor Noise Sax

121 2 66 Soft Tenor Sax

121 3 66 TenorBreath Sax

121 4 66 Tenor Growl Sax

121 5 66 Folk Sax Sax

121 0 67 BaritoneSax Sax √

121 1 67 Barit Growl Sax

121 2 67 BreathyBari Sax

121 0 68 Oboe Woodwind √

121 1 68 Double Reed Woodwind

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

121 0 69 EnglishHorn Woodwind √

121 1 69 EnglisHorn2 Woodwind

121 0 70 Bassoon Woodwind √

121 0 71 Clarinet Woodwind √

121 1 71 Jazz Clarin Woodwind

121 2 71 Clarinet G Woodwind

121 3 71 Sect Winds Woodwind

121 4 71 Sect Winds2 Woodwind

121 5 71 ClarinetEns Woodwind

121 6 71 Woodwinds Woodwind

121 7 71 Folk Clarin Woodwind

121 0 72 Piccolo Woodwind √

121 1 72 Small Orch Woodwind

121 2 72 Nay Woodwind

121 0 73 Flute Woodwind √

121 1 73 Jazz Flute Woodwind

121 2 73 FluteSwitch Woodwind

121 3 73 FluteDyn5th Woodwind

121 4 73 Flute Frull Woodwind

121 5 73 Orch. Flute Woodwind

121 6 73 Flute Muted Woodwind

121 7 73 WoodenFlute Woodwind

121 8 73 Bambu Flute Woodwind

121 9 73 Flute 2 Woodwind

121 0 74 Recorder Woodwind √

121 1 74 Recorder 2 Woodwind

121 0 75 Pan Flute Woodwind √

121 1 75 Kawala Woodwind

121 0 76 BlownBottle Woodwind √

121 0 77 Shakuhachi Woodwind √

121 1 77 Old Shaku Woodwind

121 2 77 Shaku 2 Woodwind

121 0 78 Whistle Woodwind √

121 1 78 Whistle 2 Woodwind

121 0 79 Ocarina Woodwind √

121 0 80 Lead Square Synth 2 √

121 1 80 LeadSquare2 Synth 2 √

121 2 80 Lead Sine Synth 2 √

121 3 80 Old Portam Synth 2

121 4 80 Dance Lead Synth 2

121 5 80 Wave Lead Synth 2

121 6 80 Sine Wave Synth 2

121 7 80 Analog Lead Synth 2

121 8 80 Old&Analog Synth 2

121 9 80 Gliding Sq. Synth 2

121 10 80 Sine Switch Synth 2

121 11 80 Square Rez Synth 2

121 0 81 Lead Saw Synth 2 √

121 1 81 Lead Saw 2 Synth 2 √

121 2 81 LeadSawPuls Synth 2 √

121 3 81 LeadDblSaw Synth 2 √

121 4 81 Seq. Analog Synth 2 √

121 5 81 Power Saw Synth 2

121 6 81 Octo Lead Synth 2

121 7 81 Seq Lead Synth 2

121 8 81 PhatSawLead Synth 2

121 9 81 Glide Lead Synth 2

121 10 81 Fire Wave Synth 2

121 11 81 Rezbo Synth 2

121 12 81 Syn Pianoid Synth 2

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

158 Factory Data

Programs (Program Change order)

121 0 82 Calliope Synth 2 √

121 0 83 Chiff Synth 2 √

121 0 84 Charang Synth 2 √

121 1 84 Wire Lead Synth 2 √

121 2 84 Synchro City Synth 2

121 3 84 Sync Kron Synth 2

121 4 84 MetallicRez Synth 2

121 5 84 Brian Sync Synth 2

121 6 84 Arp Twins Synth 2

121 0 85 Voice Lead Strings & Vocals √

121 1 85 EtherVoices Strings & Vocals

121 2 85 Cyber Choir Strings & Vocals

121 0 86 Fifths Lead Synth 2 √

121 1 86 Crimson5ths Synth 2

121 0 87 Bass & Lead Synth 2 √

121 1 87 Soft Wrl Synth 2 √

121 2 87 ElectroLead Synth 2

121 3 87 Rich Lead Synth 2

121 4 87 ThinAnaLead Synth 2

121 5 87 EspressLead Synth 2

121 6 87 HipHop Lead Synth 2

121 7 87 Square Bass Synth 2

121 8 87 Big & Raw Synth 2

121 9 87 Cat Lead Synth 2

121 0 88 New Age Pad Synth 1 √

121 1 88 VirtualTrav Synth 1

121 2 88 Arp Angeles Synth 1

121 0 89 Warm Pad Synth 1 √

121 1 89 Sine Pad Synth 1 √

121 2 89 MasterPad Synth 1

121 3 89 Power Synth Synth 1

121 4 89 The Pad Synth 1

121 5 89 Money Pad Synth 1

121 6 89 Dark Pad Synth 1

121 7 89 Freedom Pad Synth 1

121 8 89 Analog Pad Synth 1

121 9 89 Analog Pad2 Synth 1

121 0 90 Polysynth Synth 1 √

121 1 90 Reso Sweep Synth 1

121 2 90 Sky Watcher Synth 1

121 3 90 Syn Sweeper Synth 1

121 4 90 Super Sweep Synth 1

121 5 90 Wave Sweep Synth 1

121 6 90 Cross Sweep Synth 1

121 7 90 Dig PolySix Synth 1

121 8 90 Noisy Stabb Synth 1

121 9 90 Mega Synth Synth 1

121 10 90 TecnoPhonic Synth 1

121 11 90 Farluce Synth 1

121 0 91 Choir Pad Synth 1 √

121 1 91 Itopia Pad Synth 1 √

121 2 91 Fresh Air Strings & Vocals

121 3 91 Heaven Synth 1

121 4 91 Pop Syn Pad Synth 1

121 5 91 Future Pad Synth 1

121 6 91 TsunamiWave Synth 1

121 7 91 FreshBreath Synth 1

121 8 91 RavelianPad Synth 1

121 9 91 FullVox Pad Synth 1

121 10 91 Dance ReMix Synth 1

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

121 0 92 BowedGlass Synth 1 √

121 0 93 MetallicPad Synth 1 √

121 1 93 Cosmic Synth 1

121 0 94 Halo Pad Synth 1 √

121 0 95 Sweep Pad Synth 1 √

121 1 95 AstralDream Synth 1

121 2 95 Meditate Synth 1

121 3 95 DarkElement Synth 1

121 4 95 Mellow Pad Synth 1

121 5 95 Cinema Pad Synth 1

121 0 96 Ice Rain Synth 1 √

121 1 96 MotionOcean Synth 1

121 2 96 Caribbean Synth 1

121 0 97 Soundtrack Synth 1 √

121 1 97 Air Clouds Synth 1

121 2 97 Reso Down Synth 1

121 3 97 Tinklin Pad Synth 1

121 4 97 Pods In Pad Synth 1

121 5 97 Noble Pad Synth 1

121 6 97 Rave Synth 1

121 7 97 ElastickPad Synth 1

121 0 98 Crystal Synth 2 √

121 1 98 SynthMallet SFX √

121 2 98 Vs Bell Boy Mallet & Bell

121 3 98 KrystalBell Mallet & Bell

121 4 98 Digi Bell Mallet & Bell

121 5 98 Moving Bell Synth 1

121 6 98 Bell Pad Mallet & Bell

121 7 98 Bell Choir Synth 1

121 0 99 Atmosphere Synth 2 √

121 0 100 Brightness Synth 2 √

121 1 100 Lonely Spin Synth 1

121 2 100 Syn Ghostly Synth 1

121 0 101 Goblins SFX √

121 1 101 MotionRaver Synth 2

121 2 101 Digi IcePad Synth 1

121 0 102 Echo Drops SFX √

121 1 102 Echo Bell SFX √

121 2 102 Echo Pan SFX √

121 3 102 Band Passed Synth 2

121 4 102 Pan Reso Synth 2

121 5 102 Moon Cycles Synth 1

121 0 103 Star Theme SFX √

121 0 104 Sitar Guitar √

121 1 104 Sitar 2 Guitar √

121 2 104 SitarTambou Guitar

121 3 104 IndianStars Guitar

121 4 104 IndianFrets Guitar

121 5 104 Bouzouki Guitar

121 6 104 Tambra Guitar

121 0 105 Banjo Guitar √

121 1 105 BanjoKeyOff Guitar

121 2 105 Oud Guitar

121 3 105 Jaw Harp SFX

121 0 106 Shamisen Guitar √

121 0 107 Koto Guitar √

121 1 107 Taisho Koto Guitar √

121 2 107 Kanun Guitar

121 3 107 Kanun Trem. Guitar

121 4 107 Kanun Mix Guitar

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

159

Factory Data

Programs (Program Change order)

121 0 108 Kalimba Mallet & Bell √

121 1 108 VeloKalimba Mallet & Bell

121 0 109 Bag Pipe Woodwind √

121 1 109 War Pipes Woodwind

121 0 110 Fiddle Strings & Vocals √

121 0 111 Shanai Woodwind √

121 1 111 Zurna Woodwind

121 2 111 Hichiriki Woodwind

121 0 112 Tinkle Bell Mallet & Bell √

121 1 112 Gamelan Mallet & Bell

121 2 112 BaliGamelan Mallet & Bell

121 3 112 GarbageMall Mallet & Bell

121 0 113 Agogo Drum & Perc √

121 0 114 Steel Drums Mallet & Bell √

121 1 114 Warm Steel Mallet & Bell

121 0 115 Woodblock Drum & Perc √

121 1 115 Castanets Drum & Perc √

121 0 116 Taiko Drum Drum & Perc √

121 1 116 Concert BD Drum & Perc √

121 0 117 Melodic Tom Drum & Perc √

121 1 117 MelodicTom2 Drum & Perc √

121 2 117 Rev Tom Drum & Perc

121 0 118 Synth Drum Drum & Perc √

121 1 118 Rhyt.BoxTom Drum & Perc √

121 2 118 Electr.Drum Drum & Perc √

121 3 118 Rev Snare Drum & Perc

121 0 119 Reverse Cym Drum & Perc √

121 1 119 Dragon Gong Drum & Perc

121 0 120 GtFretNoise SFX √

121 1 120 GtrCutNoise SFX √

121 2 120 AcBassStrng SFX √

121 3 120 VoxWahChick Guitar

121 0 121 BreathNoise SFX √

121 1 121 Flute Click Woodwind √

121 0 122 Seashore SFX √

121 1 122 Rain SFX √

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

121 2 122 Thunder SFX √

121 3 122 Wind SFX √

121 4 122 Stream SFX √

121 5 122 Bubble SFX √

121 0 123 Bird Tweet SFX √

121 1 123 Dog SFX √

121 2 123 HorseGallop SFX √

121 3 123 Bird Tweet2 SFX √

121 0 124 Telephone 1 SFX √

121 1 124 Telephone 2 SFX √

121 2 124 Door Creak SFX √

121 3 124 Door SFX √

121 4 124 Scratch SFX √

121 5 124 Wind Chime SFX √

121 0 125 Helicopter SFX √

121 1 125 Car Engine SFX √

121 2 125 Car Stop SFX √

121 3 125 Car Pass SFX √

121 4 125 Car Crash SFX √

121 5 125 Siren SFX √

121 6 125 Train SFX √

121 7 125 Jetplane SFX √

121 8 125 Starship SFX √

121 9 125 Burst Noise SFX √

121 0 126 Applause SFX √

121 1 126 Laughing SFX √

121 2 126 Screaming SFX √

121 3 126 Punch SFX √

121 4 126 Heart Beat SFX √

121 5 126 Footsteps SFX √

121 6 126 Stadium SFX

121 0 127 Gun Shot SFX √

121 1 127 Machine Gun SFX √

121 2 127 Lasergun SFX √

121 3 127 Explosion SFX √

CC00 CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2

160 Factory Data

Drum Kits

DRUM KITS

The following table enlists all Pa50SD Factory Drum Kit Pro-

grams in order of Bank Select-Program Change number.

Legend: The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely

select the Programs. CC00: Control Change 0, or Bank Select

MSB. CC32: Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC:

Program Change.

CC00 CC32 PC Name GM2

120 0 0 Std. Kit1 √

120 0 1 Std. Kit2

120 0 2 Std. Kit3

120 0 3 AcousticKit

120 0 4 Std. Kit4

120 0 5-7: (remap to 0)

120 0 8 Room Kit1 √

120 0 9 HipHop Kit1

120 0 10 Jungle Kit

120 0 11 Techno Kit1

120 0 12 Room Kit2

120 0 13 HipHop Kit2

120 0 14 Techno Kit2

120 0 15 Techno Kit3

120 0 16 Power Kit1 √

120 0 17 Power Kit2

120 0 18-23: (remap to 16)

120 0 24 Electro Kit √

120 0 25 Analog Kit √

120 0 26 House Kit1

120 0 27 House Kit2

120 0 28 House Kit3

120 0 29 House Kit4

120 0 30-31: (remap to 24)

120 0 32 Jazz Kit √

120 0 33-39: (remap to 32)

120 0 40 Brush Kit1 √

120 0 41 Brush V.S.2

120 0 42-47: (remap to 40)

120 0 48 OrchestraK. √

120 0 49: (remap to 48)

120 0 50 Bdrum&Sdrum

120 0 51: (remap to 116)

120 0 52-55: (remap to 48)

120 0 56 SFX Kit √

120 0 57-63: (remap to 56)

120 0 64 Percus.Kit1

120 0 65 Latin P.Kit

120 0 66 TRI-Per.KIT

120 0 67 i30 Perc.Kit

120 0 68-71: (remap to 64)

120 0 72-115: (remap to 0)

120 0 116 Arabian Kit 1

120 0 117 Arabian Kit 2

120 0 118-127: (remap to 0)

CC00 CC32 PC Name GM2

161

Factory Data

Drum Kit instruments

DRUM KIT INSTRUMENTS

120-0-0: Std. Kit1120-0-1: Std. Kit2 120-0-2: Std. Kit3

Note Sample Excl. Sample Excl. Sample Excl.

8G#-10 BD-Dry 1 Off

9A-117 BD-House 1 Off 17 BD-House 1 Off 17 BD-House 1 Off

10 A#-1125 99-SD Off 125 99-SD Off 125 99-SD Off

11 B-1123 88-BD Off 123 88-BD Off 123 88-BD Off

12C0124 88-SD Off 124 88-SD Off 124 88-SD Off

13 C#0 37 SD-Full Room Off 40 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off 38 SD-Off Center Off

14D048 SD-Processed 1 48 SD-Processed Off 48 SD-Processed Off

15 D#0 0 BD-Dry 1 Off 6 BD-Pillow Off 6 BD-Pillow Off

16E012 BD-Tight Off 27 BD-Amb.Rocker Off 27 BD-Amb.Rocker Off

17F031 SD-Dry 1 Off 39 SD-Jazz Ring Off 42 SD-BrushHit Off

18 F#0 87 HH1 Closed2 1 87 HH1 Closed2 1 87 HH1 Closed2 1

19G02 BD-Dry 3 Off 0 BD-Dry 1 Off 5 BD-Jazz Off

20 G#0 73 SideStickAmb Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off

21A0 120 SD-Orch. 7 32 SD-Dry 2 7 69 SD-Brasser 7

22 A#0 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 49 SD-CrackerRoom 7 32 SD-Dry 2 Off

23 B0 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off

24 C1120 SD-Orch. 7 120 SD-Orch. 7 120 SD-Orch. 7

25 C#1119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7

26 D1121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off

27 D#1143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off

28 E1281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off

29 F1145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7

30 F#1145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7

31G174 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off

32 G#1142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off

33 A1249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off

34 A#1213 Triangle-Open Off 213 Triangle-Open Off 213 Triangle-Open Off

35 B12 BD-Dry 3 Off 12 BD-Tight Off 0 BD-Dry 1 Off

36 C2 0 BD-Dry 1 Off 10 BD-Tubby Off 10 BD-Tubby Off

37 C#2 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickAmb Off

38 D2 32 SD-Dry 2 Off 38 SD-Off Center Off 39 SD-Jazz Ring Off

39 D#2 122 Hand Claps Off 127 88-Claps Off 127 88-Claps Off

40 E2 37 SD-Full Room Off 38 SD-Off Center Off 40 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off

41F2 79 Tom 2-Floor Off 79 Tom 2-Floor Off 79 Tom 2-Floor Off

42 F#2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 86 HH1 Closed1 1 92 HH2 Closed1 1

43 G279 Tom 2-Floor Off 79 Tom 2-Floor Off 79 Tom 2-Floor Off

44 G#2 94 HH2 Foot 1 88 HH1 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1

45 A2 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 78 Tom 2-Lo Off

46 A#2 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1

47 B2 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 78 Tom 2-Lo Off

48 C3 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 77 Tom 2-Hi Off

49 C#3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off

50 D3 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 77 Tom 2-Hi Off

51D#3 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off

52 E3 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off

53 F3 114 Ride-Jazz Off 114 Ride-Jazz Off 114 Ride-Jazz Off

54 F#3 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off

55 G3107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off

56 G#3 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off

57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off

58 A#3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off

59 B3 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off

60 C4 171 BongoHi-Open Off 171 BongoHi-Open Off 171 BongoHi-Open Off

61C#4 168 BongoLo-Open Off 168 BongoLo-Open Off 168 BongoLo-Open Off

62 D4 159 CongaLoMtSlp Off 159 CongaLoMtSlp Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off

63 D#4 161 CongaHi-Open Off 161 CongaHi-Open Off 161 CongaHi-Open Off

64 E4 158 CongaLo-Open Off 158 CongaLo-Open Off 158 CongaLo-Open Off

65 F4 207 TimbaleHi-Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi-Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi-Rim2 Off

66 F#4 202 TimbaleLo-Open Off 202 TimbaleLo-Open Off 202 TimbaleLo-Open Off

67 G4224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off

68 G#4 224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off

69 A4 219 Cabasa-Up Off 219 Cabasa-Up Off 219 Cabasa-Up Off

70 A#4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off

71B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2

72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2

73 C#5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3

74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3

75 D#5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off

76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off

77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off

78 F#5 215 Cuica-Hi 4 215 Cuica-Hi 4 215 Cuica-Hi 4

79 G5216 Cuica-Lo 4 216 Cuica-Lo 4 216 Cuica-Lo 4

80 G#5 214 Triangle-Mute 5 214 Triangle-Mute 5 214 Triangle-Mute 5

81A5 213 Triangle-Open 5 213 Triangle-Open 5 213 Triangle-Open 5

82 A#5 220 Cabasa-Down Off 220 Cabasa-Down Off 220 Cabasa-Down Off

83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off

84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off

85 C#6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off

86 D6 203 TimbaleLo-Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo-Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo-Mute 6

87 D#6 202 TimbaleLo-Open 6 202 TimbaleLo-Open 6 202 TimbaleLo-Open 6

88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off

Legend: In the Drum Kit

tables, the numer 120-x-x

before each Drum Kit

name is the Bank Select

MSB (CC00) - Bank

Select LSB (CC32) - Pro-

gram Change (PC) num-

ber. Sample enlists both

the sample number in

memory, and the sample

name. Excl is the Exlcusive

parameter: when a note is

struck, all notes with the

same Exclusive number

are stopped. A right-point-

ing arrow (

→

) indicates a

velocity switch.

162 Factory Data

Drum Kit instruments

120-0-3: AcousticKit 120-0-4: Std. Kit4 120-0-8: Room Kit1120-0-9: HipHop Kit1

Note Sample Excl. Sample Excl. Sample Excl. Sample Excl.

9A-117 BD-House 1 Off 17 BD-House 1 Off 13 BD-Squash Off 13 BD-Squash Off

10 A#-1125 99-SD Off 125 99-SD Off 59 SD-Hip 6 Off 59 SD-Hip 6 Off

11 B-1123 88-BD Off 123 88-BD Off 123 88-BD Off 123 88-BD Off

12C0124 88-SD Off 124 88-SD Off 124 88-SD Off 124 88-SD Off

13 C#0 38 SD-Off Center Off 38 SD-Off Center Off 56 SD-Hip 3 Off 56 SD-Hip 3 Off

14D049 SD-CrackerRoom Off 48 SD-Processed 1 58 SD-Hip 5 Off 58 SD-Hip 5 Off

15 D#0 6 BD-Pillow Off 27 BD-Amb.Rocker Off 25 BD-Ambi Kick Off 25 BD-Ambi Kick Off

16E027 BD-Amb.Rocker Off 12 BD-Tight Off 11 BD-Gated Off 11 BD-Gated Off

17F040 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off 39 SD-Jazz Ring Off 40 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off 40 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off

18 F#0 87 HH1 Closed2 1 87 HH1 Closed2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1

19G05 BD-Jazz Off 2 BD-Dry 3 Off 6 BD-Pillow Off 6 BD-Pillow Off

20 G#0 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off

21A0 120 SD-Orch. 7 32 SD-Dry 2 Off 47 SD-Yowie 7 47 SD-Yowie Off

22 A#0 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 31 SD-Dry 1 Off 59 SD-Hip 6 7 59 SD-Hip 6 Off

23 B0 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off

24 C1120 SD-Orch. 7 120 SD-Orch. 7 120 SD-Orch. 7 120 SD-Orch. 7

25 C#1119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7

26 D1121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off

27 D#1143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off

28 E1281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off

29 F1145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7

30 F#1145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7

31G174 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off

32 G#1142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off

33 A1249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off

34 A#1213 Triangle-Open Off 213 Triangle-Open Off 213 Triangle-Open Off 213 Triangle-Open Off

35 B13 BD-Normal Off 2 BD-Dry 3 Off 10 BD-Tubby Off 28 BD-Pop 99 Off

36 C2 0→6 BD-Dry 1→BD-Pillow Off 12 BD-Tight Off 27 BD-Amb.Rocker Off 21 BD-Hip 3 Off

37 C#2 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 72 SideStickDry Off 126 88-Rimshot Off

38 D2 35→36

SD-Ghost f→SD-Ghost p

Off 40 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off 49 SD-CrackerRoom Off 60 SD-Ringy Off

39 D#2 122 Hand Claps Off 127 88-Claps Off 127 88-Claps Off 127 88-Claps Off

40 E2 35→36

SD-Ghost f→SD-Ghost p

Off 37 SD-Full Room Off 37 SD-Full Room Off 67 SD-Vintage6 Off

41F2 79 Tom 2-Floor Off 79 Tom 2-Floor Off 79 Tom 2-Floor Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

42 F#2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 86 HH1 Closed1 1 97 HH-OldClose1 1

43 G279 Tom 2-Floor Off 79 Tom 2-Floor Off 79 Tom 2-Floor Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

44 G#2 94 HH2 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 100 HH-OldClose2 Off

45 A2 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

46 A#2 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 96 HH2 Open 1 98 HH-Old Open1 1

47 B2 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 78 Tom 2-Lo Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

48 C3 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

49 C#3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off

50 D3 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 77 Tom 2-Hi Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

51D#3 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off

52 E3 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 108 CymbalReverse Off

53 F3 115 Ride-Cup Off 114 Ride-Jazz Off 114 Ride-Jazz Off 114 Ride-Jazz Off

54 F#3 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off

55 G3107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off

56 G#3 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 136 88-Cowbell Off

57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off

58 A#3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off

59 B3 114 Ride-Jazz Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off

60 C4 171 BongoHi-Open Off 171 BongoHi-Open Off 171 BongoHi-Open Off 171 BongoHi-Open Off

61C#4 168 BongoLo-Open Off 168 BongoLo-Open Off 168 BongoLo-Open Off 168 BongoLo-Open Off

62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off

63 D#4 161 CongaHi-Open Off 161 CongaHi-Open Off 161 CongaHi-Open Off 161 CongaHi-Open Off

64 E4 158 CongaLo-Open Off 158 CongaLo-Open Off 158 CongaLo-Open Off 158 CongaLo-Open Off

65 F4 207 TimbaleHi-Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi-Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi-Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi-Rim2 Off

66 F#4 202 TimbaleLo-Open Off 202 TimbaleLo-Open Off 202 TimbaleLo-Open Off 202 TimbaleLo-Open Off

67 G4224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off

68 G#4 224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off 224 Agogo-Bell Off

69 A4 219 Cabasa-Up Off 219 Cabasa-Up Off 219 Cabasa-Up Off 219 Cabasa-Up Off

70 A#4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 101 HH-Old Open2 Off

71B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2

72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2

73 C#5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3

74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3

75 D#5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off

76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off

77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off

78 F#5 215 Cuica-Hi 4 215 Cuica-Hi 4 215 Cuica-Hi 4 215 Cuica-Hi 4

79 G5216 Cuica-Lo 4 216 Cuica-Lo 4 216 Cuica-Lo 4 216 Cuica-Lo 4

80 G#5 214 Triangle-Mute 5 214 Triangle-Mute 5 214 Triangle-Mute 5 214 Triangle-Mute 5

81A5 213 Triangle-Open 5 213 Triangle-Open 5 213 Triangle-Open 5 213 Triangle-Open 5

82 A#5 220 Cabasa-Down Off 220 Cabasa-Down Off 220 Cabasa-Down Off 220 Cabasa-Down Off

83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off

84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off

85 C#6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off

86 D6 203 TimbaleLo-Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo-Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo-Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo-Mute 6

87 D#6 202 TimbaleLo-Open 6 202 TimbaleLo-Open 6 202 TimbaleLo-Open 6 202 TimbaleLo-Open 6

88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off

163

Factory Data

Drum Kit instruments

120-0-10: Jungle Kit 120-0-11: Techno Kit1120-0-12: Room Kit2 120-0-13: HipHop Kit2

Note Sample Excl. Sample Excl. Sample Excl. Sample Excl.

9A-113 BD-Squash Off 21 BD-Hip 3 Off 13 BD-Squash Off 13 BD-Squash Off

10 A#-159 SD-Hip 6 Off 59 SD-Hip 6 Off 59 SD-Hip 6 Off 59 SD-Hip 6 Off

11 B-1123 88-BD Off 123 88-BD Off 123 88-BD Off 123 88-BD Off

12C0124 88-SD Off 124 88-SD Off 124 88-SD Off 124 88-SD Off

13 C#0 56 SD-Hip 3 Off 56 SD-Hip 3 Off 56 SD-Hip 3 Off 56 SD-Hip 3 Off

14D058 SD-Hip 5 Off 58 SD-Hip 5 Off 58 SD-Hip 5 Off 58 SD-Hip 5 Off

15 D#0 25 BD-Ambi Kick Off 25 BD-Ambi Kick Off 25 BD-Ambi Kick Off 25 BD-Ambi Kick Off

16E011 BD-Gated Off 11 BD-Gated Off 11 BD-Gated Off 11 BD-Gated Off

17F040 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off 40 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off 40 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off 40 SD-Amb.Piccolo Off

18 F#0 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1

19G06 BD-Pillow Off 6 BD-Pillow Off 6 BD-Pillow Off 6 BD-Pillow Off

20 G#0 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off

21A0 47 SD-Yowie Off 47 SD-Yowie Off 46 SD-Big Rock Off 47 SD-Yowie Off

22 A#0 59 SD-Hip 6 Off 59 SD-Hip 6 Off 59 SD-Hip 6 Off 59 SD-Hip 6 Off

23 B0 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off

24 C1120 SD-Orch. 7 120 SD-Orch. 7 120 SD-Orch. 7 120 SD-Orch. 7

25 C#1119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7 119 SD-Orch.Roll 7

26 D1121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off

27 D#1143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off

28 E1281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off

29 F1145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7

30 F#1145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7 145 DJ-Scratch2 7

31G174 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off

32 G#1142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off

33 A1249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off

34 A#1213 Triangle-Open Off 213 Triangle-Open Off 213 Triangle-Open Off 213 Triangle-Open Off

35 B119 BD-Hip 1 Off 13 BD-Squash Off 12 BD-Tight Off 25 BD-Ambi Kick Off

36 C2 29 BD-Deep 88 Off 17 BD-House 1 Off 27 BD-Amb.Rocker Off 24 BD-Dance 99 Off

37 C#2 121 FingerSnaps Off 242 Comp Voice Noise Off 72 SideStickDry Off 121 FingerSnaps Off

38 D2 66 SD-Vintage5 Off 125 99-SD Off 48 SD-Processed Off 51 SD-Rap Off

39 D#2 127 88-Claps Off 127 88-Claps Off 127 88-Claps Off 337 Alkis Off

40 E2 61 SD-Tiny Off 125 99-SD Off 47 SD-Yowie Off 55 SD-Hip 2 Off

41F2 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 139 Real El.Tom Off 76 Tom 1-Floor Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

42 F#2 129 88-HH Open 1 99 HH-Old TiteClos 1 93 HH2 Closed2 1 97 HH-OldClose1 1

43 G275 Tom 1-Hi Off 139 Real El.Tom Off 76 Tom 1-Floor Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

44 G#2 102 HH-Hip Off 103 HH-AlpoClose Off 94 HH2 Foot 1 102 HH-Hip Off

45 A2 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 139 Real El.Tom Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

46 A#2 98 HH-Old Open1 1 101 HH-Old Open2 1 91 HH1 Sizzle 1 98 HH-Old Open1 1

47 B2 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 139 Real El.Tom Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

48 C3 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 139 Real El.Tom Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

49 C#3 132 88-Crash Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off

50 D3 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 139 Real El.Tom Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off 75 Tom 1-Hi Off

51D#3 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off

52 E3 108 CymbalReverse Off 108 CymbalReverse Off 106 China Cymbal Off 108 CymbalReverse Off

53 F3 114 Ride-Jazz Off 114 Ride-Jazz Off 114 Ride-Jazz Off 114 Ride-Jazz Off

54 F#3 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin-Acc2 Off

55 G3107 Splash Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off

56 G#3 136 88-Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 136 88-Cowbell Off

57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off

58 A#3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off

59 B3 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off 113 Ride-Edge 2 Off